Adobe Media Server 5.0.6 Configuration And Administration Guide Mediaserver 506 Config Admin En

User Manual: adobe Adobe Media Server - 5.0.6 - Configuration and Administration Guide Free User Guide for Adobe Media Server Software, Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 268

DownloadAdobe Media Server 5.0.6 Configuration And Administration - Guide Mediaserver 506 Config Admin En
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
ADOBE MEDIA SERVER
Configuration and Administration Guide
®

Legal notices

Legal notices
For legal notices, see http://help.adobe.com/en_US/legalnotices/index.html.

Last updated 8/21/2014

iii

Contents
Chapter 1: Deploying the server
Configure ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Load balancing

........................................................................................................ 7

Deploying edge servers

................................................................................................ 8

Deploying 64-bit servers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Chapter 2: Configuring the server
Configure the server for virtual hosting
Working with configuration files
Configuring performance features
Configuring security features

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Performing general configuration tasks
Configuring content storage

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Configuring Apache HTTP Server

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Configure Apache for Adobe HTTP Dynamic Streaming and Apple HTTP Live Streaming
Configure HTTP Streaming failover
Using a third-party web server

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Configuring Differentiated Services (DiffServ)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Chapter 3: Using the Administration Console
Connecting to the Administration Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Inspecting applications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Manage administrators

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Managing the server

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Chapter 4: Monitoring and Managing Log Files
Working with log files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Access logs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Application logs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Diagnostic logs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Chapter 5: Administering the server
Start and stop the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Checking server status
Checking video files

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Managing the server on Linux
Scramble tool

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Chapter 6: Using the Administration API
Working with the Administration API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Chapter 7: XML configuration files reference
Changes to configuration files from 4.5 to 5.0.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Changes to configuration files from 4.0 to 4.5

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Last updated 8/21/2014

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Contents

Adaptor.xml file

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Application.xml file

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Logger.xml file

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Server.xml file

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Users.xml file

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Vhost.xml file

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Chapter 8: Diagnostics Log Messages
Message IDs in diagnostic logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Last updated 8/21/2014

iv

1

Chapter 1: Deploying the server
Configure ports
When you install Adobe Media Server, you can accept the default ports on which Adobe Media Server and Adobe
Media Administration Server listen. You can also enter new ports. The default ports for Adobe Media Server are 1935
and 80. The default port for Adobe Media Administration Server is 1111.
To test which ports a client can connect to on a Adobe Media Server hosted by Stefan Richter of FlashComGuru,
see FlashComGuru Port Tester.
To test which ports a client can connect to on your own Adobe Media Server, use a port tester developed and
hosted by Jake Hilton.

Port requirements
The following table describes ports on which clients must be able to establish connections to the server:
Port number

Protocol

Transport

Description

1935

RTMP/E

TCP

By default, Flash Player and AIR clients make RTMP
connections to Adobe Media Server over port 1935
over TCP.
To communicate with Adobe Media Server over the
RTMP protocol, clients attempt to connect to ports
in the following order: 1935, 80 (RTMP), 80 (RTMPT).

1935

RTMFP

UDP

By default, Flash Player and AIR clients make RTMFP
connections to Adobe Media Server over port 1935
over UDP.

80

RTMP/E, RTMTP, HTTP

TCP

By default, Flash Player and AIR clients that cannot
connect to Adobe Media Server over port 1935
attempt to tunnel over port 80 (RTMPT).
If Apache is installed and enabled, HTTP requests
made over port 80 are proxied to Apache over port
8134.
HTTP Streaming requests to port 80 can hang when
proxying to port 8134. Use port 8134 in the request
or configure Apache to listen directly on port 80
and configure Adobe Media Server not to listen on
port 80.

Last updated 8/21/2014

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Deploying the server

Port number

Protocol

Transport

Description

19350-65535

RTMFP

UDP

By default, clients use port 1935 and ports 1935065535 to communicate with Adobe Media Server
over the RTMFP protocol. The RTMFP protocol
communicates over UDP. Clients connect to the
server over 1935 and the server redirects the client
to a port between 19350 and 65535.
Allow inbound UDP traffic on 1935 and outbound
traffic on ports 19350 - 65535.
Allowing UDP inbound traffic from unknown hosts
on ports 19350 - 65535 is optional. Adobe Media
Server sends a packet out to a new client to redirect
it to a port in the range 19350 - 65535. This packet
attempts to punch a hole to allow the client traffic
back in over the correct port.To use server-side
RTMFP NetConnections, allow outbound UDP
traffic on all ports.

8134

HTTP

TCP

Adobe Media Server proxies HTTP requests to
Apache HTTP Server over port 8134.
HTTP Streaming requests to port 80 can hang when
proxying to port 8134. Use port 8134 in the request
or configure Apache to listen directly on port 80
and configure Adobe Media Server not to listen on
port 80.

1111

HTTP, RTMP

TCP

By default, Flash Player, AIR, and HTML clients
connect to Adobe Media Administration Server
over port 1111. Clients must specify port 1111 in
connection URLs.
Clients cannot access Adobe Media Administration
Server over RTMPS. As a result, Adobe recommends
that you block all external access to port 1111 so
that access to the Administration Server is
restricted to clients that are inside your firewall.

443

RTMPS

TCP

The default port for RTMPS. RTMPS adheres to SSL
standards for secure network connections and
enables connections through a TCP socket on a
secure port.

Configure IP addresses and ports
Use the ams.ini file to configure the IP addresses and ports on which Adobe Media Server listens for requests.
1 Open rootinstall/conf/ams.ini in a text editor.
2 Edit the ADAPTOR.HOSTPORT parameter. The default ports are:
ADAPTOR.HOSTPORT = :1935,80

3 Save the file and restart the server.

The Adaptor.xml configuration file uses the ADAPTOR.HOSTPORT parameter in the Adaptor/HostPortList/HostPort
element:
${ADAPTOR.HOSTPORT}

See also
“Start and stop the server” on page 108

Last updated 8/21/2014

2

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Deploying the server

“Add an adaptor” on page 15

Configure IP addresses and ports for RTMFP
RTMFP connection flow
1 An RTMFP client connects to a Adobe Media Server amsedge process over UDP port 1935.

Specify this port in the ADAPTOR.HOSTPORT parameter of the ams.ini file. To change this value, see “Configure IP
addresses and ports for RTMFP” on page 3.
Important: RTMFP and RTMP/E clients use the same port to connect to Adobe Media Server. However, RTMFP
clients use UDP and RTMP/E clients use TCP.
2 The amsedge process redirects the connection to an amscore process listening on a UDP port in the range 19350-

65535.
Each amscore process has its own RTMFP listener. Each RTMFP listener binds to one UDP port in the range. When
an amscore process starts, the listener binds to the next available UDP port in the range specified in the
Adaptor/RTMFP/Core/HostPortList/HostPort element of the Adaptor.xml configuration file. For example, if there
are three amscore processes, they listen on ports 19350, 19351, and 19352. These ports are called the RTMFP
redirect ports or the RTMFP migration ports.
The number of ports in use depends on the number of amscore processes in use. The number of amscore processes
in use depends on how application instances are distributed. See “Configure how applications are assigned to server
processes” on page 28.
When the server redirects the client, it sends the client an IP address and port number. If the server is behind a NAT,
specify the public IP address of the server in the public attribute of the HostPort element. The server passes this
address to the client and the client uses it to connect to the amscore process.

Configure RTMFP redirect ports
1 Open rootinstall/conf/_defaultRoot_/Adaptor.xml in a text editor.
2 Edit the value of the HostPort element. The default ports are as follows:

...

...


:19350-65535





3 If the RTMFP adaptor is behind a NAT, specify the in-front-of-NAT IP address that clients connect to in the
public attribute of the HostPort element. The following example uses 12.34.56.78 for the in-front-of-NAT IP

address:
:19350-65535

To redirect the client to an amscore process, the amsedge process sends the client an IP address and a port number.
The server knows the behind the NAT IP address, but the client can’t connect to that. The client needs to know the
in-front-of NAT IP address. To tell the server its in-front-of NAT IP address, specify it in the public attribute.

Last updated 8/21/2014

3

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Deploying the server

4 Save the file and restart the server. See Start and stop the server

About the HostPort element
The value of the HostPort element has the following format:
 := [ [;  [; ... ] ] ]
 := [][:[,  ] ]
 := [ -  ]

In this example of HostPortList, each core listens to two ports: one port from either host1:2000-2010 or
host2:3000-3010 and one port from either host2:5000 or host2:3010-4000 :

host1:2000-2010; host2:3000-3010
host2:5000; host2:3010-4000


Configure a public IP address if the server is behind a NAT
If an RTMFP adaptor is behind a NAT, specify the in-front-of-NAT IP address that clients connect to in the public
attribute of the HostPort element:
:19350-65535

If you don't specify the public attribute, the server doesn’t know its in-front-of-NAT-address. The amsedge process
can redirect the client to the correct port (for example, 19351) but it tells the client the behind-NAT address, which the
client can't contact.
Each HostPort element can specify a public address that corresponds to the specified port. This is the address that is
advertised to clients for the given HostPort. To advertise an address, specify a value for the public attribute of the
HostPort element. The public attribute has the same format as the HostPort element. The number of ports specified
by the public attribute must equal the number of ports specified by the HostPort element. If the core listens on the
n-th port of the HostPort value, the n-th port of the public attribute is advertised as its value.
In this example of HostPortList with a public attribute, if a core listens on host1:1005, its publicly advertised
address is host2:4005.

host1:1000-2000


More Help topics
“Add an adaptor” on page 15

NAT and firewall traversal
NAT (network address translation) and firewall filtering can block peer-to-peer connections. In an intranet
application, in which you have control over the entire network, do the following to ensure that clients can create peerto-peer connections:

• Allow UDP traffic through any firewalls
• Use a NAT or firewall that complies with the NAT implementation recommendations of the IETF BEHAVE
working group.

• Use the TURN proxy support in Flash Player to send traffic to a proxy in a DMZ that can comply with the previous
recommendations. See Best practices for real-time collaboration using Adobe Media Server.

Last updated 8/21/2014

4

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Deploying the server

In an Internet application, the application developer must choose how to handle cases in which a firewall or NAT
blocks a direct peer-to-peer connection. To create an application that works for connections that aren’t peer-to-peer,
create a protocol fallback to client-server RTMP and/or RTMPT. To create an application that never relays media
through the server (even though some clients may not see the media), don’t create a protocol fallback.
Understanding types of NAT
It’s important to understand the different types of NAT behavior:
Cone Reuses the same address and port when talking to all peers.
Multiple IP address, symmetric Picks a new address and port when talking to a new peer.
Single IP address, symmetric Uses the same address but a new port when talking to a new peer.

It’s also important to understand the filtering behaviors of NATs and firewalls:
None A cone NAT with no filtering is called “full cone”.
Address-restricted The peer is restricted to talking only to addresses it has talked to already.
Address and port-restricted The peer is restricted to talking only to addresses and ports it has talked to already.

In addition, some NAT and firewall behaviors aren't easily defined. For example, a NAT could act as a symmetric NAT
that preserves port numbers. When it runs out of resources, it could switch and act as a cone NAT.
In another example, a NAT could act as one type of NAT for the first client that connected to a server. It could act as
a different type of NAT for the second client that tried to connect to the same server. In this case, a simple analysis can
fail to predict whether a client can make a peer-to-peer connection.
Note: A firewall can filter and not be a NAT. A NAT can act as a firewall and have filtering. A firewall may block UDP
completely.
RTMFP Connectivity checker
RTMFP inventor Matthew Kaufman hosts a website called RTMFP Connectivity Checker at http://cc.rtmfp.net/. Use
this site to try to determine whether a client on a particular network can create a peer-to-peer connection.
If the connection to cc.rtmfp.net has the same properties as the connection to and from the peer, use the results to
determine whether a peer-to-peer connection can be formed. The results are not always definitive because, in some
cases, the connection does not have the same properties. For example, two peers in the same organization behind the
same firewall can have different properties between each other than they each have to http://cc.rtmfp.net.
To test a connection, the client connection must have the same properties as the client you’re testing, and the NAT or
firewall must have predictable behavior. The following are the RTMFP Connectivity Checker tests:
Test

Description

Knows public IP address of self

Flash Player has a local address that matches the address that
cc.rtmfp.net saw when the connection came in. In this case, there is
no address translation.

Public UDP port number same as local UDP Flash Player's idea of which UDP port number it is using matches
port number
what http://cc.rtmfp.net saw when the connection came in. In this
case, there is no port translation. If this answer and the previous
answer are “Yes”, there probably isn’t a NAT (but there may be a
firewall).
Can receive from same IP address, same
UDP port number

This value is always “Yes”, because if a client couldn't complete this
test, it couldn't establish the initial connection.

Last updated 8/21/2014

5

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Deploying the server

Test

Description

Can receive from same IP address,
different UDP port number

Indicates whether your firewall is “port restricted”. A port restricted
firewall requires an outbound connection to the same address and
port number before inbound traffic is permitted from that address
and port number. This requirement is true even when previous
traffic was sent to the same address but different port number.

Can receive from different IP address,
different UDP port number

Indicates whether your firewall is “address restricted”. An address
restricted firewall requires that an outbound connection is made to
a new IP address before inbound traffic is permitted from that IP
address.

Can send to different IP address after
server introduction

This value is always be “Yes” if the initial connection can be made.
This test is like opening a new RTMFP connection. If this test fails,
there's a problem with how Flash Player received or treated the
introduction request, or the firewall is unpredictable.

Source IP address is preserved from
original connection

This test means that you have one of the following: a cone NAT, a
symmetric NAT with only one IP address, or a symmetric NAT with
multiple IP addresses but the same address happened to be used
this time. If repeated tests cause the value to change, you have a
symmetric NAT with multiple IP addresses, and sometimes you
happen to use the same address.

Source UDP port number is preserved
from original connection

This test means that you have a cone NAT. If the value is "No", you
have a symmetric NAT.

Understanding the RTMFP Connectivity test
In some cases, symmetric NATs break peer-to-peer connectivity.
Flash Player can work with most cone NAT configurations and many firewall configurations. (There are some issues
with multiple layers of NAT and lack of “hairpinning” support.) However, symmetric NAT in combination with
certain firewall or NAT cases at the other end blocks the ability to establish a peer-to-peer connection. If one end is a
symmetric NAT with a single IP address, Flash Player cannot connect to peers behind other symmetric NATs or
behind port-restricted cone NATs (or port-restricted firewalls).
If one end of a connection is a symmetric NAT with multiple IP addresses, connections to peers behind other
symmetric NATs or behind address-restricted (and probably port-restricted) cone NATs (or address-restricted or
port-restricted firewalls) are impossible. No matter what Flash Player tries to do to “punch a hole” through the
restricted cone NAT or restricted firewall to let the other peer through, the other end moves to a new address and/or
port number that doesn't match. The hole that was created is no longer applicable.

Configure ports for HTTP streaming
By default, Adobe Media Server is configured to listen on port 80. Adobe Media Server proxies HTTP traffic to Apache
HTTP Server over port 8134. However, HTTP Dynamic Streaming and HTTP Live Streaming connections can hang
when proxying through the server.
Do not proxy HDS and HLS traffic through Adobe Media Server to Apache HTTP Server. Either specify the port
number in the request URL, or configure Apache to use port 80 and configure Adobe Media Server not to use port 80.
You do not need to use both techniques.
Specify the port number in request URLs
❖ Connect clients to Apache HTTP Server directly through its own port (the default is port 8134). For example, use

the following request URL:
http://ams.example.com:8134/hds-vod/somefile.f4v.f4m

Last updated 8/21/2014

6

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Deploying the server

Configure Apache to use port 80 and configure Adobe Media Server not to use port 80
1 Configure Apache to use port 80.
a Open rootinstall/Apache2.2/conf in a text editor.
b Change the line Listen 8134 to Listen 80.
c Restart Apache. See Start and stop the server.
2 Configure Adobe Media Server not to use port 80.
a Open rootinstall/conf/ams.ini in a text editor.
b Remove 80 from the ADAPTOR.HOSTPORT parameter so the parameter looks like the following:
ADAPTOR.HOSTPORT = :1935

c Restart Adobe Media Server. See Start and stop the server.

Load balancing
Workflow for deploying servers in a cluster
You can deploy multiple servers behind a load balancer to distribute the client load over multiple servers. Deploying
multiple servers enables you to scale an application for more clients and creates redundancy, which eliminates single
points of failure. You can deploy any version of the server (Adobe Media Interactive Server, Adobe Media
Development Server, or Adobe Media Streaming Server) in a cluster.
1 Install Adobe® Flash® Media Server and verify the installation on each computer.

Ensure that you deploy all servers on computers that meet the minimum system requirements.
Note: For cross-platform compatibility, use lowercase names for all folders and applications.
2 Configure a load balancer to see the servers hosting Adobe Media Interactive Server or Adobe Media Streaming

Server.

Clustering multiple servers behind a load balancer
Add all the servers in the cluster to the pool (server farm) in the load balancer. The load balancer distributes traffic
among all the servers in the pool. Configure the load balancer to distribute the load in round-robin mode and to
monitor over TCP port 1935.
If the server does not have an externally visible IP address, then for HTTP tunnelling to work, you should enable
cookies when you deploy servers behind a load balancer. The load balancer checks the cookie and sends requests with
this cookie to the same server. Cookies can be enabled in the load balancer or in the Adaptor.xml configuration file in
the Adaptor/HTTPTunnel/SetCookie element.
Note: For tunnelling connections, cookies are currently supported only on Adobe® Flash® Player 9.0.28 or later in
Windows only.

Last updated 8/21/2014

7

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Deploying the server

Load balancing peer-assisted networking applications
Use one of the following two techniques to load balance a peer-assisted networking applications:

• Distribute introductions across a server-only RTMFP NetGroup.
This technique is new in Adobe Media Server 5. Use a Server-Side ActionScript API to distribute peer lookup
requests across multiple servers. For more information, see Distributing introductions across multiple servers.

• Set up an edge-origin configuration.
In the Vhost.xml configuration file on each edge server, set remote. For more information, see
“Configure edge servers” on page 9.
On the client, the NetConnection URL changes from "rtmfp://ams-server/application" to "rtmfp://edgeams-server/?rtmfp://origin-ams-server/application". Alternately, you can configure the RouteTable
and RouteEntry in the Vhost.xml file on the edge server to point to the origin server. In this case, the client URL
is still "rtmfp://ams-server/application".
Set up DNS entries to distribute the load across the edge servers. For the server to function properly as an RTMFP
introducer, use one origin server per application. For peer lookup to work, clients must be connected to the same
server process, but not necessarily to the same application. Peer lookups do not work across origin servers.
However, peerIDs are cached on the edge server which reduces the load on the origin. When clients are connected
to the same edge, the introduction can happen at the edge and there is not a lookup call to the origin.

More Help topics
“Deploying edge servers” on page 8

Deploying edge servers
Workflow for deploying edge servers
Note: Adobe Media Server Standard cannot be configured as an edge server.
By default, the server runs as an origin server. To run the server as an edge server, you must configure an XML file.
Typically you would run Adobe Media Server Professional as an origin server on one computer and run Adobe Media
Server Professional as an edge server on another computer.
1. Install Adobe Media Server Professional and verify the installation on each computer.

Deploy all edge and origin servers on computers that meet the minimum system requirements. For information about
installing and verifying installation, see the Installation Guide.
Note: For cross-platform compatibility, use lowercase names for all folders and applications.
2. Configure an edge server and restart.

On the edge server, edit the Vhost.xml file of the virtual host you want to run as an edge server.
3. Verify that the edge server can communicate with the origin server.

The easiest way to verify is to create an explicit connection. Create a SWF file with an explicit connection to the edge
server and run the vod or live service.

Last updated 8/21/2014

8

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Deploying the server

4. If you’re installing multiple edge servers, copy the Vhost.xml file to the same directory on each edge server.
5. Verify that each edge server can communicate with the origin server.
6. Place the origin server and those edge servers nearest to it on the same subnet.
7. If you’re deploying more than one edge server, configure a load balancer.

Place the load balancer between the clients and the edges. Configure the load balancer to access the pool of edge servers
in round-robin mode and to monitor over TCP port 1935. Use the virtual IP (VIP) address of the pool as the IP address
in the RouteEntry element of each edge server’s Vhost.xml file. For detailed information on how to configure the
RouteEntry element, see the comments in the RouteEntry element of the default Vhost.xml file, or see RouteEntry.

Configure edge servers
To configure the server to run as an edge server, edit the Vhost.xml configuration file of the virtual host you want to
run as an edge server. The Vhost.xml file defines how the edge server connects clients to the origin server.
Note: You can also configure some virtual hosts to run applications locally (as origins), while others run applications
remotely (as edges); this is called mixed mode or hybrid mode.
Configure a virtual host to run as an edge server
1 Open the Vhost.xml file of the virtual host you want to configure and locate the following code (comments have
been removed):

...

remote
false






false
true
1000




Note: The default VHost.xml file is located in the RootInstall/conf/_defaultRoot_/_defaultVHost_ directory.
2 Edit the following XML elements, as needed.

Last updated 8/21/2014

9

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Deploying the server

Element

Required/optional

Description

Mode

Required

Enter local to configure the server to run as an origin server. Enter remote
to configure the server to run as an edge server.

Anonymous

Optional

A Boolean value specifying whether the edge server connection is implicit
(true) or explicit (false). The default value is false.

CacheDir

Optional

Enables or disables the caching of streams to disk, in addition to caching in
memory, on an edge server and allows you to specify the cache location.
There are two attributes: enabled and useAppName.
To enable caching, set the enabled attribute to "true". When enabled, the
server places streams in the RootInstall/cache/appName directory by default.
Use the useAppName attribute to specify whether to use the application
name as the name of the cache for the application.
Vod applications get significant performance gains when caching is enabled.

LocalAddress

Optional

Specifies the local IP address to which to bind a proxy's outgoing connection
(the proxy’s loopback address). This element allows the administrator to
control network traffic by isolating incoming and outgoing traffic to separate
network interfaces.

RouteTable

Optional; create a routing
table when it is not
necessary or desirable for
application developers to
see the origin server URL or
when you want to use
implicit connections.

Specifies, in each RouteEntry element, how to route connections from the
origin to the edge. There is one attribute, protocol, that indicates the
protocol of the outgoing connection. Set this attribute to either "rtmp" or
"rtmps".

Optional

Each RouteEntry element maps a host/port pair to a different host/port pair.
In the following example, connections to host1:port1 are routed to
host2:port2:

RouteEntry

To override the RouteTable protocol for a specific RouteEntry element,
add a protocol attribute to the RouteEntry element you want to change.

host1:port1;host2:port2

Typically, host1:port1 is your edge server and host2:port2 is your
origin server. The following example routes connections destined for host
"edge" on port 1935 to host "origin" on port 80:
edge:1935;origin:80

You can specify a wildcard character (*) for any host or port. The following
example routes connections destined for any host on any port to host "origin"
on port 1935:
*:*;origin:1935

You can also specify a wildcard for the host/port to which connections are
being routed. The following example routes connections destined for any
host on any port to the same host on port 80:
*:*;*:80

To reject connections, you can specify that a host/port combination be routed
to null:
edge:80;null

The RouteEntry element has a protocol attribute. This attribute overrides
the RouteTable protocol for a specific RouteEntry element. For example,
RouteTable may have one RouteEntry element that specifies an
encrypted outgoing RTMPS connection and another RouteEntry tag that
specifies the regular RTMP connection. If a protocol is not specified, the
outgoing connection uses the same protocol as the incoming connection.

3 Validate the XML and save the Vhost.xml file.

Last updated 8/21/2014

10

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Deploying the server

4 Restart the server.

More Help topics
“Adaptors and virtual hosts” on page 14

Set up caching on edge servers
Streams that are played via an edge server can optionally be cached on that edge server’s hard drive to avoid extra
network traffic back to the origin. Edge servers manage their disk caches automatically using a least-recently-used
(LRU) scheme.
Edge servers group the cached files on disk into buckets; the files within each bucket are not ordered, but the buckets
themselves are ordered by LRU. When an edge server needs to free up disk space, it deletes the entire contents of the
least-recently-used buckets. When a file is added, it gets put in the "newest" bucket, and likewise when an existing file
is accessed, it is moved to the newest bucket. This maintains the LRU ordering.
A disk cache is divided up into N buckets, but since all newly accessed content goes into the newest bucket, only the
newest bucket actually grows in size. Once that bucket reaches K/N bytes, where K is the maximum size of the disk
cache, the server triggers a rollover. A rollover means the server deletes the oldest bucket, and creates a new bucket
where new content will go.
For example:
1 Start with an empty disk cache, configured to have 8 buckets and max size of 80 GB.
2 All content goes into bucket "00" until it grows to 10 GB.
3 New bucket "01" is created. All content now goes into this bucket. In addition, content accessed from bucket "00"

may be moved to bucket "01".
4 When bucket "01" reaches 10 GB, the server creates bucket "02", and so on.
5 Repeat until there are 8 buckets, "00" through "07".
6 When bucket "07" reaches 10 GB, the server creates bucket "08", and also deletes bucket "00" and all the content it

contains.
The deletion is only triggered by the size of the "new" bucket, not the total size of the disk. Because content can be
moved from one of the older buckets into the newest bucket, the older buckets do not remain at their maximum size
of N/K bytes, and thus the total size of the disk will be less than its max K when the server starts deleting old buckets.
You set up caching on an edge server in the CacheDir element of the Vhost.xml file. The following table describes the
subelements that you use to set up caching:

Last updated 8/21/2014

11

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Deploying the server

Element

Description

MaxSize

Specifies the maximum allowed size of the disk cache, in gigabytes. The server
does LRU (least recently used) cleanup of the cache to keep it under the
maximum size. The default value is 32 gigabytes. A value of 0 disables the disk
cache. A value of -1 specifies no maximum.

NumBuckets

Specifies the number of buckets to divide the cache into. The aggregate cache
size is defined by MaxSize. Can be any value from 2 to 128; the default value is
8. More buckets mean that a smaller portion of the disk content will be deleted
at any one time, but also that files will need to be moved to new buckets more
often, which results in more disk activity and lower performance.You can define
the number of buckets that contain contents that can be moved with
NumBucketsAtRisk.

NumBucketsAtRisk

Specifies the number of buckets considered to be "at risk" of deletion. Can be
any value from 0 to NumBuckets - 1; the default is NumBuckets/2. To avoid
moving files too frequently at the expense of disk performance, only segments
that are in the oldest NumBucketsAtRisk buckets will be moved to the newest
bucket when accessed.
A value of 0 means that segments, once pulled from the origin, are never moved
to a newer bucket, effectively turning the cache into a LRU cache. The default
value of NumBuckets/2 means that only segments in the "older half" of content
will be moved. Segments in the "newer half" of content are more likely to be
accessed again before they are deleted, thus making it less important to move
them.

Connect to an edge server
There are two types of edge server connections: explicit and implicit (also called anonymous).
An explicit edge server prefixes its address to the origin server’s URL in the client NetConnection.connect() call.
For example, for applications running on ams.foo.com, instead of clients connecting to an application with a
connection string such as rtmp://ams.foo.com/app/inst, clients are directed through the edge, which prefixes its
protocol and hostname to the origin URL, as in the following:
rtmp://amsedge.foo.com/?rtmp://ams.foo.com/app/inst

An implicit edge server does not change or modify the origin server’s URL in the client NetConnection.connect()
call. The identity (the IP address and port number) of the implicit edge is hidden from the application developer.
Create an explicit connection
❖ Use the following syntax in a client-side NetConnection.connect() call to make an explicit connection to an edge
server:
rtmp://edge/?rtmp://origin/app

A question mark (?) separates the edge’s prefix from the main URL. The prefix contains only the protocol,
hostname, and optionally the port number. The prefix must always end with a trailing slash.
Create an implicit connection
1 In the Vhost.xml configuration file, set the Proxy/Anonymous element to true.
Note: Restart the server after changing the Vhost.xml file.
2 In the Vhost.xml file, create a routing table in the RouteTable element; for more information, see the comments

about RouteEntry tags in the Vhost.xml file installed with Adobe Media Server.

Last updated 8/21/2014

12

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Deploying the server

3 Use the following syntax in a client-side NetConnection.connect() call to make an implicit connection to an

edge server:
rtmp://edge/app/appinstance

Connect edge servers in a chain
❖ You can chain together any number of edges when you make connections to the origin server. Use the following
syntax to chain two explicit edges to direct connection requests to the origin server:
rtmp://edge1/?rtmp://edge2/?rtmp://origin/app/inst

As the connection moves through each edge in the chain, the server consumes the first token in the string. For
example, after making the connection to edge1, the connection string changes to:
rtmp://edge2/?rtmp://origin/app/inst

Note: You can specify the RTMPT protocol only for the edges, not for the origin.
When you use URL decoration to chain edges, Flash Player 7 and earlier versions may have problems with shared
objects because of the embedded question mark (?) character in the URL. Call the following function to encode or
escape the question marks from the URL before passing the URL to the shared object:
function escapeURI(uri) {
index = uri.indexOf('?');
if (index == -1) return uri;
prefix = uri.substring(0, index);
uri = uri.substring(index);
return prefix += escape(uri);
}

Deploying 64-bit servers
Adobe Media Server installs on 32-bit and 64-bit operating systems. The 64-bit server uses addressable memory space
greater than 4GB. This enables Adobe Media Server to use a larger file cache which in turn reduces disk IO.
To deploy 64-bit servers, know the following:

• You can use any combination of 64-bit and 32-bit edge and origin servers in a network topology.
• To serve on-demand media at the highest possible performance, increase the size of the recoded media cache.
• If you have created custom C++ plug-ins for a 32-bit system, they do not work with a 64-bit system. To use 32-bit
plug-ins on a 64-bit server, recompile the plug-in with the 64-bit libraries.

More Help topics
“Configure a 64-bit server” on page 21

Last updated 8/21/2014

13

14

Chapter 2: Configuring the server
Configure the server for virtual hosting
Adaptors and virtual hosts
To host multiple tenants on a server, configure the server so that each customer has their own section. Administrators
can configure their own sections to serve their content most effectively. You can configure virtual hosting in several
ways, depending on your needs.
The server is divided into hierarchical levels: server, adaptor, virtual host (also called vhost), and application. The
server is at the top level and contains one or more adaptors. Each adaptor contains one or more virtual hosts. Each
virtual host hosts one or more applications. Each application has one or more instances. You can add adaptors and
virtual hosts to organize the server for hosting multiple applications and sites.
Note: For information about registering applications with the server and storing media, see “Configuring content storage”
on page 49.
If you’re hosting multiple websites on a server, use virtual hosts to give customers their own root folders. For example,
you could use two virtual hosts to host www.test.com and www.example.com on the same server.
You can assign an IP address or a port number to an adaptor, but not to a virtual host. For this reason, use adaptors to
organize virtual hosts by IP address or port number. For example, if a virtual host needs its own IP address to configure
SSL, assign it to its own adaptor.
You can also configure one virtual host to run as an edge server and one to run as an origin server. This is called
running the server in hybrid mode.

Configuration folder structure
Each of these levels—server, adaptor, virtual host, application, and application instances—has distinct configuration
settings stored in XML files in the rootinstall/conf directory: Server.xml, Adaptor.xml, Vhost.xml, and
Application.xml. There are also configuration files for information about administrators and logging: Users.xml and
Logger.xml. The most important configuration parameters have been pulled out to the ams.ini file, which enables you
to use one file to configure the server.
conf
Server.xml
Users.xml
Logger.xml
fms.ini
_defaultRoot_
Adaptor.xml
_defaultVHost_
Application.xml
Vhost.xml

Default structure of the server’s configuration (conf) directory

Last updated 8/21/2014

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Edit any of these XML files in a text or XML editor and restart the server for the changes to take effect. If you modify
Users.xml or ams.ini, you also must restart Adobe Media Administration Server. For more information, see “Working
with configuration files” on page 17.
The following rules define the conf directory structure:

• The root configuration folder is rootinstall/conf. You cannot remove or modify the name of this directory. The
server must have a Server.xml file, a Logger.xml file, and a Users.xml file in the conf directory.

• The server has one initialization file, ams.ini, in the rootinstall/conf directory. This file contains commonly used
settings.

• The default adaptor’s root directory is rootinstall/conf/_defaultRoot_. You cannot remove or modify the name of
this directory. Each adaptor must have an Adaptor.xml file in its root directory.

• The default virtual host’s root directory is rootinstall/conf/_defaultRoot_/_defaultVHost_. You cannot remove or
modify the name of this directory. Each virtual host must have a Vhost.xml file in its root directory. Each adaptor
must have a default virtual host.

• Virtual host directories may also contain an Application.xml file that serves as a default to all applications in that
virtual host and a Users.xml file that contains information about administrators of that virtual host.

• You may place an Application.xml file in an application’s registered directory to create an application-specific
configuration. For more information about registered application directories, see the Developer Guide.

Add an adaptor
1 Create a new directory with the name of the adaptor in the rootinstall/conf folder; for example,

rootinstall/conf/adaptor2.
2 In the adaptor2 directory, create or paste a copy of the _defaultVHost_ directory and an Adaptor.xml file.

Each adaptor directory must contain a _defaultVHost_ directory and an Adaptor.xml file.
3 In the _defaultVHost_ directory, create or paste a copy of an Application.xml file and a Vhost.xml file.
4 In the Adaptor.xml file in the adaptor directory, add a HostPort element to listen on a new port for this adaptor:
:1936

The name, ctl_channel, and rtmfp attribute values must be unique on the server. The rtmfp attribute and the
HostPort element specify the ports to which an IP address should bind. If an IP address is not specified, the adaptor
listens on all available interfaces. The server uses the control channel (ctl_channel) attribute internally to
communicate between server processes (adding a HostPort element creates a new AMSEdge process).
The server uses the HostPort value to listen for clients—no two adaptors can listen on the same port, either
internally or externally, unless they use different IP addresses. If a host has multiple IP addresses, multiple adaptors
can listen on port 1935. In addition, the control channels of two adaptors must be different, or they cannot interoperate. Ensure that the control channels on which separate adaptors listen are different from each other. The
following example is for a host with multiple IP addresses:
xx.xx.xx.xx:1935
yy.yy.yy.yy:1935

5 If you’re running peer-assisted networking applications, add an Adaptor/RTMFP/Core/HostPortList/HostPort

element. See “Configure IP addresses and ports for RTMFP” on page 3.
6 Restart the server.

Last updated 8/21/2014

15

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

7 To log in to the Administration Console on the new adaptor, use the syntax adaptorname/username in the

Username box; for example, adaptor2/admin.
For information about logging in to the Administration Console, see “Connecting to the Administration Console”
on page 82.
Administrators are defined in the UserList section of the Users.xml file. Administrators are either server-level
users (similar to a root user) or virtual host-level users. If you log in to an adaptor other than the default adaptor,
you are considered a virtual host administrator and don’t have privileges to manage the server or users.
conf
Server.xml
Users.xml
Logger.xml
fms.ini
_defaultRoot_
Adaptor.xml
_defaultVHost_
Application.xml
Vhost.xml
Users.xml
adaptor2
Adaptor.xml
_defaultVHost_
Application.xml
Vhost.xml
Users.xml

The conf directory with an additional adaptor called adaptor2

Add a virtual host
1 Create a folder with the name of the virtual host in an adaptor folder, for example,

rootinstall/conf/_defaultRoot_/www.example.com.
2 Copy an Application.xml file, a Vhost.xml file, and a Users.xml file to the new virtual host folder. (The Users.xml

file is required only if you are defining administrators for this virtual host.)
3 In the Vhost.xml file, specify an application directory in the AppsDir element, for example:
C:\www.example.com<\AppsDir>

Note: It is possible to use the same applications directory for multiple virtual hosts, but it causes namespace conflicts
and is not recommended.
4 Validate the XML and save the Vhost.xml file.
5 Restart the server.

Note: You can call the startVHost() Administration API or log in to the Administration Console without restarting
the server.
6 Log in to the Administration Console.

Last updated 8/21/2014

16

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

For information about logging in to the Administration Console, see “Connecting to the Administration Console”
on page 82.
7 Connect to the new virtual host by specifying the virtual host name, for example, www.example.com, in the Server

name field.
8 Connect a test application to the new virtual host to make sure it works.
conf
Server.xml
Users.xml
Logger.xml
fms.ini
_defaultRoot_
Adaptor.xml
_defaultVHost_
Application.xml
Vhost.xml
Users.xml

www.example.com
Application.xml
Vhost.xml
Users.xml

The conf directory with an additional virtual host called www.example.com

Configuring a single application
You can place an Application.xml file in an application’s folder. Values set in the application-level Application.xml file
override the values in the vhost-level Application.xml file.
To see an example, look at the vod and live applications included with Adobe Media Server. Navigate to
rootinstall\applications\vod and rootinstall\applications\live. Each folder contains an Application.xml file. The values
in these files override the values in the vhost-level file
rootinstall\conf\_defaultRoot_\_defaultVHost_\Application.xml.
To prevent settings in the vhost-level Application.xml settings from being overridden by the application-level
Application.xml file, add an override attribute to a tag and set it to "no", as in the following:
false

When override="no" for an element in a vhost-level Applcation.xml file, you cannot override that element, or any
elements contained within that element, in an application-level Application.xml file.

Working with configuration files
Edit a configuration file
Note: Configuration files are located in the rootinstall/conf folder. For information about configuration file names,
locations, and hierarchy, see “Configuration folder structure” on page 14.

Last updated 8/21/2014

17

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

To edit a configuration file, including ams.ini, do the following:
1 Open the file in a text editor.
2 Edit the file.
3 Save the file.
4 Validate the XML.
5 Restart Adobe Media Server.

If you modify the Users.xml file, restart Adobe Media Administration Server, too.

Editing parameters in the ams.ini file
The file rootinstall/config/ams.ini is the Adobe Media Server INI file. An INI file is a default configuration file. This
file contains the most commonly edited configuration parameters. Edit the ams.ini file to change the server admin
username and password, the adaptor host port, the folder that holds applications, the folder that holds media files, and
so on.
The ams.ini file contains a list of parameters and their values, as in the following:
SERVER.ADMIN_USERNAME = admin

The XML configuration files use these parameters. The following is an excerpt from the User.xml file:




6cb340fd77d3297cb6d82f57bb085a13d
f45cd9513d042355a9a304c1d47ec433c97a8bdc2584424

When the server starts, it replaces the parameter in the XML configuration files with the value from the ams.ini file.
Edit the ams.ini file
1 Open rootinstall/conf/ams.ini in a text editor.
2 Save a copy to another location as a backup.
3 Enter a new value for a parameter.
4 Save the file.
5 Restart Adobe Media Server. When you edit a value in the User.xml file, restart Adobe Media Administration

Server.
6 Open the Administration Console and log in with your new password.

Using symbols in configuration files
To simplify configuration, you can use symbols as values for XML elements in configuration files. Create a file named
substitution.xml in the rootinstall/conf folder that maps the symbols to strings that the server substitutes when it reads
the configuration files. After you’ve set up a map file, future updates are faster: you can edit the map file instead of
editing each configuration file.
The installer defines a few mappings during the installation process and stores them in the ams.ini file. When the
server starts, it looks for the ams.ini file and the substitution.xml file in the rootinstall/conf directory. You can also
create additional map files and reference them from the substitution.xml file.

Last updated 8/21/2014

18

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

The server has two predefined symbols, ROOT and CONF, that are always available. The ROOT symbol is mapped to the
location of the AMSMaster.exe file and the CONF symbol is mapped to the location of the Server.xml file.
The server builds the symbol map in the following order:
1 The predefined symbols ROOT and CONF are evaluated.
2 The ams.ini file is evaluated.
3 If the substitution.xml file exists, the server looks for the Symbols tag and processes the child tags in the order in

which they appear.
4 The server processes the additional map files in the order in which they appear (in KeyValueFile elements in the

substitution.xml file).
5 Symbols defined in external map files are processed in the order in which they appear in each file.

Create a substitution.xml file:
1 Create a new XML file and save it in the rootinstall/conf folder as substitution.xml.
2 Enter the following XML structure:


StringToMapTo



Add a SymbolName element for each symbol you want to create.
3 For example, this substitution.xml file maps the symbol TESTUSERNAME to the value janedoe:


janedoe



4 Open the rootinstall/conf/Users.xml file in a text editor.
5 Locate the line  and replace the symbol SERVER.ADMIN_USERNAME

with the symbol TESTUSERNAME.
When the server reads the XML file, it substitutes the value from the substitution.xml file as follows:


Note: Because this symbol is used as an attribute, it is surrounded by quotation marks. If the symbol were used as a
regular value, it would not be surrounded by quotation marks.
6 Restart the Administration Server.

Note: If you change the Users.xml file, you must restart the Administration Server. If you change any other XML
configuration file, you must restart the server.
Creating additional map files
You can specify all of your text substitution mappings under the Symbols tag in substitution.xml. However, you can
also create additional map files. To do this, create one or more KeyValueFile elements in the substitution.xml file.
Each element can hold the location of one external file.
For example, the following references the file C:\testfiles\mySymbols.txt:

Last updated 8/21/2014

19

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server


C:\testfiles\mySymbols.txt


These external files are not in XML format. They simply contain a collection of symbol-value pairs, where each pair
appears on a separate line and takes the following form:
symbol=value

The following example shows three symbol-value pairs:
USER_NAME=foo
USER_PSWD = bar
HELLO= "world and worlds"

Place comments on separate lines that begin with a number sign (#). Do not place comments on the same line as a
symbol definition.
The first equal sign (=) in a line is considered the delimiter that separates the symbol and the value. The server trims
leading or trailing white space from both the symbol and the value, but no white space within double quotation marks.
Using environment variables
To refer to an environment variable in one of the XML configuration files, use the name of the environment variable
within percent (%) characters. The % characters indicate to the server that the symbol refers to an environment variable
and not to a user-defined string.
The syntax for specifying an environment variable as a symbol is ${%ENV_VAR_NAME%}.
For example, the server maps the following symbol to the COMPUTERNAME variable:
${%COMPUTERNAME%}

When you use an environment variable, you don’t have to define it in the substitution.xml file.

Configuring performance features
In addition to the performance tips in this section, you can also optimize the underlying Apache web server. For more
information, see Apache Performance Tuning.

Configure the server to deliver live media
The following three configuration settings impact scale and latency for live media delivery:

• “Configure the size of stream chunks” on page 22
• “Send aggregate messages” on page 23
• “Combine audio samples” on page 25
Note: You can’t send aggregate messages and combine audio samples in the same application.
To configure the server to deliver live media, choose your use case:
Large Scale Broadcast (scale is more important than latency) In this use case, you want to reach as many people as
possible and are willing to allow some latency. You may also want to keep costs down while still reaching as many
people as possible. Send large aggregate messages and configure large stream chunk sizes.

Last updated 8/21/2014

20

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Large Scale Broadcast (low latency is more important than scale) In this use case, you want to keep latency as low as
possible while reaching as many people as possible. You are willing to trade some scale for decreased latency. Send
smaller aggregate messages. Or, combine audio samples and do not send aggregate messages.
Interactive (lowest latency) Interactive applications require very low latency. Do not send aggregate messages. For the
lowest latency, do not combine audio samples.

If data latency is your concern, combine audio samples. Combining audio samples introduces audio latency but
doesn't affect the rest of the stream. Aggregating messages introduces latency to the whole stream.
Interactive applications are the most difficult to scale and require more hardware than the large scale broadcast use
cases.

Configure the server to deliver on-demand media
To configure the server to deliver on-demand (vod) media, complete the following tasks:
1 “Configure the recorded media cache” on page 21
2 “Configure the size of stream chunks” on page 22

Configure a 64-bit server
64-bit servers can address more physical memory than 32-bit servers. When delivering on-demand video on 64-bit
servers, increase the size of the recorded media cache size. Only the amount of RAM available on the computer limits
the recorded file cache size.
Note: The system warns that a process is close to the memory limit when the process memory is more than 90% of the
system memory.
❖ “Configure the recorded media cache” on page 21

Configuring the server to deliver audio-only media
To deliver media that contains only audio,
1 “Combine audio samples” on page 25
2 “Send aggregate messages” on page 23

Configure the recorded media cache
When a stream is requested from the server, segments of the stream are stored in a cache on the server. As long as the
cache has not reached capacity, the server places segments in the cache. Each time a stream attempts to access a
segment, the server checks the cache. If the segment is available, the server gives the stream a reference to the segment
for playback. If the segment is not available, the server retrieves the segment from its source, inserts it into the cache,
and returns a reference to that segment to the stream.
When the cache is full, the server removes unused segments, starting with the least recently used. After removing all
unused segments, if there still isn’t enough room for a new segment, the server notifies the client that the stream is not
available and makes an entry in the core log file.
If you have cache-full events in the core log file, increase the size of the cache or limit the number of streams playing.
For more information about the core log file, see “Monitoring and Managing Log Files” on page 97.
1 Open the rootinstall/conf/ams.ini file.

Last updated 8/21/2014

21

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

2 Edit the SERVER.FLVCACHE_MAXSIZE parameter.

This is the maximum size of the cache, in megabytes. The default value is 500. The file cache shares process address
space with the core process. Each core process has a separate file cache. For 32-bit processes, it has a limit of 2 GB
in Windows and 3 GB in Linux. For 64-bit installations, the limit is greater. For more information, see “Configure
a 64-bit server” on page 21.
The size of the cache limits the number of unique streams the server can publish. To increase the probability that a
requested stream will be located in the recorded media cache, increase the value of SERVER.FLVCACHE_MAXSIZE.
To decrease the amount of memory the server process uses, decrease the value of SERVER.FLVCACHE_MAXSIZE.
While a large cache size is useful, Adobe recommends that you ensure that your total system memory usage does
not exceed the process limit of your OS. Consider memory limits and desired memory and stream performance
when utilizing the memory cache.
Note: Cache settings have no effect on live streams, as live streams do not need or utilize the cache.
3 Restart the server.

There is no exact way to calculate the value of the cache size because it varies depending on the amount of RAM
available and the number of other processes that are running. However, you can follow some general guidelines to
approximate the recommended size of the cache.
Out of the total system RAM, some amount will be used by the OS and other non-Adobe Media Server processes:
Amount of RAM available for AMS (R) = RAM size - RAM used by the OS and non-AMS processes

The RAM available for Adobe Media Server is divided among the number of cores started:
Amount of RAM per core (Rc) = Amount of RAM available for AMS (R) / Number of Cores

Out of this, some amount of RAM is used up by the core process, and is not available to the file cache:
Recommended File Cache Size = Amount of RAM per core (Rc) - RAM used by each core process

RAM used by each Adobe Media Server process varies based on load, and there is no exact figure. You can use 512 MB
as a ballpark figure.
The following example attempts to determine a reasonable file cache size:
RAM size = 8 GB
RAM used by OS and non-AMS processes = 1.2 GB (approximately)
Number of AMS core processes allowed = 3
Amount of RAM available for AMS (R) = 8 - 1.2 = 6.8
Amount of RAM per core (Rc) = 6.8 / 3 = 2.27 GB
Recommended file cache size = 2.27 - 0.5 = 1.76 GB

Configure the size of stream chunks
Streams break into chunks as they are written to the network. You can specify the size of a chunk. Large values reduce
CPU usage because there are fewer writes. However, large values can delay other content on lower bandwidth
connections. The larger the content size and the higher the bandwidth of the receiving connection, the more benefit is
gained from larger chunk sizes.
1 Open the Application.xml file.

Note: You can set these values in an Application.xml file at the VHost level or at the application level. To set the value
at the application level, copy an Application.xml file to the application’s folder.
2 In the Client element, set the OutChunkSize element to a value between 128 and 65536 bytes. The default value

is 4096 bytes.

Last updated 8/21/2014

22

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

For more information, see “Application.xml file” on page 141.
3 Restart the server.

Send aggregate messages
Important: Do not send aggregate messages and combine audio samples in the same application.
An aggregate message is a single message that contains a list of submessages. Sending aggregate messages reduces CPU
usage and increases server capacity. You can configure applications to deliver aggregate messages to clients running
on Flash Player 9.0.60.0 and above. When this setting is disabled, the server breaks up aggregate messages into
individual messages before delivering them to clients.
Aggregate messages can be used with live and recorded streams.
An origin server can deliver aggregate messages to an edge server, and an edge server can deliver aggregate messages
from the FLV data that is has cached on the disk. An edge server can deliver aggregate messages even if the origin server
did not.
To ensure that aggregate messaging is enabled, be sure the following settings are enabled:

•

EnableAggMsgs in the Server.xml file

•

AggregateMessages in the Application.xml file

•

AggregateMessages in the Vhost.xml file (if applicable)

The following table describes these settings, plus other configuration settings that are related to using aggregate
messages:
Element

Configuration file

Description

Streams/EnableAggMsgs

Server.xml

Enables the creation of aggregate messages in the
FLV module. When this setting is “true”, the FLV
module returns aggregate messages when loading
segment data. When this setting is “false”, the FLV
module returns regular audio, video, and data
messages.
The default value is “true”.

Streams/MaxAggMsgSize

Server.xml

Determines the maximum size (in bytes) of
aggregate messages returned from the FLV
module (when they are enabled). The actual
message size returned by the module might be
slightly larger because the module will not
fragment individual messages, but instead
includes whole messages until this size is
exceeded.
The default value is 65536.

Client/AggregateMessages

Application.xml

Enables the delivery of aggregate messages to
clients that support them. When this setting is
disabled, the server breaks up aggregate messages
into individual messages before delivering them to
clients.
The default value is “true”.

Last updated 8/21/2014

23

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Element

Configuration file

Description

StreamManager/Live/Queue

Application.xml

Queues incoming messages that are published to
live streams. This is so that the server can create
aggregate messages before transmission to
subscribing clients. If queueing is not enabled,
aggregate messages are not created.
The default value is “true”.

StreamManager/Live/Queue/
MaxQueueSize

Application.xml

Defines the maximum size (in bytes) that the live
queue can grow to before the messages it contains
are transmitted.
Increasing the size of the queue allows for larger
aggregates to be created, which increases the
efficiency of the server, but introduces latency in
the transmission. Decreasing the queue size
reduces latency but is less efficient.

StreamManager/Live/Queue/
MaxQueueDelay

Application.xml

Defines the maximum time (in milliseconds) that
the live queue delays messages before the
messages are transmitted.
This setting can be used to ensure that
unacceptable amounts of latency are not
introduced into the publishing stream.
Increasing the delay allows for larger aggregates to
be created, which increases the efficiency of the
server. Decreasing the delay reduces latency but is
less efficient.

StreamManager/Live/Queue/
AggregateMessages

Application.xml

Determines whether or not aggregate messages
are generated when the queue is flushed.
When this setting is enabled, the messages in the
queue are grouped together as aggregates to
improve the efficiency of transmission.
It is possible to enable queing and disable the
generation of aggregate messages, but this does
not result in performance benefits.
The default value is “true”.

Last updated 8/21/2014

24

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Element

Configuration file

Description

StreamManager/Live/Queue/
AggregateMessages/MaxAggM
sgSize

Application.xml

Defines the maximum size of an aggregate
message that the server creates. The server can
create smaller aggregates, as necessary.
The server cannot create messages that are larger
than the MaxQueueSize, so this number is
generally set to something less than or equal to the
configured size of the queue.

Proxy/AggregateMessages

Vhost.xml

Determines whether aggregate messages are
delivered from the edge cache when a vhost is
configured as an edge proxy.
The default value is "false".
If the edge server receives aggregate messages
from the origin when this setting is disabled, the
messages are broken up before being cached.

Proxy/AggregateMessages/M
axAggMsgSize

Vhost.xml

Determines the size (in bytes) of aggregate
messages returned from the edge cache when
aggregate messages are enabled.
This setting only applies to messages retrieved
from the disk cache. Aggregate messages received
directy from the origin server are returned as-is,
and therefore their size is determined by the origin
server's settings for aggregate message size.

Even when you configure the server and application to use aggregate messages, the following circumstances will
prevent them from being delivered:

• The client’s Flash Player version is earlier than 9.0.60.0.
• The stream is set to filter audio, filter video, or control FPS.
• The stream requires transcoding.
If any of these conditions are present, Adobe Media Server breaks the aggregated message into its submessages, and
the messages are delivered individually.
After you confirm that aggregate messaging is enabled, you can use the settings in the Server.xml file to configure the
size of the messages. You can also enable or disable the messages based on the type of stream. For more information,
see “Streams” on page 232.
You can also configure message queuing in the Application.xml file. For more information, see “Queue” on page 175.

Combine audio samples
Important: Do not send aggregate messages and combine audio samples in the same application.
To handle more connections while broadcasting a live stream, combine audio samples.
1 Open the rootinstall/conf/_defaultRoot_/_defaultVHost_/Application.xml file.

Note: You can set these values in an Application.xml file at the VHost level or at the application level. To set the value
at the application level, copy an Application.xml file to the application’s folder.
2 Locate the StreamManager/Audio/CombineSamples section of the file and set values the following elements:

Last updated 8/21/2014

25

26

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Element

Description

Subscribers

If there are more than this number of subscribers to a stream, audio
samples are combined. The default value is 8. To increase live streaming
capacity, set this value to 1.

LoCPU

If the CPU is lower than this value, audio samples are not combined. The
default value is 60. To increase live streaming capacity, set this value to 1.

HiCPU

If the CPU is higher than this value, audio samples are not combined. The
default value is 80. To increase live streaming capacity, set this value to 1.

MaxSamples

Combine this many samples into one message. The default value is 4. To
increase live streaming capacity, set this value to 8.

3 Restart the server.

Limit connection requests
A high connection rate to the server can negatively impact the experience of users already connected to the server.
1 Locate the following code in the Server.xml configuration file:


...



100
Element

Description

Impact

MaxConnectionRate

The maximum number of incoming connections
per second the server accepts, per listener.
Listeners are defined in the HostPort element in
the Adaptor.xml file. Each port the server is
configured to listen on represents a listener. You
can set a fractional maximum connection rate,
such as 12.5. A value of 0 or -1 disables this feature.

Connections requested at a rate above this
value remain in the TCP/IP socket queue and
are silently discarded by the operating system
whenever the queue becomes too long.

The value of this element is a global setting for all
listeners. If the element is set to 10 connections per
second, each listener has a limit of 10 connections
per second. If there are three listeners and the
MaxConnectionRate is set to 10, the server
imposes a maximum total combined rate of 30
connections per second.

2 Validate the XML and save the XML file.
3 Restart the server.

Close idle connections
Sometimes clients have left an application without the server-end of the socket knowing. This behavior can happen
when a router is unplugged or crashes without sending TCP close messages for the sockets it is managing, when a
laptop is undocked from a docking station, and so on. To reclaim these resources for new and active clients, the server
can close the idle clients.

Last updated 8/21/2014

27

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Adobe Media Server sends a small ping message over sockets that have been quiet for awhile. If the client at the far end
has gone away, the server's TCP eventually stops retransmitting that data. When that happens, the socket is shut down
and the server can clean up any associated client object, and so on.
Elements in the Server.xml, Vhost.xml, and Application.xml configuration files specify how often the server should
check for idle clients. When a client has been idle longer than the maximum idle time (10 minutes, by default), the
server sends a status message to the NetConnection object (the client) with the code property set to
NetConnection.Connect.Idle followed by NetConnection.Connect.Closed. The server closes the client
connection to the server and writes an x-status code of 432 in the access log. The server also writes a message such
as “Client x has been idle for y seconds” in the core and event logs.
To close idle connections, enable the feature in the Server.xml file. Once you enable the feature in the Server.xml file,
you can disable the feature for individual virtual hosts or individual applications in the Vhost.xml files and
Application.xml files. The values defined in the Server.xml configuration file apply to all clients connected to the
server, unless the values are defined in the Vhost.xml file (the Vhost.xml values override the Server.xml values). The
values defined in the Application.xml file override the values defined in the Vhost.xml file.
Enable closing idle connections
1 Locate the following code in the Server.xml file:

60
600


2 Edit the following elements.
Element

Description

Impact

AutoCloseIdleClients

Set the enable attribute to true to close
idle clients. If the enable attribute is
omitted or not set to true, the feature is
disabled. The default value is false.

CheckInterval

Specifies the interval, in seconds, at which
the server checks for active client
connections. The default interval is 60
seconds.

A client is disconnected the first time the server
checks for idle connections if the client has
exceeded the MaxIdleTime value. A shorter
interval results in more reliable disconnection
times.

MaxIdleTime

Specifies the maximum idle time allowed, in
seconds, before a client is disconnected. If
this element is 0 or less, the default idle time
is used. The default idle time is 600 seconds
(10 minutes).

A low value may cause unneeded disconnections.
When you configure this element, consider
network latency. An idle time that is less than a
typical round trip between the server and the
client can result in a disconnection.

Configure settings for virtual hosts
You can disable this feature for a virtual host or specify a different maximum idle time for a virtual host in the
Vhost.xml file.
1 Locate the following code in the Vhost.xml file and remove the comments:


600



2 Edit the following elements.

Last updated 8/21/2014

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Element

Description

AutoCloseIdleClients

Disable this feature for an individual virtual host by setting the enable attribute to false. If this
element is disabled in Server.xml, the feature is disabled for all virtual hosts, even if you specify
true in the Vhost.xml file.

MaxIdleTime

Specifies the maximum idle time allowed, in seconds, before a client is disconnected. The default
idle time is 600 seconds (10 minutes). You can set a different value for each virtual host.
If no value is set for this element, the server uses the value set in the Server.xml. file.
The value of the MaxIdleTime element in the Vhost.xml file overrides the value of the
MaxIdleTime element in the Server.xml file.

3 Restart the server.

Configure settings for applications
You can disable this feature for an application or specify a different maximum idle time for an application in the
Application.xml file.
1 Locate the following code in the Application.xml file and remove the comments:


600



2 Edit the following elements.
Element

Description

AutoCloseIdleClients

Disable this feature for an individual application by setting the enable attribute to false. If this
element is disabled in Server.xml, the feature is disabled for all applications, even if you specify
true in the Application.xml file.

MaxIdleTime

Specifies the maximum idle time allowed, in seconds, before a client is disconnected. The default
idle time is 600 seconds (10 minutes). You can set a different value for each application.
If no value is set for this element, the server uses the value set in the Vhost.xml. file. If no value is
set for this element in the Vhost.xml file, the server uses the value in the Server.xml file.
The value of the MaxIdleTime element in the Vhost.xml file overrides the value of the
MaxIdleTime element in the Server.xml file.

3 Restart the server.

Configure how applications are assigned to server processes
Note: This section does not apply to Adobe Media Streaming Server because it doesn’t support multiple processes.
In some scenarios, you might want to change how applications are assigned to server processes. When you start the
server, you are starting a process called AMSMaster.exe (Windows) or amsmaster (Linux). Application instances run
in processes called AMSCore.exe (Windows) and amscore (Linux). The master process is a monitor that starts core
processes when necessary. There can be only one master process running at a time, but there can be many core
processes running at a time.
Note: The number of core processes you can run is limited by system memory. Do not run more than 100, and you
probably won’t need more than 20. If you are configuring the number of core processes and using the reloadApp()
Administration API or HTTP command, see Tech Note kb403044.

Last updated 8/21/2014

28

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

You can configure how applications are assigned to server processes in the Process section of the Application.xml
configuration file. Settings in an Application.xml file in a virtual host folder (for example,
rootinstall/conf/_defaultRoot_/_defaultVHost_/Application.xml) apply to all the applications running in that virtual
host. Settings in an Application.xml file in an application’s folder (for example,
rootinstall/applications/myApp/Application.xml) apply only to that application. The following is the XML structure:


vhost





2
300

...


Configure a process scope
❖ The Scope tag specifies at which level application instances are assigned to core processes. An application instance
can run by itself in a process or it can run in a process with other instances. Enter one of the following values for
the Scope element.
Value

Description

adaptor

All application instances in an adaptor run together in a process.

vhost

All application instances in a virtual host run together in a process. This is the default value.

app

All instances of a single application run together in a process.

inst

Each application instance runs in its own process. This provides the best application isolation and uses the
most system resources.
Running every instance in its own process can create many processes. You can set the Distribute
numprocs attribute to a value greater than 1 to distribute instances across that number of processes.

Distribute a process scope among multiple core processes
The four process scopes don’t provide a good distribution for all scenarios. For example, if you have one application
and want to run 25 instances of that application, you could either distribute those instances to 1 core process
(app) or to 25 core processes (inst). In this scenario, you could set Scope to app
and Distribute numprocs to 3 to distribute the application instances among three core processes.
Note: There is no limit to the value of the numprocs attribute, but you should never need more than 40. Depending on
available RAM, a number between 3 and 11 is realistic for most cases. Adobe recommends using prime number values
because they result in a more even distribution of connections to processes.
Scopes have an enclosing relationship with a strict ordering: adaptors contain virtual hosts, which contain
applications, which contain instances, which contain clients. The value of the Distribute tag must be a scope that is
lower in order than the value in the Scope tag. In other words, if the value of Scope is adaptor, the value of
Distribute can be vhosts, apps, insts, or clients. If the value of Scope is app, the value of Distribute can be
insts or clients. By default, the server uses the value immediately lower than the one specified in the Scope tag.
1 Set the scope value.

Last updated 8/21/2014

29

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

2 Set the numprocs value to a value higher than 1. The default value of numprocs is 3, which means that the default

behavior is to distribute application instances to three core processes.
3 Enter one of the following values for the Distribute element.
Value

Description

vhost or vhosts

All instances of applications in a virtual host run together in a process.

app or apps

All instances of an application run together in a process.

inst or insts

Each application instance runs in its own process. This is the default value. If you choose this value, you must also
set the Distribute numprocs attribute to a value greater than 1.

client or
clients

Each client connection runs in its own process.
Use this value for stateless applications only. Stateless applications don’t require clients to interact with other
clients and don’t have clients accessing live streams. Most vod (video on demand) applications are stateless
because each client plays content independently of all other clients. Chat and gaming applications are not
stateless because all clients share the application state. For example, if a shared chat application were set to
client, the messages wouldn't reach everyone in the chat because they’d be split into separate processes.

Configure the number of core processes and how long each process runs
❖ Specify the number of core processes in the MaxCores tag (the maximum number of core processes that can exist
concurrently) and the number of seconds that a core process can run in the RollOver tag. When a core process
reaches the limit, any new connections roll over to a new core process.
The following diagram depicts the way in which the server rolls over processes. In the XML, the rollover time is set
to 3600 seconds (1 hour), indicating that every hour a new process should start, and the maximum core processes
value is set to 3, indicating that the maximum number of processes at any given time is 3:

app

3600
3

...

Last updated 8/21/2014

30

31

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

A

B

12:00 12:20

C

D

E

1:00

2:00

3:00

4:00

5:00

A. Client connections B. Process 1 starts C. Process 2 starts D. Process 3 starts E. Process 4 starts; Process 1 ends, because the maximum core
processes limit was reached

When each process starts, it accepts new connections until the next process starts: that is, when process 1 starts, it
accepts new client connections to the application until process 2 starts; process 2 then accepts new client
connections until process 3 starts; and so on.
Note that the duration of process 1 might or might not be the full duration specified by the rollover value, because
rollover values are calibrated to the real clock time. The duration of process 1 is partially determined by the current
time when process 1 starts. For example, as shown in the diagram, when process 1 starts, the current time is 12:20,
so the duration of process 1 is only 40 minutes (because it is 40 minutes until the beginning of the hour in real time).
The duration of the first process is determined by the clock time; subsequent processes have a duration equal to the
specified rollover time.
To disable this feature, set RollOver to 0. This feature is disabled by default.
Note: If you have multiple VHosts with Process/Scope set to adaptor, you must set an identical RollOver value
for each VHost.
In stateless applications, such as vod applications, old core processes continue to serve earlier connections. In this
case, you can specify a value in the MaxCores tag to limit the maximum number of core processes that can run
simultaneously. If the application is not stateless, the server ignores any value you assign to MaxCores and sets it to
1. This ensures that an application instance is not split across multiple processes, but clients are disconnected
periodically. To disable this feature, set MaxCores to 0. This feature is disabled by default.
Note: An application is considered stateless if you configure it to distribute clients over multiple processes. To do this,
set the Distribute numprocs attribute to a value greater than 1, then set the Distribute tag to clients or set the
Scope tag to inst.
Check for process failures
1 Enter a value in the MaxFailures tag to specify the maximum number of process failures allowed before a core
process is disabled. The default value is 2.
2 Once disabled, a master process will not launch a core process until a minimum recovery time elapses. Enter a value

in the RecoveryTime tag to specify the minimum recovery time for contained elements; set the tag to 0 to disable
checking for process failures.
Use this feature to guard against a behavior in which a faulty core process can use the entire CPU by being repeatedly
launched very quickly.
Note: Applications that are loaded using the Administration API (including applications loaded using the
Administration Console) are not checked for process failures.

Last updated 8/21/2014

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Configure the RAW adaptor
Flash Media Server 3.5.3
The RAW (Record and Watch) file format records live media into configurable chunks that stream to any version of
Flash Player. Use the RAW file format to serve long-length, multi-bitrate DVR streams without running into
performance issues. The RAW file format records and plays back all streams that Adobe Media Server supports,
including H.264 video, data-only, audio-only, and so on.
1 Open the rootinstall/conf/Server.xml file in a text editor.
2 To configure how the server uses the RAW adaptor, edit the following XML parameters:


warning

true
65536

...
Element

Default value

Description

StreamLogLevel

warning

Controls log levels for all stream adaptors (FLV, MP4, and RAW). The
default value is warning. Possible values are verbose, warning, and
error.

Raw

Container element.

Contains elements that control the RAW adaptor.

EnableAggMsgs

true

Specifies whether the RAW adaptor generates aggregate messages
(true) or not (false). The default value is true. Aggregating
messages improves server performance.

MaxAggMsgSize

65536

The maximum size of an aggregate message, in bytes. The default value
is 65536. You can use any positive integer.

3 Save and validate the XML file.
4 Restart the server.

Disable RTMPE
Important: By default, RTMPE is enabled in the server’s Adaptor.xml file. For maximum security, it’s best to leave
RTMPE enabled. For more information, see the Adobe Media Server Hardening Guide.
In some scenarios, however, you might want to disable RTMPE (encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol). Because
RTMPE uses encrypted channels, there is a minor impact on performance; RTMPE requires about 15% more
processing power than RTMP. If you don’t control the applications that connect to Adobe Media Server and you don’t
want them to use RTMPE, you can disable RTMPE at the adaptor level.
To request an encrypted or encrypted tunnelling channel, applications specify rtmpe or rtmpte, respectively, in the
NetConnection.connect() URL, for example,
nc.connect("rtmpe://www.example.com/myMediaApplication"). If an application specifies RTMPE without
explicitly specifying a port, Flash Player scans ports just like it does with RTMP, in the following order: 1935 (RTMPE),
443 (RTMPE), 80 (RTMPE), 80 (RTMPTE).
Note: RTMPE cannot currently be used between servers or from edge to origin. In these cases, RTMPS can be used instead.
1 Open the Adaptor.xml file for the adaptor you want to disable (located in rootinstall/conf).

Last updated 8/21/2014

32

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

2 Locate the following XML:





 in
the Application.xml configuration file. When verification is enabled, the server verifies that the client SWF file
requesting a connection to the server matches the verifying SWF file. The verifying SWF file is a copy of the client SWF
file that you place on the server or in an external content repository.
By default, the server looks in rootinstall/applications/application_name/SWFs folder for the verifying SWF file. You
can override this default in the SWFFolder tag of the Application.xml file, the Server.xml file, or in the File plug-in. If
you installed Apache with Adobe Media Server, you can add a path to the folder from which you serve SWF files. For
example, on Windows, adding the path C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Media Server
4\webroot prevents you from needing to maintain two copies of each SWF file.
Note: If you’re deploying an Adobe AIR application, copy the SWF file you compiled into the AIR package to the server
or external content repository.
When the client SWF file connects to the server, the server verifies it. If the SWF file is verified, it is allowed to connect
to the application. If a client SWF file fails verification, the server disconnects the NetConnection object and logs an
event to the access log. The server does not send a NetStream status message to the client.
For client applications that comprise multiple SWF files or SWF files that dynamically load other SWF files, the SWF
file that contains the NetConnection object to connect to the server is the one that the server attempts to verify.
Note: SWF files connecting to Adobe Media Administration Server cannot be verified.
Locating SWF files for verification
The server looks for verifying SWF files in the following locations, in order:
1 The application-specific Application.xml file, if it exists. The Application.xml file defines the location of verifying

SWF files in the SWFFolder tag. If SWFFolder contains a file path, the server looks for verifying SWF files in that
file path. If SWFFolder is empty, the server looks in the default location: /applications/application_name/SWFs.
2 The Vhost-level Application.xml file. This Application.xml file defines the location of verifying SWF files for all

applications on the virtual host. The SWFFolder tag defines the location. If SWFFolder contains a file path, the
server looks for verifying SWF files in that file path. If SWFFolder is empty, the server looks in the default location:
/applications/application_name/SWFs.
3 The server checks the SWFFolder tag in the Server.xml file. This tag specifies a location for global SWF files, which

means SWF files that are common to all applications.
4 If a File plug-in is enabled for retrieval of SWF files, the server calls the File plug-in. The server passes any values

present in Application.xml or Server.xml to the plug-in. The plug-in developer overrides these values with paths to
the external content repository.
Configure SWF verification for applications
1 Locate the following section of the Application.xml file:

Last updated 8/21/2014

34

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server


...



1
5
5
60










2 Edit the following elements.
Element

Attribute

Description

SWFVerification

enabled

Set the enabled attribute to "true" or "false" to turn this feature on
or off. The default value is "false".

SWFFolder

None.

A single folder or a semicolon-delimited list of folders that contain copies
of client SWF files. These SWF files are used to verify connecting SWF files.
They are the verifying SWF files.
The default value is the application's folder appended with /SWFs. For
example, for an application called myApplication, if there isn’t a value set
for this element, verifying SWF files should be placed in the
applications/myApplication/SWFs folder.
If you are using the File plug-in to verify SWF files in an external content
repository, leave this field blank.
If you installed Apache with Adobe Media Server, enter the path to the
folder from which you are serving SWF files. For example, if you’re serving
SWF files from the webroot directory on Windows, enter the path
C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Media Server 4\webroot.
Important: All SWF files in the specified folder are hashed and cached in
memory when the server starts and every time the cache TTL expires. A
large number of SWF files can result in start-up time delays and high
memory usage.

MinGoodVersion

None.

Specifies the minimum version of this feature to accept. The default value
is 0, which allows this and all future versions. This is a reserved field that
works with Flash Player; Adobe recommends keeping the default value.

DirLevelSWFScan

None.

Specifies the number of levels of subfolders within a parent folder to scan
for SWF files. The parent folder is specified in the SWFFolder element.
Specifying a positive value scans that number of subfolder levels.
Specifying zero scans the parent folder and no subfolders. Specifying a
negative value scans all subfolder levels. The default value is 1, which
means that the server scans only one subfolder level.

MaxInitDelay

None

The maximum amount of time to process SWF files, in seconds. The default
value is 5 seconds.

FirstHashTimeout

None

The maximum amount of time that a client can use to provide its first
verification to the server.

Last updated 8/21/2014

35

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Element

Attribute

Description

FinalHashTimeout

None

The maximum amount of time that a client can use to provide its final
verification to the server.

UserAgentExceptions

None.

Container.

Exception

from
to

A user agent to except from verification. Use the from and to attributes to
indicate the lowest and highest versions to except. This is a string
comparison, with editing to make all numeric fields equal in length. For
more information, see the comments in the Application.xml file and
“Create verification exceptions” later in this topic.

Cache

None.

Container.

TTL

None.

The time to live for the SWF file, in minutes. The default value is 1440
minutes (24 hours). If a SWF file is removed from the server, the verification
values stay in the cache for 24 hours; users can connect to the application
until the cache expires.

UpdateInterval

None.

The maximum time in minutes to wait for the server to scan the SWFs
folders for updates when there is a miss in the cache. The default value is
5 minutes, which means a SWF file copied to the SWFs folder is picked up
by the server within 5 minutes.

Create verification exceptions
❖ Add Exception elements to the UserAgentExceptions section of the Application.xml file.
Certain applications—for example, Adobe® Flash® Media Live Encoder—do not support the form of SWF
verification used by the server. You can add one or more exceptions to the SWF verification rules that allow
specified user agents, such as Adobe Media Live Encoder, to bypass SWF verification, as in the following:

...





Configure SWF verification globally
You can configure verification for a group of SWF files on the server that are common to all applications.
❖ In the Server.xml file Root/Server/SWFVerification/SWFFolder tag, specify folders that hold the verifying

SWF files. You can also configure other values for these SWF files.
Note: In addition to configuring the SWFFolder tag in the Server.xml file, enable verification in the Vhost-level or
application-specific Application.xml file. See “Configure SWF Verification for Applications” in this topic.
Create folders for the verifying SWF files
1 If the SWFFolder value is the default, create a folder called SWFs in the application’s folder on the server.
For example, for an application called myMediaApp, create the folder applications/myMediaApp/SWFs. SWF files
in the SWFs folder verify connections to any instance of the myMediaApp application.
2 To verify SWF files for application instances, create instance folders in the SWFs directory, for example,

applications/myMediaApp/SWFs/chat01, applications/myMediaApp/SWFs/chat02, and so on.
SWF files in the SWFs directory can verify all instances of the application; SWF files within an instance folder can
verify only that instance.

Last updated 8/21/2014

36

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Note: Multiple SWF files may exist in either directory. A SWF file can be renamed and still used for verification as long
as it’s a copy of the client SWF file.

Restrict access to the server with a cross-domain file
You can restrict access to an edge server or the Administration Server with a cross-domain XML file. The crossdomain XML file lets you specify a list of domains from which clients can access the edge server or Administration
Server.
1 Open rootinstall/conf/Server.xml and locate the CrossDomainPath element in the Server element (or the
AdminServer element, for the Administration Server):

...


2 Specify the location of the cross-domain file in the CrossDomainPathElement, for example:
C:/Security/config/files/ams/crossdomain.xml

3 Validate the Server.xml file, save it, and restart the server.

Limit access to Adobe Media Administration Server
The Administration Console connects to Adobe Media Administration Server, which connects to Adobe Media
Server. By default, the Administration Server in installed on port 1111. Adobe recommends that you block all external
access to port 1111 so that access to the admin server is restricted only to clients that are within your firewall.
Additionally, you can restrict access to the admin server by using domain based restrictions.
By default, a client can connect to Adobe Media Administration Server from any domain or IP address, which can be
a security risk. If desired, you can change this in the AdminServer section of the Server.xml file.
1 Open rootinstall/conf/Server.xml and locate the following code:

...
all
...


2 Edit the Allow element to specify which connections to Adobe Media Administration Server the server responds

to. This is specified as a comma-delimited list of host names, domain names, and full or partial IP addresses, as well
as the keyword all. For example: x.foo.com, foo.com, 10.60.1.133, 10.60.
3 Validate the XML, save the Server.xml file, and restart the server.

Set limits on unsuccessful login attempts
You can use the LogInLimits settings in the rootinstall/conf/Server.xml file to set the number of unsuccessful
attempts a client is allowed when trying to log in to the admin server. With these settings, you define how many failed
attempts are allowed before the client must wait to attempt to log in again. You also define the amount of time they
must wait. In addition, you can lock the user out of the server entirely after a certain number of attempts.
To set the number of login attempts the client can have before waiting, use the MaxFailures sub-element. After that
number of failures, the client must wait the number of seconds defined by the RecoveryTime sub-element. If the client
tries unsuccessfully to log in a number of times equal to LockOutLimit, they are locked out of the server until the
server is restarted.

Last updated 8/21/2014

37

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

In the following example, a user can try to log in 10 times. If they fail to log in successfully on the 10th attempt, they
must wait 5 minutes (300 seconds) before attempting to log in again. If they fail 20 times total, they are barred from
logging in until the server is restarted:



10

300

20



For more information, see “LogInLimits” on page 209.

Configure SSL
Note: Adobe Media Server uses OpenSSL libraries internally. To upgrade OpenSSL libraries, see TechNote 90293.
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a protocol for enabling secure communications over TCP/IP. Adobe Media Server
provides native support for both incoming and outgoing SSL connections. An incoming connection is a connection
between Flash Player and the server. An outgoing connection is a connection between two servers.
RTMPS adheres to SSL standards for secure network connections and enables connections through a TCP socket on
a secure port. Data passed over the secure connection is encrypted to avoid eavesdropping by unauthorized third
parties. Because secure connections require extra processing power and may affect the server’s performance, use
RTMPS only for applications that require a higher level of security or that handle sensitive or critical data.
By default, when Flash Player connects to Adobe Media Server, it scans the following ports in order: 1935, 443, 80, 80
(RTMP tunneling). To configure SSL, specify that a port is secure. To specify that a port is secure, place a minus (“-”)
sign in front of the port number. The default secure port for RTMPS is 443. To configure the default secure port, enter
-443 in the ADAPTOR.HOSTPORT parameter in the rootinstall/conf/ams.ini file, as follows:
ADAPTOR.HOSTPORT = :1935,-443

When Flash Player encounters an “rtmps://amsdomain/application” string, it communicates with Adobe Media
Server over port 443. Adobe Media Server returns data to the client over port 443. Traffic with an “rtmp://” string uses
port 1935.
To connect to Adobe Media Server over an SSL connection, clients must do the following:
1 Set the NetConnection.proxyType property to "best" before connecting.
2 Specify the RTMPS protocol in the call to the NetConnection.connect() method.

If SSL is configured, the following client code connects securely:
var nc:NetConnection = new NetConnection();
nc.proxyType = "best";
nc.connect("rtmps://amsexamples.adobe.com/vod/instance1");

If you configure any port other than 443 as secure, for example, -1935, the client must specify the port in the URI, for
example, “rtmps://host:1935/app”.
Note: All server editions support a version of RTMP called RTMPE, which is an 128-bit encrypted protocol. RTMPE is
more lightweight than SSL and is enabled by default. For more information, see the NetConnection.connect() entry
in the ActionScript® 3.0 Language Reference or in the ActionScript 2.0 Language Reference.

Last updated 8/21/2014

38

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Certificates
You can get an SSL certificate from a certificate authority or create a certificate yourself. If a certificate is signed by an
intermediate Certificate Authority (CA), it must include the intermediate certificate as part of the certificate that the
server returns to the client. Your certificate file (if signed by an intermediate CA) should look something like the
following:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----...
-----END CERTIFICATE---------BEGIN CERTIFICATE----...
-----END CERTIFICATE-----

The first BEGIN CERTIFICATE/END CERTIFICATE pair is your certificate. The next BEGIN CERTIFICATE/END
CERTIFICATE pair is the intermediate CA that signed your certificate. You can add additional sections as needed.

Secure incoming connections
Specify the location of the SSL certificate and the certificate’s private key, and configure the adaptor to listen on a
secure port.
1 Open the Adaptor.xml file for the adaptor you want to configure and locate the following code:

...





ALL:!ADH:!LOW:!EXP:!MD5:@STRENGTH
5


...


2 Edit the following elements.
Element

Description

SSLCertificateFile

The location of the certificate file to send to the client. Specify an absolute path or
a path relative to the adaptor folder.

SSLCertificateKeyFile type="PEM"

The location of the private key file for the certificate. Specify an absolute path or a
path relative to the adaptor folder. The type attribute specifies the type of
encoding used for the certificate key file. This can be either "PEM" or "ASN1". The
default value is "PEM". The private key and the certificate can be combined into
one file.
If the key file is encrypted, the pass phrase must be specified in the
SSLPassPhrase tag.

Last updated 8/21/2014

39

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Element

Description

SSLPassPhrase

The pass phrase to use for decrypting the private key file. If the private key file is
not encrypted, leave this tag empty.

SSLCipherSuite

The SSL ciphers: a colon-delimited list of components. A component can be a key
exchange algorithm, authentication method, encryption method, digest type, or
one of a selected number of aliases for common groupings. Do not change the
default settings unless you are very familiar with SSL ciphers. The possible values
are listed here: “SSLCipherSuite” on page 139.

SessionTimeout

The amount of time in minutes a session remains valid. Any value less than 1 is read
as 1. The default value is 5. If a client reconnects to a session before
SessionTimeout is reached, the cipher suite list isn’t sent during the SSL
handshake.

3 To configure a secure port for an adaptor, specify a minus sign before the port number in the ADAPTOR.HOSTPORT

parameter in the rootinstall/conf/ams.ini file, as follows:
ADAPTOR.HOSTPORT = :1935,-443

This configuration tells the server to listen on ports 1935 and 443, and that 443 is a secure port that receives only
RTMPS connections. An RTMPS connection to port 1935 fails: the client attempts to perform a SSL handshake that
the server fails to complete. An RTMPS connection to port 443 succeeds: the client performs a SSL handshake that
the server completes. An RTMP connection to port 443 also fails: the server tries to perform a SSL handshake that
the client fails to complete.
4 Restart the server.
5 Check the rootinstall/logs/edge.00.log file to verify that no errors have been reported.

Configure incoming connections when multiple virtual hosts are assigned to one adaptor
You can configure the server to return a certificate based on which port a client connects to. This lets you assign
multiple virtual hosts to one adaptor and return a different certificate for each virtual host.
Note: Generally, if you’re hosting multiple customers, each virtual host has its own domain name. Each domain name
must have its own certificate.
1 Locate the following code in the Adaptor.xml file:

...

${ADAPTOR.HOSTPORT}

...


2 Create new HostPort elements with unique name and ctl_channel attributes and unique port values for RTMP

and SSL.
For example, add the following HostPort tag in addition to the default HostPort tag:
:1936,-444

3 For each HostPort element, enter an Edge element under the SSL element with an identical name attribute. If you

don’t specify an Edge element, the edge uses the default SSL configuration.

Last updated 8/21/2014

40

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

This sample code demonstrates how to configure edge1 to return cert2.pem when a client connects to it on port
443. Since there is no Edge tag for edge2, edge2 will use the default configuration specified in the SSLServerCtx
section that is directly under the SSL container tag. The edge2 server returns cert.pem when a client connects to
it on port 444.


cert.pem
private.pem

ALL:!ADH:!LOW:!EXP:!MD5:@STRENGTH
5



cert2.pem
private2.pem

ALL:!ADH:!LOW:!EXP:!MD5:@STRENGTH
5




4 Validate the XML and save the file.
5 Restart the server.

Secure outgoing connections
1 Open the Server.xml file and locate the following code:






true


9
ALL:!ADH:!LOW:!EXP:!MD5:@STRENGTH





2 Edit the following elements.

Last updated 8/21/2014

41

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Element

Description

SSLRandomSeed

The number of bytes of entropy to use for seeding the pseudo-random number generator
(PRNG). You cannot specify anything less than 8 bytes, and the default value is 16. Entropy is a
measure of randomness. The more entropy, the more random numbers the PRNG will contain.
The server may take longer to start up if you specify a large number.

SSLSessionCacheGC

How often to flush expired sessions from the server-side session cache, in minutes.

SSLVerifyCertificate

A Boolean value specifying whether to verify the certificate returned by the server being
connected to (true) or not (false). The default value is true. Disabling certificate verification
can result in a security hazard. Do not disable verification unless you are certain you understand
the ramifications.

SSLCACertificatePath

A folder containing certificates. Each file in the folder must contain only a single certificate, and
the file name must be hash and the extension ".0", for example, e98140a6.0.
On a Windows 32-bit operating system, if this tag is empty, the server looks for certificates in the
rootinstall\certs directory. You can import the Windows certificate store to the certs directory by
running AMSMaster -console -initialize from a command line.
In Linux, you must specify the location of the certificates.

SSLCACertificateFile

Specifies the name of a file containing one or more certificates in PEM format.

SSLVerifyDepth

Specifies the maximum depth of an acceptable certificate. If a self-signed root certificate cannot
be found within this depth, certificate verification fails. The default value is 9.

SSLCipherSuite

The SSL ciphers: a colon-delimited list of components. A component can be a key exchange
algorithm, authentication method, encryption method, digest type, or one of a selected
number of aliases for common groupings. Do not change the default settings unless you are
very familiar with SSL ciphers. The possible values are listed here: “SSLCipherSuite” on page 227.

Configure adaptors to manage outgoing SSL connections independently
The SSL section in the Server.xml file configures all adaptors to use the same settings. However, you might want to use
a different certificate for each virtual host. In this case, assign one virtual host to each adaptor and configure your
adaptors individually to override the settings in the Server.xml file.
❖ Copy the SSL section in the Server.xml file to the Adaptor.xml files and enter the new values. You don’t need to

copy the SSLRandomSeed tag, as this tag is a server-level setting that cannot be overridden in Adaptor.xml.
Configure virtual hosts to manage outgoing SSL connections independently
For example, you can disable certificate checking in one virtual host, use a certificate in a different folder for one virtual
host, and implement a different set of ciphers in a third virtual host.
1 Uncomment the SSL section under the Proxy tag in the appropriate Vhost.xml file:

Last updated 8/21/2014

42

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server


...













When the SSL tag is present, the entire SSL section is used to configure the virtual host. If an SSL tag is omitted
from this section, the server uses the default settings.
2 Restart the server.

Configure Adobe Media Server to work with a hardware SSL proxy
When you use a hardware SSL proxy, you don't need to configure Adobe Media Server for SSL. The hardware sits
between Adobe Media Server and the Internet. Data sent between Adobe Media Server and the hardware is
unencrypted. The hardware encrypts the data and forwards it to the Internet.
Configure the hardware to listen externally on port 443 to receive encrypted data sent over Internet from clients.
Configure the hardware to forward data to Adobe Media Server on port 1935. Adobe Media Server listens on port 1935
by default. If you’ve changed the default port, configure the hardware to forward data on that port.

Configure RPCs (Remote Procedure Calls)
Adobe Media Server provides settings in the Application.xml file for configuring which RPC methods can be called.
The default is to block all RPC calls.
You can enable RPCs by setting the  element’s enable attribute to true; for example:


After enabling RPCs, you must then list individual methods that are allowed. Each type of class—Client,
NetConnection, Stream, and SharedObject—has its own whitelist of methods that can be called. If a method or object
is not explicitly listed in the whitelist, then it is considered blocked.
The settings for RPCs are in the  element of the Application.xml file. This element contains the
following sub-elements:

•

 — All methods blocked by default.

•

 — Only the onStatus() method is allowed by default, if RPCs are enabled.

•

 — All methods blocked by default.

•

 — Only the onStatus() method is allowed by default, if RPCs are enabled.

Each of these sub-elements takes a  sub-element. Each  sub-element takes an  subelement. The  sub-element is a comma-delimited list of allowed methods.
To add a method to a class’s whitelist:
1 Enable RPCs by setting the  element’s enabled attribute to true; for example:

Last updated 8/21/2014

43

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server



2 Add the method you want to allow to the class’s  element. The following example allows the getLocal()

and setFps() methods to be called on the SharedObject class:


getLocal,setFps



3 Ensure that the defaults for the other classes meet your security standards. After enabling RPCs for all classes, you

should review the default allowed methods.
The method names are case-sensitive and should be in one of the following formats:[objectPath.]method
[objectPath.]object
If you allow an object but do not list its methods, then all methods of that object are allowed. For example,
a.b matches methods a.b.c() and a.b.d().

Enable virtual directory mappings for server-side File objects
You can specify virtual directory mappings for server-side File objects in the Application.xml configuration file.
However, the feature must be enabled at the server level in the Server.xml configuration file.
To enable virtual directories for server-side File objects, set the  element’s enable
attribute to true in the Server.xml file. In the Application.xml file, add a  sub-element to the
 element.
Only enable VirtualDirectoryForFile when you must provide virtual directories for server-side scripting; it is not
required for adding virtual directories for streams. When virtual directories for File objects are enabled, anyone who
has access to a server-side script can write files anywhere on the server disk. As a result, it is disabled by default.
Activating it requires a configuration from the Server.xml file administrator.
If you map File objects in the Application.xml file and don’t have the feature enabled in the Server.xml file, the
following message appears in the log:
"Virtual directories for file objects is not supported due to the Server level security
setting."

The following example enables virtual directory mappings for server side File objects in the Server.xml file:




...
...
...
...

The following example from the Application.xml file creates a new virtual directory mapping for server-side File
objects:

Last updated 8/21/2014

44

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server





/flashapps;C:\dev\Code\Flash\tincan\flashapps\


...
...
...

Performing general configuration tasks
Enable checkpoint logging events
Many companies use statistics from the access log to bill customers. If your programming includes live events or 24/7
programming, the events you use to calculate billing might not occur within a billing cycle. To solve this problem, you
can enable checkpoint events. Checkpoint events log bytes periodically during an event. The following are available as
checkpoint events: connect-continue, play-continue, and publish-continue.
You must enable checkpoint events at the server level in the Server.xml file. You can disable checkpoints at the vhost
and application level in the Vhost.xml and Application.xml files. You can also override the logging interval at the vhost
and application levels. For more information, see the comments in the XML files located in the rootinstall/conf folder.
1 Open the rootinstall/conf/Server.xml file in a text editor.
2 Locate the Root/Server/Logging/Checkpoints element:

60
3600


3 Set the Checkpoints enable attribute to true, like this: .
4 You can optionally set values for the CheckInterval and LogInterval elements to indicate how often the server

should check for and log events.
5 Save and validate the file.
6 Restart the server.

Allow Administration API methods to be called over HTTP
You must specify each Administration API method that may be called over HTTP.
1 Open the rootinstall/conf/ams.ini file.
2 Set the USERS.HTTPCOMMAND_ALLOW parameter to a comma-delimited list of APIs, and restart the server. The

default value is ping. For more information, see “Allow (HTTPCommands)” on page 235.

Last updated 8/21/2014

45

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Allow application debugging connections
To play back streams and obtain data from shared objects, the Administration Console must make a special debugging
connection to the server. By default, the server does not allow this connection.
1 Open the Application.xml file.

Note: You can set these values in an Application.xml file at the VHost level or at the application level. To set the value
at the application level, copy an Application.xml file to the application’s folder.
2 Locate the following XML:

50
false


3 Set the AllowDebugDefault element to true.

Note: Debug connections count against license limits.
4 Save and validate the file.
5 Restart the server.

Configuring IPv6
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6) is a new version of Internet Protocol that supports 128-bit addresses. The current
version of Internet Protocol, IPv4, supports 32-bit addresses. IPv6 alleviates the address shortage problem on the
Internet. A system that only runs IPv6 can't communicate with a system that only runs IPv4.
By default, Adobe Media Server runs in IPv4 mode, even if the operating system is configured for IPv6. When Adobe
Media Server runs in IPv6 mode, hostnames specified in Adaptor.xml are resolved to IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
Important: In Red Hat® Linux systems, you must update the NETWORKING_IPV6 value in /etc/sysconfig/network when
installing or uninstalling IPv6.
Activate IPv6 on the network interface card.
IPv6 is embedded in all operating systems that the server supports. You may need to activate IPv6 on the interfaces.
For more information, see the operating system’s Help.
Allow the server to listen on IPv6 sockets.
1 Open the rootinstall/conf/Server.xml file in a text editor.
2 Locate the NetworkingIPv6 tag and set enable to "true":


3 Save the file and restart the server.

Enclose numeric IPv6 addresses in URLs in brackets.
Wherever a numeric IPv6 address is used in a client-side script, server-side script, or in the server configuration files,
enclose it in brackets:
rtmp://[fd5e:624b:4c18:ffff:0:5efe:10.133.128.108]:1935/streamtest

You must specify the interface zone index for a link-local address:
rtmp://[fe80::204:23ff:fe14:da1c%4]:1935/streamtest

Last updated 8/21/2014

46

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

It’s a good idea to register the RTMP, RTMPS, and RTMPE protocols with a network services database and use a
service name (or decimal port number, if necessary) in the server configuration files.
Check the logs
When the server starts, it logs available stack configuration, host name, and all available IP addresses for the host in
the master.xx.log, edge.xx.log, and admin.xx.log files (located in the rootinstall/logs/ directory). The following xcomment fields from a sample edge log file indicate that the IPv6 stack and the IPv4 stack are available, and that the
server host has dual addresses and is listening on both interfaces:
AMS detected IPv6 protocol stack!
AMS config 
AMS running in IPv6 protocol stack mode!
Host: amsqewin2k3-02 IPv4: 10.133.192.42 IPv6: fe80::204:23ff:fe14:da1c%4
Listener started ( _defaultRoot__? ) : 19350/v6
Listener started ( _defaultRoot__? ) : 19350/v4
Listener started ( _defaultRoot__? ) : 1935/v6
Listener started ( _defaultRoot__? ) : 1935/v4

On Red Hat Linux, the edge logs display only the highest IP version the socket listeners are using, even if the socket
listeners accept connections over both IPv4 and IPv6. In the previous example, only the v6 entries would be displayed.
On IPv6-enabled Linux, if you are using an host name that resolves to IPv4 host name with an RTMPT or RTMPTE
connection, configure the Adaptor.xml appropriately to resolve connections quickly. See “HTTPIdent2” on page 131.

Defining Application object properties
You can define properties for the server-side Application object in the server’s Application.xml configuration files. If
you define properties in the default Application.xml file, the properties are available for all applications on a virtual
host. If you define properties in an Application.xml file in an application folder, the properties are available only for
that application.
To define a property, create an XML tag in the ScriptEngine section of the Application.xml file. The property name
corresponds to the tag’s name, and the property value corresponds to the tag’s contents.
For example, the following XML fragment defines the properties user_name and dept_name, with the values jdoe and
engineering, respectively:



jdoe
engineering




To access the property in server-side code, use the syntax in either of these examples:
application.config.prop_name
application.config["prop_name"]

Note: The properties you define are accessible from application.config.property, not from
application.property.
For example, given the previous XML fragment, the following trace() statements are valid:

Last updated 8/21/2014

47

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

trace("I am " + application.config.user_name + " and I work in the " +
application.config.dept_name + " department.");
trace("I am " + application.config["user_name"] + " and I work in the " +
application.config["dept_name"] + " department.");

The output from either statement would be as follows:
I am jdoe and I work in the engineering department.

You can also use environment variables and symbols you define in the substitution.xml file. For example, assume that
the environment variable COMPUTERNAME is equal to jsmith01, and you have defined a symbol named DEPT in the
substitution.xml file:


Engineering



In addition, the following XML appears in the Application.xml file:



${%COMPUTERNAME%}
${DEPT}




In a server-side script, the following trace statements are valid:
trace("My computer's name is: " + application.config.compName);
trace("My department is: " + application.config.dept);

The output is as follows:
My computer's name is: jsmith01
My department is: Engineering

Note: Server-side ActionScript trace()statements display in the Live Log panel of the Administration Console.

More Help topics
“Using symbols in configuration files” on page 18

Configure or disable native bandwidth detection
The server can detect a client’s bandwidth in the core server code (called native bandwidth detection), or in a serverside script (called script-based bandwidth detection). Native bandwidth detection is faster than script-based because the
core server code is written in C and C++. Also, with native bandwidth detection, if a client connects through edge
servers, the outermost edge server detects the bandwidth, which results in more accurate data. Native bandwidth
detection is enabled and configured by default.
The server detects bandwidth by sending a series of data chunks to the client, each larger than the last. If desired, you
can configure the size of the data chunks, the rate at which they’re sent, and the amount of time the server sends data
to the client. For more information about detecting bandwidth in an application, see the Developer Guide.
1 Open the Application.xml file.

Last updated 8/21/2014

48

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Note: You can set these values in an Application.xml file at the VHost level or at the application level. To set the value
at the application level, copy an Application.xml file to the application’s folder.
2 Locate the following code:
...
...

-1
16384
2

...
...

Note: To disable native bandwidth detection, set the enabled attribute to false and restart the server.
3 Edit the following elements.
Element

Description

BandwidthDetection

Set the enabled attribute to "true" or "false" to turn this feature on or off.

MaxRate

The maximum rate in Kbps that the server sends data to the client. The default value is -1,
which sends the data at whatever rate is necessary to measure bandwidth.

DataSize

The amount of data in bytes that the server sends to the client. To detect the client’s
bandwidth, the server attempts to send a series of random blocks of data to the client, each
time sending this much more data. For example, x bytes are sent, followed by 2x bytes,
followed by 3x bytes, and so on until MaxWait time has elapsed.

MaxWait

The number of seconds the server sends data to the client. Increasing this number provides
a more accurate bandwidth figure, but it also forces the client to wait longer.

4 Save and validate the Application.xml file.
5 Restart the server.

Configuring content storage
Setting the location of application files
The presence of an application folder within the applications folder tells the server that the application exists. By
default, the applications folder is located at rootinstall/applications.
Within the applications folder, create subfolders for your applications. Within each individual application folder,
create subfolders to create instances of applications. For example, the following path is to an instance of an application
called “my_application”:
rootinstall/applications/my_application/first_instance
To change the location of the applications folder and the live and vod applications, edit the locations in the following
parameters in the ams.ini file:

• Registered applications folder: VHOST.APPSDIR
• Live application: LIVE_DIR

Last updated 8/21/2014

49

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

• Vod application: VOD_DIR

Mapping directories to network drives
By default, the server runs as System Account with no access to network drives. You can change the service user to a
user with network access privileges with a UNC path.
A Windows network-mapped drive is not valid when a user is logged out. If the server is running as a service and the
user is logged out, the mapped drive is removed as well. To run with the mapped drive, lock the server instead of
logging out. Using the UNC path is preferred when the server is running as a service.
1 Stop Adobe Media Server and Adobe Media Administration Server.
2 Make the changes to the configuration.
3 Check that the server user has appropriate access rights to map to the network drive (system account rights are

usually not sufficient.)
4 Restart AdobeMedia Server and Adobe Media Administration Server.

Setting the location of recorded streams and shared objects
By default, all recorded streams for an application are stored in a streams folder in the application directory. Shared
objects are stored in a shared objects folder in the application directory.
Note: Adobe strongly recommends that folders that store streams always contain only streams and no other application
files.
Use the StorageDir tag in the Application.xml file to specify a different location to store streams or shared objects.
You could do this for vod applications. For example, if you already have a collection of video files in a directory other
than the application directory, you can set the storage directory to that other directory instead of copying content to
the application directory.
When you specify a value for the  element in the application-specific XML, that value is specific to the
application. Otherwise, when you specify a value in the virtual host-level Application.xml, the scope is extended to all
the applications on that virtual host.
Within the directory that you specify as the storage directory, you must create physical subdirectories for different
application instances. Adobe Media Server sandboxes the content for each instance of an application.
Let’s say, for example, you set the storage directory to C:\Content for the chatApp application:
C:\Content

When a user connects to the firstRoom instance of the chatApp application and tries to play a stream, the server looks
for the stream in a subfolder C:\Content\firstRoom. Content for each instance is sandboxed from other instance of
the same application; a user who connects to the secondRoom instance would not be able to access the content in
C:\Content\firstRoom.
If you do not want resources to be sandboxed by application and application instance, use virtual directories.

Last updated 8/21/2014

50

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Mapping virtual directories to physical directories
Adobe Media Server stores recorded streams and video and audio files in default locations in the application directory.
In some scenarios, you might want to specify particular locations for these resources, but without restricting access by
application or application instance. By mapping a virtual directory to a physical directory, you do not need to copy
resources to Adobe Media Server’s application directory, and you can retain your existing classification and
categorization of resources.
To map a virtual directory for an application, you can use the  element in the Vhost.xml or the
Application.xml file. This element provides various options:

• You can specify a virtual directory name or not. When a name is specified, the server maps the name to the specified
directory and first looks for the stream in the specified directory.

• You can specify multiple physical directories for a single virtual directory. Use multiple  tags.
• When specified in an application-specific Application.xml file,  controls only the storage
location of resources for that application. Any instance of the application can access video files in that location
(unlike with ), but other applications cannot.

• When specified in the virtual-host Application.xml file or the Vhost.xml file,  controls the
storage location of all applications on that virtual host. All applications on the virtual host can access video files in
the specified location, although Adobe recommends that if you want control at the virtual host level, you configure
the  tag in Vhost.xml file instead of the virtual-host Application.xml file.
If you are creating a new virtual directory for a File object (as opposed to a stream), you must also enable the
VirtualDirectoryForFile option in the Server.xml file. For more information, see “Enable virtual directory
mappings for server-side File objects” on page 44.
The order in which the server determines the correct directory to use for streams is as follows:
1 Virtual directory (as specified in )
2 Storage directory (as specified in )
3 Default location (the streams folder in the application directory)

Note: Adobe strongly recommends that folders that store streams always contain only streams and no other application
files.

Virtual directory example: vod
One usage scenario for this element is to specify a directory to use for a specific vod application and put video files in
this directory to stream them instantly. You would use the  element in the application-specific
Application.xml file. To map a directory in this way, edit the application-specific Application.xml file to include the
virtual directory, as shown in the following example:




/;C:\my_videos




This code overrides the VHost.xml file’s mapping of '/' (if it exists) for this application only. To play a file in the virtual
directory, such as C:\my_videos\sample.flv, a client connects to the vod application and calls NetStream.play():

Last updated 8/21/2014

51

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

ns.play("sample");

The  element in the application-specific Application.xml file affects only that application,
protecting your streams from being accessed by other applications on the same virtual host. It overrides settings in the
Vhost.xml file.
Playing streams nested in subfolders
To play a stream, specify the codec before you specify the path to the stream. FLV streams don’t require a codec prefix,
but F4V/MP4 files, MP3 files, and RAW files do.
Suppose the virtual directory mapping is foo;C:\my_videos. The following examples are for
the client-side NetStream.play()method:
ns.play("mp4:foo/sample.f4v",0,-1) // F4V/MP4 files
ns.play("raw:foo/sample",0,-1) // RAW files
ns.play("mp3:foo/sample",0,-1) //MP3 files
ns.play("foo/sample",0,-1). // FLV files

The following are examples for the Server-Side ActionScript Stream.play() method:
myStream.play("mp4:foo/sample.f4v",0,-1) // F4V/MP4 files
myStream.play("mp4:foo/sample",0,-1) // RAW files
myStream.play("mp3:foo/sample",0,-1) // MP3 files
myStream.play("foo/sample",0,-1) // FLV files

Virtual directory example: Separating high- and low-bandwidth video
One way you can use directory mapping is to separate storage of different kinds of resources. For example, your
application could allow users to view either high-bandwidth video or low-bandwidth video, and you might want to
store high-bandwidth and low-bandwidth video in separate folders. You can create a mapping wherein all streams that
start with low are stored in specific directories, C:\low_bandwidth and C:\low_bandwidth2, and all streams that start
with high are stored in a different directory:

low;c:\low_bandwidth
low;c:\low_bandwidth2
high;c:\high_bandwidth


When the client wants to access low-bandwidth video, the client calls ns.play("low/sample"). This call tells the
server to look for the sample.flv file in the C:\low_bandwidth and C:\low_bandwidth2 folders.

ns.play(”low/sample”);

C:\low_bandwidth\sample.flv

A client connects to the sample.flv file in the low-bandwidth storage area on the server, which is mapped in Application.xml.

Similarly, a call to ns.play("high/sample") tells the server to look for the sample.flv file in the c:\high_bandwidth
folder.
Important: To play an F4V/MP4, MP3, or RAW file, specify the codec before the path, for example
ns.play("mp4:high/sample"). The mp3 prefix is mp3:. The RAW prefix is raw:.

Last updated 8/21/2014

52

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Note that if the client calls ns.play("sample"), the stream name does not match any virtual directory specified, so
the server will then look for sample.flv inside the directory specified by the storage directory element ().
If no storage directory is specified by , then the server looks in the default location (the streams folder)
for the file; that is, the order in which the server looks for files is:
1 Virtual directory (as specified in )
2 Storage directory (as specified in )
3 Default location (the streams folder in the application directory)

Virtual directory example: Local and network file paths
The following table shows three examples of different virtual directory configurations, including mapping to a
network drive, and how the configurations determine the directory to which a recorded stream is published. In the
first case, because the URI specified ("myStream") does not match the virtual directory name that is specified ("low"),
the server publishes the stream to the default streams directory.
Mapping in Vhost.xml

URI in NetStream call Location of published stream

 tag
low;e:\amsstreams

"myStream"

c:\...\rootinstall\applications\yourApp\streams\_definst_\myStream.flv

low;e:\amsstreams

"low/myStream"

e:\amsstreams\myStream.flv

low;\\mynetworkDrive\share\amsstreams

"low/myStream"

\\mynetworkDrive\share\amsstreams\myStream.flv

Important: To play an F4V/MP4, MP3, or RAW file, specify the codec before the path, for example
ns.play("mp4:low/myStream"). The mp3 prefix is mp3:. The RAW prefix is raw:.

Configuring Apache HTTP Server
About Apache HTTP Server
Adobe Media Server includes Apache HTTP Server. If you install and enable the web server, you can deliver client SWF
files, container HTML pages, and media assets from Adobe Media Server. You can serve content over HTTP, as well
as RTMP. In addition, you can serve video over HTTP progressive download as a fallback solution for web proxies that
break RTMP or RTMPT.
The Adobe Media Server installation of Apache is like the standard installation. You can use Apache documentation
for most configuration tasks. The Apache root installation folder is rootinstall/Apache2.2. The web root is
rootinstall/webroot.
Note: The Adobe Media Server documentation uses “rootinstall” to indicate the Adobe Media Server root installation
folder (C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Media Server 4 by default on Windows). The Apache documentation and
configuration files use “ServerRoot” to indicate the Apache root installation folder.
Installation locations
The Apache server that installs with Adobe Media Server differs from a standard Apache installation in the following ways:

• The apachectl files are in the rootinstall/Apache2.2/manual/programs folder.
• The httpd.conf file and the standard secondary configuration files are in the rootinstall/Apache2.2/conf folder.

Last updated 8/21/2014

53

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

• The log files are in the rootinstall/Apache2.2/logs folder. For more information, see “Monitoring and Managing Log
Files” on page 97.
Alternate configurations
To do any of the following, edit the rootinstall/Apache2.2/conf/httpd.conf file:

• Handle multiple adaptors or virtual hosts
• Block sensitive file types, such as ASC
• Handle any non-standard MIME types required for progressive download
• Serve the default server-status and server-info pages
• Modify source directories

Specify the maximum HTTP header line length
In the Adobe Media Server Adaptor.xml file, the MaxHeaderLineLength element determines the size of the HTTP
header the server can handle. The default value for MaxHeaderLineLength is 1024 bytes. Some browsers send a header
larger than 1024 bytes. In this scenario, Apache sends back an empty response. To fix this issue, configure
MaxHeaderLineLength to 8192.
Note: By default, the Apache HTTP header size limit is 8 KB (8190 bytes plus a carriage return).
1 Open rootinstall/conf/Adaptor.xml in a text editor.
2 Edit the following line:
8192

3 Save the file.
4 Restart the server.

Enable and disable Apache and HTTP proxying
When you install Adobe Media Server and choose to install Apache, it is enabled by default. Adobe Media Server
listens on port 80 and proxies HTTP requests to Apache over port 8134.
Setting the parameter to no value disables HTTP proxying:
HTTPPROXY.HOST =

To proxy to a remote server, set the parameter to the remote server you want to use:
HTTPPROXY.HOST = webfarm.example.com:80

Enable Apache and HTTP proxying
1 Open the ams.ini file in a text editor.
2 Add port 80 to the ADAPTOR.HOSTPORT tag.
ADAPTOR.HOSTPORT = :1935, 80

3 To start and stop Apache when Adobe Media Server starts and stops, set the SERVER.HTTPD_ENABLED parameter

to true:
SERVER.HTTPD_ENABLED = true

Last updated 8/21/2014

54

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

4 Do one of the following:

• Open rootinstall/conf/ams.ini and set the value of the HTTPPROXY.HOST variable to 8134:
HTTPPROXY.HOST = :8134

• Open the Adaptor.xml configuration file in a text editor.
If you have multiple adaptors, open the file for the adaptor you want to configure. The default Adaptor.xml file
is located in the rootinstall\conf\_defaultRoot_ folder.
Set the enable attribute of the HttpProxy tag to "true", as in the following:

${HTTPPROXY.HOST}


Save and validate the Adaptor.xml file.
5 Restart the server.

Disable Apache and HTTP proxying
1 Open the ams.ini file in a text editor.
2 Remove port 80 from the ADAPTOR.HOSTPORT tag.
ADAPTOR.HOSTPORT = :1935

3 Do one of the following:

• Open rootinstall/conf/ams.ini and set the value of the HTTPPROXY.HOST variable to no value:
HTTPPROXY.HOST =

• Open the Adaptor.xml configuration file in a text editor.
If you have multiple adaptors, open the file for the adaptor you want to configure. The default Adaptor.xml file
is located in the rootinstall\conf\_defaultRoot_ folder.
Set the enable attribute of the HttpProxy tag to "false", as in the following:

${HTTPPROXY.HOST}


Save and validate the Adaptor.xml file.
4 Restart the server.

Deliver SWF files and HTML files over HTTP
Apache can deliver SWF files, HTML files, JPG files, and many other standard file types over HTTP. Place files that
you want to deliver over HTTP in the correct folders. By default, Apache is configured to use following paths:
Path

Location

Example URL

/

rootinstall/Apache2.2/webroot

http://myAMSServer.com/app.swf

/cgi-bin

rootinstall/Apache2.2/cgi-bin

http://myAMSServer.com/cgi-bin/someScript.pl

These folders are global, not application-specific. Any SWF files and HTML files you want to serve over HTTP must
be in these folders or in application-specific folders. To create aliases for application-specific folders, edit the
httpd.conf file.

Last updated 8/21/2014

55

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Create web directories for applications
To have Apache serve content over HTTP, either use one of the predefined web directories or create a web directory
for that application. To create a web directory for an application, add an alias to the
rootinstall/Apache2.2/conf/httpd.conf file. For example, the following lines create an alias that points to the streams
directory of an application called “hd”:
Alias /hd/ "applications/hd/streams/_definst_/"

Options Indexes MultiViews FollowSymLinks
AllowOverride None
Order allow,deny
Allow from all


Copy media files to the rootinstall/applications/hd/streams/_definst_/ folder to serve them over HTTP. For example,
if a client requests http://ams.example.com/hd/someVideo.flv, Apache serves it the someVideo.flv file from the
rootinstall/applications/hd/streams/_definst_/ folder.
For more information about editing the configuration file, see the Apache documentation at www.apache.org.

Using Apache as a WebDAV host
You can configure the web server to act as a WebDAV host. For information, see the Apache HTTP Server version
2.2.15 documentation at www.apache.org.
The following keywords are reserved words: open, close, send, idle, fcs, ams, crossdomain.xml, fpad. Reserved words
cannot be used for directory names under the webroot directory or for anything else. If you have applications with
these names, use custom aliases to give the HTTP virtual directories slightly different names from the RTMP
applications, such as “open_”.

Running Apache for Windows as a service
To install Apache to run as a service on Windows:
1 Open a Command prompt.
2 Change directories to the rootinstall/Apache2.2/bin folder. For example, at the command prompt, enter the

following:
cd ../../Program Files/Adobe/Adobe Media Server 4/Apache2.2/bin

3 To install Apache to run as a service, enter the following:
httpd.exe -f conf/httpd.conf -n AMSHttpd -k install

Note: To uninstall Apache, enter the following: httpd.exe -n AMSHttpd -k uninstall.
4 To verify that Apache is running, open the Windows Services panel and locate the AMSHttpd service.

To start and stop the Windows services on Windows XP:
1 Right click My Computer and select Manage. The Computer Management dialog box displays.
2 Select Services and Applications.
3 Double-click Services. The list of available services displays.
4 To start a service, select the service from the list and click the Start Service button. To stop a service, select the

service from the list and click the Stop Service button.

Last updated 8/21/2014

56

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Upgrading Apache HTTP server
At some time after installing Adobe Media Server, you might be required to update the included Apache web server.
Most commonly, this would be due to Apache HTTP server security patches or functionality upgrades.
The version of the Apache HTTP server that ships with Flash Media Server 4.5 is 2.2.17. For the latest information
about the Apache web server, see httpd.apache.org.
The recommended approach to upgrading the Apache web server is to install or build the Apache server in a directory
that is separate from the existing server. Then copy the contents of newly-installed directories to the existing server.
In most cases, you do not replace the existing Apache configuration files with the newer versions of these files. This is
because the Apache web server installation for Adobe Media Server is pre-configured with specific modules and
settings. If there are changes to the configuration files, it is usually easier to update the existing files with changes.
Before upgrading:
1 Review any installation notes on apache.org about the differences between the current version and the new version.

For example, look for renamed directives or renamed modules that would require you to merge configuration files.
2 Make sure the currently-installed version of Apache is working correctly:
1 Check the master log file for errors. The master.00.log file should have a line that launches the httpd process and

returns 0; for example:
- C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Media Server 5\Apache2.2\bin\httpd
-f ./conf/httpd.conf -d "C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Media Server 5\Apache2.2"
-n AMSHttpd -k start returned 0:

2 Try playing videos using the “http” protocol.
3 Check the current version of Apache and make a note of it. From a command prompt, go to

AMS_Install_Dir/Apache2.2/bin and issue the following command:
httpd -v

4 Back up following directories:
AMS_Install_Dir/Apache2.2/bin
AMS_Install_Dir/Apache2.2/lib
AMS_Install_Dir/Apache2.2/include
AMS_Install_Dir/Apache2.2/modules
AMS_Install_Dir/Apache2.2/manual
AMS_Install_Dir/Apache2.2/icons

To upgrade:
1 Stop Adobe Media Server.
2 Follow the directions on apache.org to download and run the Apache installer. If you are using Linux, you may be

required to build the Apache server on your system.
3 Copy the following directories from the newly-installed version to the current version that was installed with Adobe

Media Server:
Apache_Install_Dir/bin
Apache_Install_Dir/modules
Apache_Install_Dir/manual
Apache_Install_Dir/icons

Note that the /conf directory, which contains the Apache configuration files, is not included in this list. You should
not replace the existing configuration files with the new configuration files.

Last updated 8/21/2014

57

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

4 Merge the configuration files, if necessary. In most cases, you will not need to merge the files. However, if the newer

version of Apache includes new or renamed modules or directives, you might need to edit the configuration files
to meet the new requirements.
5 Start Adobe Media Server.

After upgrading:
1 Ensure that the newer version of Apache is now available. From a command prompt, go to

AMS_Install_Dir/Apache2.2/bin and issue the following command:
httpd -v

2 Recompile third-party modules, if necessary.
3 Make sure the newly-updated version of Apache is working correctly:
1 Check the master log file for errors or warnings. The master.00.log file should have a line that launches the httpd

process and returns 0; for example:
- C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Media Server 4\Apache2.2\bin\httpd -f
./conf/httpd.conf -d "C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Media Media Server 4\Apache2.2" -n
AMSHttpd -k start returned 0:

2 Try playing videos using the “http” protocol.

Updating the OpenSSL version in the bundled Apache server
On a Window Machine, OpenSSL version 0.9.8r is available with bundled Apache. To update the OpenSSL version,
follow these steps:
1 Access the bin directory of your Apache installation.
2 Copy libeay32.dll, ssleay32.dll, and openssl.exe files from a separate, patched security release of OpenSSL

from the same major release.
3 Replace the existing files with the new files in the bin directory.

On Linux machines, the bundled Apache does not include the OpenSSL libraries libcrypto and libssl. Adobe
recommends the administrators keep the system updated with the appropriate version of OpenSSL binaries.

Troubleshooting Apache HTTP server
In some cases, the Apache server could be at fault for the Adobe Media Server not running properly. This is sometimes
caused by syntax errors in the Apache configuration files.
Check the master.log file in the rootinstall/logs directory. If Apache could not start for some reason, it typically returns
an error code of “1” and writes a line similar to the following in the master.log file:
2010-06-22 15:45:09 4276 (w)2581414 C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Media Server 4
\Apache2.2\bin\httpd -f ./conf/httpd.conf -d "C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Media Server 4
\Apache2.2" -n AMSHttpd -k start returned 1:

The status of (w) or (e) indicates a warning or error. For more information about status codes in the master.log file,
see “Diagnostic logs” on page 106.
If you are running Adobe Media Server as a service, you can check the Windows Event Viewer for errors messages. On
Linux, check syslog’s log file for error messages.

Last updated 8/21/2014

58

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

You can also check the Apache log files for error messages. The default location of the Apache log files is
rootinstall/Apache2.2/logs. The logs are in the default Apache error and combined access log formats. For information
about these log file formats, see Log Files.
To change the location of the log files, edit the rootinstall/Apache2.2/conf/httpd.conf file.

Configure Apache for Adobe HTTP Dynamic Streaming
and Apple HTTP Live Streaming
Configure the HTTP modules
Apache HTTP Server that installs with Adobe Media Server is configured by default for Adobe HTTP Dynamic
Streaming (to Flash Player and AIR) and Apple HTTP Live Streaming (to iOS and Mac OS). The Adobe Media Server
Apache installation includes three custom modules that handle HTTP streaming:

• jithttp_module—just-in-time on-demand Adobe HTTP Dynamic Streaming (HDS).
• f4fhttp_module—live HDS; on-demand HDS packaged offline
• hlshttp_module—live and on-demand Apple HTTP Live Streaming
The configuration of the modules determines the format of the URL that the player requests from the server, the
location of the content, the content fragmentation settings, and other settings. Configure the settings at the server-level
in the Apache httpd.conf file located at rootinstall/Apache2.2/conf/httpd.conf. You can also configure some settings
at the application level, event level, and stream level. For complete details, see Configuring HTTP Dynamic Streaming
and HTTP Live Streaming in the Adobe Media Server Developer’s Guide.
For information about configuring ports for HTTP Streaming, see “Configure ports for HTTP streaming” on page 6.

Logging for HTTP streaming
All HTTP access requests are logged in the Apache access_log file in the \logs directory. The HTTP Origin Module
doesn’t add any logging directives. All access requests are logged through the standard Apache HTTP Server log
module.
All errors are logged in the Apache error_log file in the \logs directory. The following table shows the response codes
that the HTTP Origin Module returns.
Response
code

Error message

Description

200

None

No error occurs, and a response has been returned
successfully.

304

None

The HTTP Origin Module supports "If-Modified-Since" in
the request header and returns 304 if the file has not been
modified."If-Modified-Since" is not support in requests for
manifest files of live events.

400

mod_f4fhttp [400]: Syntax error in
%s

Error occurs while parsing the URI request. The variable %s
is the URI string. For example, the request URI
http://servername/media/sample- is missing a fragment
mod_hlshttp [400]:Syntax error in %s number. For example, in the request
http://example.com/hls-vod/sample.f4vNumX.ts, the ts
fragment name format is not correct.

Last updated 8/21/2014

59

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Response
code

Error message

Description

400

mod_hlshttp [400]: %1 is a invalid
file

Error occurs while reading the information in a file, where
%1 is the URI string. For example, the manifest file is wrong
or the bootstrap is invalid or the .stream file is not valid.

403

mod_f4fhttp [403]: No access to %s

An error occurs when accessing the file. The variable %s is
the file path. For example, the request URI is
http://servername/media/sample.fmf and the module
doesn’t have permission to read the file sample.f4m.

mod_hlshttp[403]: No access to %s
mod_f4fhttp [403]: Internal error %1
(%2) when processing %3
mod_hlshttp[403]: Internal error %1
(%2) when processing %3

An error occurs when the library fails to access a file. The
variable %1 is the error code from the library, %2 is error
description, and %3 is the url string.

Last updated 8/21/2014

60

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Response
code

Error message

404

mod_f4fhttp [404]: %s does not exist An error occurs when the request file is not found. The
variable %s is the file path. For example, the request URI is
mod_hlshttp[404]: %1 does not exist http://servername/media/sample.fmf but the file
mod_f4fhttp [404]: Internal error %1 sample.f4m does not exist.
(%2) when processing %3
mod_hlshttp[404]: Internal error %1
(%2) when processing %3

500

mod_f4fhttp [500]: Unknown
exception when processing %1
mod_hlshttp [500]: Unknown error
when processing %1

Description

Error occurs when the library fails to find a file. The variable
%1 is the error code from the library, %2 is the error
description, and %3 is the url string.
An unknown error occurs when processing a request,
where %1 is the URL string. For example,
http://servername/media/sampleSeg1-Frag1,
sampleSeg1.f4f is not a corrupted file.

An unknown error occurs when processing a request,
where %1 is the URI string. The module fails, where %1 is
the error code, %2 is error description, and %3 is the URI
mod_hlshttp [500]: Internal error %1 string.
(%2) when processing %3
Error occurs while packaging a ts segment, where %1 is the
mod_f4fhttp [500]: Internal error %1
(%2) when processing %3

mod_hlshttp[500]: Packaging error
%1 (%2) when processing %3

error code for diagnostic purposes, %2 is the error
description and %3 is the URI being processed. An example
of an error description is, "Audio format is not supported".
A packaging error indicates that something went wrong
while packaging the stream data into a ts segment. An
internal error indicates that something went wrong while
reading stream data from the recorded f4f fragments. An
internal error is more likely to occur due to a recording
failure than to a play back failure.

503

None

The HTTP Origin Module returns a 503 code so the client
and the proxy servers don’t cache the response.
In a live event, the file can be growing and a fragment could
be missing in one origin server but not missing on another
origin server. The HTTP response header includes an "Xmod_f4fhttp" field to provide more details. The following is
a sample response header:
Date Thu, 04 Mar 2010 06:20:20 GMT Server Apache/2.2.9
(Win32) Content-Length 432 Last-Modified Wed, 27 Jan
2010 11:43:25 GMT Keep-Alive timeout=5, max=100
Connection Keep-Alive Content-Type video/f4f Xmod_f4fhttp 1, error 71
There are two parameters in the X-mod_f4fhttp field
delimited by a comma. The first parameter is a status code
and the second parameter is the error code from the
library.
There are two status codes: 1 - The requested fragment
number is larger than the last fragment in the file (the
corresponding error is 71). 2 - The requested fragment
number is a missing fragment (the corresponding error is
34).

Last updated 8/21/2014

61

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Use an external Apache HTTP Server for HTTP Dynamic Streaming and HTTP
Live Streaming
To use an installation of Apache HTTP Server other than the one that installs with Adobe Media Server, do the
following:
1 Install Adobe Media Server so you can extract the Apache modules.
2 Copy the following files from Adobe Media Server to your Apache modules folder:

• rootinstall/Apache2.2/modules/adbe_dme.dll
• rootinstall/Apache2.2/modules/adbe_license.dll
• rootinstall/Apache2.2/modules/asneu.dll
• rootinstall/Apache2.2/modules/hds.dll
• rootinstall/Apache2.2/modules/libeay32.dll
• rootinstall/Apache2.2/modules/libexpat.dll
• rootinstall/Apache2.2/modules/mod_f4fhttp.so
• rootinstall/Apache2.2/modules/mod_hlshttp.so
• rootinstall/Apache2.2/modules/mod_jithttp.so
3 Edit your httpd.conf file to load the following modules:

• For live Adobe HTTP Dynamic Streaming, add the following:
LoadModule f4fhttp_module modules/mod_f4fhttp.so


HttpStreamingEnabled true
HttpStreamingLiveEventPath "../applications"
HttpStreamingContentPath "../applications"
HttpStreamingF4MMaxAge 2
HttpStreamingBootstrapMaxAge 2
HttpStreamingFragMaxAge -1
HttpStreamingDrmmetaMaxAge 3600
Options -Indexes FollowSymLinks



• For live Apple HTTP Live Streaming, add the following:
LoadModule hlshttp_module modules/mod_hlshttp.so


HLSHttpStreamingEnabled true
HttpStreamingLiveEventPath "../applications"
HttpStreamingContentPath "../applications"
HLSMediaFileDuration 8000
HLSSlidingWindowLength 6
HLSAmsDirPath ".."
HLSM3U8MaxAge 2
HLSTSSegmentMaxAge -1
Options -Indexes FollowSymLinks


• For on-demand Adobe HTTP Dynamic Streaming, packaged in just-in-time, add the following:

Last updated 8/21/2014

62

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

LoadModule jithttp_module modules/mod_jithttp.so


HttpStreamingJITPEnabled true
HttpStreamingContentPath "../webroot/vod"
JitAmsDirPath ".."
Options -Indexes FollowSymLinks



• For on-demand Apple HTTP Live Streaming, add the following:
LoadModule hlshttp_module modules/mod_hlshttp.so


HLSHttpStreamingEnabled true
HLSMediaFileDuration 8000
HttpStreamingContentPath "../webroot/vod"
HLSAmsDirPath ".."
Options -Indexes FollowSymLinks



4 In the directives that you entered in your httpd.conf file, edit the following:

•

HttpStreamingLiveEventPath and HttpStreamingContentPath—set to the Adobe Media Server

applications folder, for example:
C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Media Server 5\applications

•

JitAmsDirPath and HLSAmsDirPath—set to the location of your Adobe Media Server installation, for example:
C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Media Server 5

5 For information about ports, see “Using a third-party web server” on page 76.

Configure HTTP Streaming failover
In a real-world clustered HTTP Streaming scenario, you want your site to offer robust playback, even in the face of
server-side streaming problems. HTTP Streaming failover, new in FMS 4.5.2, lets you control how AMS handles
certain streaming problems.

Overview of HTTP Streaming failover
HTTP Streaming failover features primarily address the issues of liveness and dropout.
The following figure illustrates a simple two-server cluster of packagers with a Reverse Proxy controlling access. The
explanations that follow use this figure as a reference.

Last updated 8/21/2014

63

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Packagers in a two-server cluster

• Liveness is a server-side situation in which a packager advertises a stale bootstrap (that is, a stale view of a live
stream). Although there are other potential scenarios, the following describes one liveness situation:
1 The stream has been running normally for some time on the server side.
2 Packager 2's connection to the encoder fails. The connection between Packager 2 and the proxy continues

running. Suppose that at the time of this failure, the last successfully written fragment on Packager 2 was still
#700 with current media time as X.
3 A short amount of time elapses, in this case, 10 fragment intervals.
4 The server-side now suffers from liveness. Packager 2 is serving stale bootstrap information. Packager 2

indicates that there has been no update in the bootstrap after time X, even though more recent fragments are
available on Packager 1 (that is, the current media time is greater than X.)
5 Playback stalls at the player end.

Last updated 8/21/2014

64

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

• Dropout - is a server-side situation in which a packager has gaps in its bootstrap (that is, gaps in its fragment list).
The following scenario describes a dropout situation:
1 The stream has been running normally for some time on the server side.
2 Packager 2's connection to the encoder fails. The connection between Packager 2 and the proxy continues running.

Suppose that at the time of this failure, the last successfully written fragment on Packager 2 was still #700.
3 A short amount of time elapses, in this case, 10 fragment intervals.
4 Packager 2's encoder connection is restored and remains restored for a long time.
5 The server-side now suffers from dropout. Packager 2's bootstrap is missing entries for #701-710, even though

those fragments are still available on Packager 1.
6 Playback stalls at the player end.

HTTP Streaming failover provides a multi-faceted solution:

• Best-effort fetch
• Server-side configuration
• Control plane management

Enable best-effort fetch
Best-effort fetch enables the OSMF and iOS video players to continue playback as normally as possible in the presence
of short-term liveness and dropout problems on the server-side.
OSMF
The OSMF 2.0 player includes HDS functionality that integrates with server-side configuration and run-time settings.
For more information on OSMF 2.0 client side functionality, see the OSMF documentation on SourceForge.
HLS
FMS 4.5.2 includes server-side settings and functionality that enable best-effort fetch.

Configure HTTP Streaming failover server settings
You configure server settings for HTTP Streaming failover in the httpd.conf and manifest.xml files.
Configure HDS and HLS settings in httpd.conf. For more information on server-side configuration in the httpd.conf
file, see Configure live and on-demand HTTP Streaming at the server level (httpd.conf). Configure the
bestEffortFetchInfo element in the manifest.xml file, as described in Manifest.xml.
Note: Best-effort fetch relies on configuring the back-end reverse-proxy with HTTP 503 failover, meaning that when the
reverse proxy receives a 503 response from a packager, it retries the request with the next packager in the pool. If all
packagers generate a 503, the proxy generates an error that it caches for less than a fragment interval. You can configure
the HTTP error code, as described in Configure live and on-demand HTTP Streaming at the server level (httpd.conf).

Code the control plane application
To implement HTTP Streaming failover, you write a client application that manages the state of events and streams
by using a set of REST-based control plane APIs. Control plane is a router term and in effect, that is what your client
application does through these APIs.

Last updated 8/21/2014

65

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

The basic workflow is as follows:

• Begin repeatedly checking stream status at a set interval. The exact interval depends on your configuration.
• Disable any stream with a bad status code.
• You could also compare the age of the bootstrap file and disable the stream for which the bootstrap is older than
some predetermined interval.
AMS control plane REST interface request path
The AMS control plane REST interface request path differs, depending on whether you are using HDS, HLS with
adaptive bit-rate (ABR), or HLS with a single bit-rate stream:

• HDS: http://server/ctrlplane/application-name/instance-name/event-name.f4m/
• HLS with ABR: http://server/ctrlplane/application-name/instance-name/event-name.m3u8/
• HLS with single bit-rate: http://server/ctrlplane/application-name/instance-name/eventname/stream-name.m3u8/

For example:

• HDS: http://www.example-server.com/ctrlplane/livepkgr/_definst_/liveevent.f4m/
• HLS with ABR: http://www.example-server.com/ctrlplane/livepkgr/_definst_/liveevent.m3u8/
• HLS with single bit-rate: http://www.exampleserver.com/ctrlplane/livepkgr/_definst_/liveevent/livestream.m3u8/

You use HTTP GET or POST, depending on the endpoint and parameters passed.

Query stream status
Description
Returns stream status.
Endpoint
status

Result
If the .disabled file exists in the streams directory for the respective associated stream, the control plane module returns
"disabled" in the status element for the particular stream. This endpoint returns stream age for each stream (multiple
streams in case of MBR) calculated as current time in minutes - last modified time for the bootstrap file.The
up element indicates whether the stream is up. It is set to false if the bootstrap has not been updated in specified
number of seconds (configurable as MaxBootstrapAge). The global up element is set to true if all bootstrap up
elements are true, otherwise it is set to false. The endpoint sets the upper level status to disabled if all streams are
disabled, otherwise it is set to enabled.
The done element indicates whether the stream is finished.
Sample request
[GET] http://www.example-server.com:8134/ctrlplane/livepkgr/_definst_/livestream.f4m/status

Sample response
This is an example response for an MBR stream in which all streams are disabled:

Last updated 8/21/2014

66

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

200 OK



/livepkgr/_definst_/livestream.f4m


disabled


false


false



false


75


disabled


false




false


75


disabled

Last updated 8/21/2014

67

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server



false




false

< age>
75


disabled


false




Disable an event
Description
Disables all streams for an event (works for both HDS and HLS streams). You send this as an HTTP POST request with
no body.
Endpoint
disable

Result
Upon receiving this request, the control plane module creates a .disabled file in all streams directories (multiple
streams directories for an MBR stream) and returns an XML formatted response indicating success or failure for each
stream.
If a client subsequently requests streams for the event, the Apache module (mod_f4fhttp or mod_hlshttp) checks for
the existence of a .disabled file before processing the request. If a .disabled file exists, the module returns a 503
error (configurable in httpd.conf).
Sample request
[POST] http://www.exampleserver.com:8134/ctrlplane/livepkgr/_definst_/livestream.f4m/disable

Last updated 8/21/2014

68

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Sample response



/livepkgr/_definst_/livestream.f4m



1


Command executed successfully.




1


Command executed successfully.




1


Command executed successfully.




Disable a stream
Description
Disables a stream (works for both HDS and HLS streams). You send this as an HTTP POST request with the stream
name specified in the body.
Disable a stream if you detect a liveness problems or to take a faulty packager out of production for some other reason.
As mentioned below, the Apache module returns a 503 error, making the faulty packager a non-entity.
Endpoint
disable

Result
Upon receiving this request, the control plane module creates a .disabled file in the streams directory and returns
an XML formatted response indicating success or failure.
If a client subsequently requests the stream, the Apache module (mod_f4fhttp or mod_hlshttp) checks for the
existence of a .disabled file before processing the request. If a .disabled file exists, the module returns a 503 error
(configurable in httpd.conf).

Last updated 8/21/2014

69

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Sample request
[POST] http://www.exampleserver.com:8134/ctrlplane/livepkgr/_definst_/livestream.f4m/disable

 livestream2


Sample response


/livepkgr/_definst_/livestream.f4m



1


Command executed successfully.




Enable an event
Description
Enables all streams for an event (works for both HDS and HLS streams). You send this as an HTTP POST request with
no body.
Endpoint
enable

Result
Upon receiving this request, the control plane module deletes any existing .disabled files in all streams directories
(multiple streams directories for an MBR stream) and returns an XML formatted response indicating success or failure
for each stream.
If a client subsequently requests streams for the event, the Apache module (mod_f4fhttp or mod_hlshttp) processes
the request.
Sample request
[POST] http://www.example-server.com:8134/ctrlplane/livepkgr/_definst_/livestream.f4m/enable

Last updated 8/21/2014

70

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Sample response



/livepkgr/_definst_/livestream.f4m



1


Command executed successfully.




1


Command executed successfully.




1


Command executed successfully.




Enable a stream
Description
Enables a stream (works for both HDS and HLS streams). You send this as an HTTP POST request with the stream
name specified in the body. This request enables a stream and removes the .disabled file.
Note: Streams are enabled by default.
Endpoint
enable

Result
Upon receiving this request, the control plane module deletes any existing .disabled file in the streams directories
and returns an XML formatted response indicating success or failure.
If a client subsequently requests the stream, the Apache module (mod_f4fhttp or mod_hlshttp) processes the request.
Sample request
[POST] http://www.example-server.com:8134/ctrlplane/livepkgr/_definst_/livestream.f4m/enable

Last updated 8/21/2014

71

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server


livestream2


Sample response



/livepkgr/_definst_/livestream.f4m



1


Command executed successfully.




Mark an event as done
Description
Signals that an event is complete. You send this as an HTTP POST request with no body.
You signal an event as done so that the client is notified when content ends. This achieves two things: the control plane
does not activate failover, and client applications can take appropriate action to signal the end of content to the user.
Endpoint
done

Result
Upon receiving this request, the control plane module creates a .done file in all streams directories (multiple streams
directories for an MBR stream) and returns an XML formatted response indicating success or failure for each stream.
Sample request
[POST] http://www.example-server.com:8134/ctrlplane/livepkgr/_definst_/livestream.f4m/done

Last updated 8/21/2014

72

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Sample response



/livepkgr/_definst_/livestream.f4m



1


Command executed successfully.




1


Command executed successfully.




1


Command executed successfully.




Mark a stream as done
Description
Signals that a stream complete. You send this as an HTTP POST request with the stream name specified in the body.
You signal a stream as done so that the client is notified when content ends. This achieves two things: the control plane
does not activate failover, and client applications can take appropriate action to signal the end of content to the user.
Endpoint
done

Result
Upon receiving this request, the control plane module creates a .done file in the associated streams directory and
returns an XML formatted response indicating success or failure.
Sample request
[POST] http://www.example-server.com:8134/ctrlplane/livepkgr/_definst_/livestream.f4m/done




Last updated 8/21/2014

73

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Sample response



/livepkgr/_definst_/livestream.f4m



1


Command executed successfully.




Mark an event as in-progress
Description
Signals that an event is still in progress. You send this as an HTTP POST request with no body. This request undoes a
/done request.
Endpoint
inProgress
Result
Upon receiving this request, the control plane module deletes any existing .done files in all streams directories
(multiple streams directories for an MBR stream) and returns an XML formatted response indicating success or failure
for each stream.
Sample request
[POST] http://www.exampleserver.com:8134/ctrlplane/livepkgr/_definst_/livestream.f4m/inProgress

Last updated 8/21/2014

74

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Sample response



/livepkgr/_definst_/livestream.f4m



1


Command executed successfully.




1


Command executed successfully.




1


Command executed successfully.




Mark a stream as in-progress
Description
Signals that a stream is still in progress. You send this as an HTTP POST request with the stream name specified in the
body. This request undoes a /done request.
Endpoint
inProgress

Result
Upon receiving this request, the control plane module deletes any existing .done file in the associated streams
directory and returns an XML formatted response indicating success or failure for each stream.
Sample request
[POST] http://www.exampleserver.com:8134/ctrlplane/livepkgr/_definst_/livestream.f4m/inProgress




Last updated 8/21/2014

75

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Sample response



/livepkgr/_definst_/livestream.f4m



1


Command executed successfully.




Using a third-party web server
You can use web servers other than the included version of Apache to serve Adobe Media Server files. Note, however,
that the HTTP Module for HTTPDynamic streaming is currently supported only on Apache web servers. To use a
third-party web server, use the following guidelines:

• Configure Adobe Media Server and the web server so that they do not share a port. (You must decide which server
can use ports 80 and 443, or you must multi-home the servers (by using separate IP addresses/physical NICs).

• If you want Adobe Media Server and your web server to share a port, set up Adobe Media Server as the proxy, put
your web server on an unused port, and change the ams.ini HTTPPROXY_HOST setting to point to that port.

• If you want your web server to serve the Adobe Media Server standard files, either put the files in your web server's
document root, or add the Adobe Media Server document root (rootinstall/webroot) as a virtual directory for your
web server.

• If you want your web server to serve Progressive Download (PD) files from the same location as Adobe Media
Server, add an alias or secondary document root to point to rootinstall/webroot/vod. You can also add a virtual
directory to the vod application that points to your web server's document root.

• If you want your web server to use the exact same settings as the Adobe Media Server pre-installed web server (or
you want to start with that and then customize it), start with the default Apache httpd.conf file that was included
with Adobe Media Server.

• Configure your web server so that it handles the correct MIME types. For example, add the video/x-flv MIME
type for *.flv files. For other MIME types, view the configuration file for the mod_mime_magic Apache module and
the installroot/Apache2.2/conf/mime.types file.

Last updated 8/21/2014

76

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Configuring Differentiated Services (DiffServ)
Flash Media Server 3.5.2

Understanding DiffServ
Use Differentiated Services to handle different types of traffic differently within a network. For example, you could give
RTMP traffic a higher priority than FTP traffic. Or, you could give higher bandwidth and latency to RTMP than to
HTTP. A publisher could choose to give paying customers' streams higher priority. A CDN or other hosting company
could choose to give higher-paying publishers' streams higher priority.Historically, IP contained a feature called Type
of Service (TOS) (see RFC 1349). Each packet's header contained a 3-bit Precedence value and three 1-bit flags. You
could use these bits to prioritize packets in an operating system kernel or router. IPv6 had an experimental (and now
deprecated) feature that provided for a 3-bit Priority, sent in the same header position as TOS precedence. This feature
was replaced by a TCLASS (later renamed TRAFFIC_CLASS) byte that works the same as IP_TOS in
IPv4.Differentiated Services (see RFC 2474) has replaced TOS with a single 6-bit value called DSCP (Differentiated
Services Code Point). In IPv6, the TCLASS octet has been renamed the DS octet, and the other 2 bits are reserved. In
IPv4, the TOS byte no longer has a name, and the other 2 bits are used for ECN (Explicit Congestion Notification).Edge
routers and endpoints can make decisions on a per-flow basis. They mark the packets within the flow so that internal
routers can look at the headers (as with TOS). DiffServ is defined such that edge routers can work entirely based on
service-level agreements (SLAs) between two networks, but internal sources can also mark packets based on the type
of service required for internal traffic.

DiffServ system requirements
Differentiated Services is supported on Linux only.There is no standard way of setting the bits on Windows platform
that would work on all versions of the operating system that Adobe Media Server supports. For more information on
setting Differentiated Services bits on Windows, see the following, http://support.microsoft.com/kb/248611.If you try
to set the bits on Windows, the following message prints to the Authorization log, “Setting Diff Serv bits is not
supported for Windows Platforms”.

DiffServ Internet Protocol versions
The Adobe Media Server Differentiated Services feature supports the IPv4 protocol only. Setting the bits for IPv4
protocol means setting the Differentiated Services field (previously called the Type of Service field) of the IP packet
header. The following is an IPv4 packet header:
0
1
2
3
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|Version| IHL |Type of Service|
Total Length
|
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|
Identification
|Flags|
Fragment Offset
|
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
| Time to Live |
Protocol
|
Header Checksum
|
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|
Source Address
|
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|
Destination Address
|
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|
Options
|
Padding
|
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

Last updated 8/21/2014

77

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

For IPv6, Linux provides no standard way to set the Differentiated Services field (which has been renamed TCLASS
field). If Adobe Media Server has IPv6 enabled and clients connect using an IPv6 address, setting bits on IPv6 clients
does not result in an error. However bits are not set.
Note: Although bits are not set, the server reports in the logs that bits were set successfully.

Unsupported operations
The following operations are not supported:

• Setting bits between an edge server and an origin server.
The connections made between an edge server and an origin server are not “normal” connections. These
connections are identified as “group” or “virtual”. To determine the connection type, call the Administration API
getNetStreamStats() command and look at the client_type property. Trying to set DiffServ bits on these
connections results in the following error message in the core log file, “Setting Diff Serv bits is not supported for
group, service or virtual connections”.

• Setting the ECN bits of a Differentiated Services field.
For example, if you try to set DiffServ bits to 50 with mask 255, the bits set are 48 with the following warning in the
AuthMessage log file, “ECN part of diffserv will not get set for diffserv bits 50 and mask 255”.

Configure DiffServ in the Server.xml file
Use the DiffServ and DiffServMask elements in the Server.xml configuration file to set DiffServ bits for all sockets
that connect to the RTMP listener. Bits are set for all sockets, including tunneling and HTTP proxy sockets. All the
outgoing packets on a socket are set, including the packets from the server that are exchanged during handshaking.
The following example sets DiffServ to 128 which sets the top 3 bits to 4. It sets the DiffServMask to 224 which turns
on the top 3 bits.
1 Open the rootinstall/conf/Server.xml file in a text editor.
2 Edit the Root/Server/ResourceLimits/Protocol/RTMP/DiffServ element:
128

3 Edit the Root/Server/ResourceLimits/Protocol/RTMP/DiffServMask element:
224

4 Save and validate the file.
5 Restart the server.

Note: The server doesn’t log whether the bits are set successfully or not. To verify that the bits are set, use the
getNetStreamStats() Administration API.

Configuring DiffServ in an Authorization plug-in
Use the F_CLIENT_DIFFSERV_BITS field and the F_CLIENT_DIFFSERV_MASK field of the Authorization plug-in
to set Differentiated Services fields.The sample Authorization plug-in shipped with Adobe Media Server has got the
header file updated.The following example sets the bits in the Authorization plug-in:

Last updated 8/21/2014

78

79

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

U8 dscpVal;
if(getU8Field(m_pAev, IAmsAuthEvent::F_CLIENT_DIFFSERV_BITS, dscpVal))
{
dscpVal = 0xFC;
bool res = setU8Field(m_pAev,
IAmsAuthEvent::F_CLIENT_DIFFSERV_BITS,
dscpVal);
}
U8 dscpMask;
dscpMask = 0xF0;
bool res = setU8Field(m_pAev,
IAmsAuthEvent::F_CLIENT_DIFFSERV_MASK,
dscpMask);

The following table shows how to use the mask and bits fields together to get the desired bit settings on the socket:
No. Current value
on socket

DiffServ
bits

DiffServ mask

New
value on
successf
ul set

Comment

1

0

50

252

48

ECN bits were masked.

2

0

100

252

100

3

0

255

255

252

Although ECN bits were not masked,
setting them is not allowed.

4

100

200

128

228

Mask allowed only MSB to be modified.

5

100

200

252

200

Mask allowed DSCP bits to be modified.

Set operations
Set bits in the following Authorization events: E_CONNECT and E_PLAY.You can set bits in the authorize()
method of the Authorization plug-in. You cannot set bits in the notify() method of the Authorization plug-in.

Get operations
Get bits in the following events: E_CONNECT, E_PLAY, and E_STOP.The get result on the
F_CLIENT_DIFFSERV_MASK field always returns the value 0xFC.

Logging
The following table lists error messages for normal connections:
Condition

Message

Log file

Unable to set DSCP bits from the
Authorization plug-in.

While setting diff serv bits for uri %s: Unable
to set DiffServ field.

Core

Unable to query DSCP bits from the socket.

While setting diff serv bits for uri %s: Unable
to get DiffServ field.

Core

Last updated 8/21/2014

80

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

Condition

Message

Log file

Setting DSCP bits for group/service/virtual
connections.

Setting Diff Serv bits is not supported for
group, service or virtual connections.

Core

Attempting to set DSCP values on Windows. Setting Diff Serv bits is not supported for
Windows Platforms.

Auth

Setting DSCP bits for an unknown type of
connection.

Core

Setting Diff Serv bits (B: %d, M: %d) for this
connection (from ip: %S) is not supported.

The following table lists error messages for tunneled connections:
Condition

Message

Log file

Unable to set DSCP bits from the
Authorization plug-in.

While setting diff serv bits for uri %s: Unable
to set DiffServ field.

Edge

Unable to query DSCP bits from the socket.

While setting diff serv bits for uri %s: Unable
to get DiffServ field.

Edge

A socket is being used for multiple sessions
and a session is trying to set the DSCP bits on
a socket that already has DSCP bits set by
another session.

Destination address %ls is being shared
Edge
among multiple net connections. Changing
the DSCP settings from the one for uri %ls to
the uri %ls.

Setting DSCP bits for group/service/virtual
connections.

Setting Diff Serv bits is not supported for
group, service or virtual connections.

Core

Attempting to set DSCP values on Windows. Setting Diff Serv bits is not supported for
Windows Platforms.

Auth

Setting DSCP bits for an unknown type of
connection.

Core

Setting Diff Serv bits (B: %d, M: %d) for this
connection (from ip: %S) is not supported.

The following table lists warning messages:
Condition

Message

Log file

If ECN part of mask is ON for the bits
informed by the Authorization plug-in.

ECN part of diffserv will not get set for
diffserv bits %d and mask %d.

AuthMessage

The following table lists info messages:
Condition

Message

DSCP bits are successfully set by the Authorization plugin.

While setting diff serv bits for uri %s:
Successfully set the diff serv bits (bits: %d,
mask: %d) for addr:port %S:%d and nc uri %s.
Current diff serv value is %d.

DSCP bits informed from the Authorization plug-in are
already set for RTMP.

Requested diff serv bits (bits: %d, mask: %d)
for addr:port %S:%d and nc uri %s already
set. Current diff serv value is %d.

Verifying bits
To verify that bits are set on a socket, call the getNetStreamStats() Administration API in a browser:
http://:/admin/getNetStreamStats?auser=&apswd=&appInst=&streamIds=-1

Last updated 8/21/2014

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Configuring the server

The command results in output similar to following:

status
NetConnection.Call.Success
Mon 25 Jan 2010 08:00:00 PM PST

<_0>
sample

playing recorded
BCAgYLpK
BBAgYLpK
normal
0xfc




The diffserv_bits element updates only when bits are set successfully.

Verifying bits in an RTMP stream
Suppose a client connects to the server and plays a stream. Suppose that the Authorization plug-in sets the bits twice,
first when the E_CONNECT event is received, and then when the E_PLAY event is received.When the stream is
playing, use Wireshark or a similar tool to capture the packets. When streaming stops, stop the capture and filter the
packets so that the source port is 1935 or whichever port is used for RTMP.After you capture at least one packet, right
click and select “Follow TCP stream” to filter all packets for that particular stream. Sort the packet based on time.If you
observe the packets from the beginning of the stream, the DiffServ field is 0 until the NetConnection response is sent
from the server. From the NetConnection response packet until the NetStream.Play.Reset or NetStream.Play.Start
packet, whichever is sent first, the bits are set to what was set in the E_CONNECT event. From this point, the bits are
set to what was set in the E_PLAY event.
Note: When you use the Server.xml file to set bits, even the packets sent from the server as part of handshaking have the
bits set.

Verifying bits in an RTMPT stream
RTMPT connections behave a bit differently than RTMP connections. When creating an RTMPT connection,
multiple sockets can open from the client-side. If you open multiple NetConnections from the same client, these
sockets are probably shared among the NetConnections.In such cases, the DSCP setting for a socket is the DSCP value
from the session that most recently had its DSCP bits set. The following is an example:Time t1: NetConnection nc1
connects and play starts. Its DSCP bits are set to 0x64. The NetConnection uses sockets s1, s2, and s3. All the sockets
have the DSCP bits set to 0x64.t2: NetConnection nc2 connects. The Authorization plug-in doesn’t set any DSCP bits.
The NetConnection uses sockets s2 and s4. Socket s2 has the DSCP value 0x64. Socket s4 has the default value (if
specified in the Server.xml file).t3: NetConnection nc2 starts playing. The Authorization plug-in sets the DSCP bits to
0x88. From now on, sockets s2 and s4 have the DSCP values 0x88, whether they are carrying packets for nc1 or nc2.t4:
NetConnection nc2 play stops. Nothing changes.

Last updated 8/21/2014

81

82

Chapter 3: Using the Administration
Console
Use the Adobe Media Server Administration Console to maintain the server, monitor applications, and manage users.
Application developers can also use the Administration Console to debug applications.

Connecting to the Administration Console
About the Administration Console
The Administration Console is an Adobe Flash Player application (ams_adminConsole.swf) that lets you manage the
server and view information about applications running on the server.
The Administration Console connects to Adobe Media Administration Server, which connects to Adobe Media
Server. To log in to the Administration Console, the Administration Server must be running.
By default, Adobe Media Administration Server in installed on port 1111. To change the port number of the
Administration Server after installation, edit the ams.ini file. Clients cannot access the Administration Server securely
(over RTMPS). As a result, Adobe recommends blocking port 1111 from external requests so that only clients within
your firewall can access the Administration Server.
Note: The Administration Console calls Administration APIs to inspect and manage the server. Use the Adobe Media
Server Administration API Reference to build your own administrative applications.

Connect to the Administration Console
There are two types of administrators: server administrators and virtual host (vhost) administrators. When you log in
to the Administration Console as a virtual host administrator, your session is specific to a virtual host, and you can
only manage applications running on that virtual host. Server administrators have access to all applications running
on the server.
1 To open the Administration Console, do one of the following:

• On Windows, select Start > Programs > Adobe > Adobe Media Server 5.0 > Adobe Media Server
Administration Console.

• On Linux, open the ams_adminConsole.htm and ams_adminConsole.swf files in a browser with Flash Player.
• On Mac® OS, copy the ams_adminConsole.htm and ams_adminConsole.swf files to the Mac. Open the
ams_adminConsole.htm file in a web browser that has Flash Player installed.
If you installed Apache with Adobe Media Server, the ams_adminConsole.swf and ams_adminConsole.htm files
are located in the rootinstall/webroot folder. Otherwise, the ams_adminConsole.swf and ams_adminConsole.htm
files are located in the root installation folder.
2 (Optional) Specify a server name. This name is an alias you can use to connect to a server quickly. The

Administration Console remembers the server address for this server name the next time the console is opened.

Last updated 8/21/2014

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Using the Administration Console

3 In the Server Address box, do one of the following:

• Type localhost if the server and the Administration Console are running on the same computer. If the
Administration Server is installed on a port other than 1111 (the default), you must enter the port number as
well; for example, localhost:1234. Entering localhost connects you to the default virtual host on this computer.

• To connect to a virtual host other than the default virtual host, enter the fully qualified host name (for example,
www.example.com). The host name must be mapped to a valid network IP address. To test this behavior on
Windows, you can edit your local hosts file at windows\system32\drivers\etc\hosts.

• If you are connecting remotely by running the Administration Console on another computer, enter the server’s
name (AdobeMediaServer.myCompany.com) or the IP address and port number (12.35.06.78:1112) of the
Administration Server to which you want to connect. Ensure your computer has permission to connect to the
specified port on the other computer. Also, check that the Administration Server has not been configured to
prohibit connections from the specific domain or IP address you are using.
4 Enter your username and password.

If you are the server administrator who installed the server, enter the administrator user name and password you
entered during installation. Otherwise, enter the username and password you received from the server
administrator.
Note: To reset a password, see “Delete administrator accounts and reset passwords” on page 92
For security reasons, the Administration Console does not save your password between sessions.
To log in to a virtual host that is not on the default adaptor, you must specify the name of the adaptor. For example,
when logging in to a virtual host on the adaptor _secondAdaptor_, the vhost administrator JLee would enter the
following information in the Username box: _secondAdaptor_/JLee.
5 (Optional) Select the Remember My Password option.
6 (Optional) Select the Automatically Connect Me option.
7 (Optional) Click Revert to return the Administration Console to its default settings.

Reverting deletes all saved servers, user names, and passwords from the Administration Console. All custom
resizing within the Administration Console is restored to the original state. (The Revert button, however, does not
affect the server.)
8 Click Login.

You can disconnect at any time by clicking Logoff.
Note: The color of the vertical bar in the upper-right corner (next to the question mark icon) indicates whether the
Administration Console is connected (green) or not connected (red) to a server.
Near the top of every screen of the Administration Console are two icons. Click the folder icon to display links to the
Adobe Media Server website and related resources. Click the question mark icon to display links to Adobe Media
Server Help.
To run the Administration Console from a computer other than the one in which the server is installed, copy
ams_adminConsole.htm and ams_adminConsole.swf to the other computer, or make sure that this file is in the
webroot directory so it can be accessed remotely. In both cases, verify that the Allow and Deny tags in the Users.xml
file allow the connection from the other computer’s IP address.

Change or pause the refresh rate
The information in the Administration Console panels refreshes every 5 seconds by default. You can change the
refresh rate to any time interval between 1 and 60 seconds, or pause refreshing at any time.

Last updated 8/21/2014

83

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Using the Administration Console

Change the refresh rate of the Administration Console
❖ Click the pop-up menu next to Refresh Rate (upper-right corner) and select a new time duration, such as 10
seconds.
Pause refreshing the Administration Console
1 Click the pop-up menu next to Refresh Rate (upper-right corner), scroll down, and select Pause.
2 Click Pause Refresh to continue.

A red border appears around the panels of the Administration Console to show that the refresh feature is paused.
3 To start refreshing information again, click the pop-up menu and select a time duration.

Inspecting applications
View applications
After connecting to a server or virtual host, the Administration Console displays a panel that lists the currently running
application instances. From here, the state of an application can be monitored.

Use the View Applications panel to view, load, or unload application instances.

Note: If you add an application while the Administration service is running and the new application doesn't appear in
the Administration Console, move to another panel and then back to refresh the console.
Manually load an application instance in the Administration Console
1 Follow the steps in “Connect to the Administration Console” on page 82.
2 Enter the name and address of the server or virtual host to which you want to connect.
3 Enter the administrator user name and password.

Last updated 8/21/2014

84

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Using the Administration Console

4 Click View Applications.
5 Click New Instance.
6 Select the application from the pop-up menu. (The application must already be configured on the server.)
7 The Administration Console adds a default instance _definst_, which can be edited. Press Enter to submit the

name and start the application instance. To cancel, press Shift+Escape.
Reload an application instance in the Administration Console
Reload an application instance to reload the server-side scripts for the instance or to disconnect all of its users while
immediately allowing new connections.
1 Follow the steps in “Connect to the Administration Console” on page 82.
2 Click View Applications.
3 Select an application from the list.
4 Click Reload (circular arrow icon to the right of the Performance tab).

View information about an application
1 Follow the steps in “Connect to the Administration Console” on page 82.
2 Click View Applications.
3 Select the application from the list. The following information is listed for the application on the different tabs:

• Log messages generated by the application instance on the server
• A list of clients connected to the application instance
• A list of active shared objects for the application instance
• A list of active streams for the application instance
• Information about the overall state of the selected application instance, such as total uptime or number of users
Sort applications list
1 Follow the steps in “Connect to the Administration Console” on page 82.
2 Click View Applications.
3 In the applications list, do one of the following:

• Click the Name column header to sort the applications list by name.
• Click the Clients column header to sort by client.
End an application instance
When an application instance is ended, all users are disconnected and all instance resources are released.
1 Follow the steps in “Connect to the Administration Console” on page 82.
2 Click View Applications.
3 Select an application from the list.
4 Click Unload (stop icon to the right of the Performance tab)

Last updated 8/21/2014

85

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Using the Administration Console

Viewing log messages for an application
The Administration Console Live Log panel displays log messages and trace() statements from server-side scripts
for the selected application instance. The information in this panel is updated whenever the application instance
generates a log message. (If the console refresh feature is paused, log messages are still received.)

Live Log panel

1 Follow the steps in “Connect to the Administration Console” on page 82.
2 Click View Applications.
3 Click Live Log.
4 Select an application from the list.
5 Type text in the Find text box and click Find Next. Use the Find Previous and Clear Log buttons as necessary.

Viewing active streams
Use the Administration Console Streams panel to view information about streams and to play streams.

Last updated 8/21/2014

86

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Using the Administration Console

Streams panel

1 Follow the steps in “Connect to the Administration Console” on page 82.
2 Click View Applications.
3 Click Streams.
4 Select an application from the list. The Streams panel displays the following information:

• Name: For NetStream streams, the name is the NetStream ID (a server-generated number). For a live stream
being published, the entry displays the live stream name. For a recorded steam, the entry displays the FLV or
MP3 filename; for example, flv:stream2.flv or mp3:sound.mp3. If a client requests the stream2.flv, there will be
two entries: one for flv:stream2.flv (stored) and one for the actual network stream going to the client.

• Type: A string that describes the type of stream, either stored, live, or NetStream.
5 Select a stream to view its properties. The values of the properties are as follows:

• Name: The actual stream name, not streamID.
• Status: States if the stream is publishing, playing live, or playing recorded.
• Client: The client ID playing the stream.
• Time: The time that the client started playing the stream.
Note: If the stream type is available for debugging, the Administration Console displays its properties in the adjoining
panel. If the type is not available for debugging, an error message is displayed.
6 Click Play Stream to start playing the selected stream in a separate window that is the size of the selected stream.

(The Play Stream button appears only if a debug connection is possible. Only named streams can be played.)

Viewing active clients
The Administration Console Clients panel lists detailed information about all clients connected to an application.

Last updated 8/21/2014

87

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Using the Administration Console

Clients panel

1 Follow the steps in “Connect to the Administration Console” on page 82.
2 Click View Applications.
3 Click Clients.
4 Select an application from the list. The following information is displayed:

• Client ID: The internal ID of the client; this represents a server-generated number that Adobe Media Server uses
to identify each client.

• Protocol: The connection protocol that the client uses, such as RTMP.
• Bytes In and Bytes Out: The average bytes per second being sent to and from the server. The Administration
Console calculates this ratio by dividing the total number of bytes received in the most recent 15 seconds by 15.
When the panel first appears, these figures appear as pending because there is only one data point to start with;
figures appear after the panel is open for 15 seconds.

• Connection Time: The date and time the client connected.
• Messages In and Messages Out: The number of messages sent to or from the client. Messages In reflects update
requests sent from clients to the server; Messages Out reflects notification of successful updates sent from the
server to connected clients.

• Drops: The number of messages dropped since the client connected. For live streams, audio, and video,
messages may be dropped; for recorded streams, only video messages are dropped. Command messages are
never dropped.

Viewing active shared objects
The Administration Console Shared Objects panel lists the active shared objects for an application and can be useful
when debugging an application. The information is automatically refreshed every 5 seconds, or click Refresh to refresh
at any time. The Administration Console displays the name, type (persistent or temporary), and connections (number
of users subscribed) of each shared object.

Last updated 8/21/2014

88

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Using the Administration Console

Shared Objects panel

Note: The Administration Console was built using ActionScript 2.0 and cannot understand AMF3 data. Therefore, the
Administration Console cannot display data in remote shared objects in applications built in ActionScript 3.0 unless the
application sets the NetConnection.objectEncoding property to AMF0.
1 Follow the steps in “Connect to the Administration Console” on page 82.
2 Click View Applications.
3 Click Shared Objects.
4 Select an application from the list.
5 To display information about a shared object, click the object. The number of users currently connected to and

using the shared object is displayed, along with the data properties assigned to the shared object.

View performance information
The Administration Console Performance panel shows information about the overall state of the application instance.
The information is automatically refreshed every 5 seconds, or click Refresh to refresh at any time.

Last updated 8/21/2014

89

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Using the Administration Console

Performance panel

1 Follow the steps in “Connect to the Administration Console” on page 82.
2 Click View Applications.
3 Click Performance.
4 Select an application from the list. The following information is displayed:

• Clients: Information about clients connected to this application instance, including the total number of clients
who connected to the application instance since it started, active clients, and the number of users whose
attempts to connect to the application instance were rejected. (To determine why connections may have failed,
look at the Live Log panel under View Applications.)

• Lifespan: The length of time the application instance has been running and the date and time it began to run.
• Messages Per Second: The average number of messages (video frames, audio packets, and command messages)
sent per second.

• Bytes Per Second: The average number of bytes sent per second for this application instance. The
Administration Console calculates this ratio by determining the total number of bytes received in the most
recent 15 seconds and dividing that value by 15. When the panel first appears, these figures appear as pending
because there is only one data point to start with; figures appear after the panel is open for 15 seconds.

• Active Connections: The number of users currently connected to the application instance.
• Bandwidth: The amount of data that the application instance manages, including data sent, data received, and
the combined amount of data traffic.

• CPU and Memory Usage: The percentage of CPU and memory used by Adobe Media Server.
5 Select and deselect checkboxes to customize the information displayed on the graphs. For example, in the

Bandwidth graph, select Total and deselect In and Out to show only the total amount of bandwidth used.

Last updated 8/21/2014

90

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Using the Administration Console

Manage administrators
About administrator roles
Administrators are users who are allowed to log in to the Administration Console. There are two types of
administrators: server administrators and virtual host administrators.
Server administrators can control all virtual hosts and perform server-level tasks, such as restarting or shutting down
the server. Server administrators can access and perform all operations on all tabs.
Virtual host administrators can manage the applications on their virtual host—for example, they can reload or
disconnect applications. Virtual host administrators can access and perform operations on the View Applications tabs.
They cannot manage servers or administrative users.

Add administrators
Use the Administration Console to add server administrators
Note: You must be a server administrator (not a virtual host administrator) to access the Manage Users tab.
1 Log in to the Administration Console as a server administrator.
2 Select the Manage Users tab.
3 Click New User.
4 Enter the user name and password and click Save.

The Administration Console adds the new user and password to the Users.xml file. You do not need to restart either
server.
Edit the Users.xml file to add server administrators
1 Open the rootinstall/conf/Users.xml file.
2 Locate the UserList section.
3 Add a new  section for each server administrator you want to add.

The User name attribute specifies the user name. The Password element specifies the password. The Allow, Deny,
and Order elements specify the hosts from which the administrator can connect to the Administration Console.
The following sample XML adds a user who can connect from any domain:


${SERVER.ADMIN_PASSWORD}


Allow,Deny


S4mpl3P4ss


Allow,Deny



For more information, see the comments in the Users.xml file.

Last updated 8/21/2014

91

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Using the Administration Console

4 Validate the XML and save the Users.xml file.

Add virtual host administrators
1 Open the Users.xml file in the root folder of the virtual host; for example,
rootinstall/conf/_defaultRoot_/www.sampleVhost.com/Users.xml. If the file doesn’t exist, copy the Users.xml file
from the rootinstall/conf folder.
2 Locate the UserList section.
3 Add a new  section for each virtual host administrator you want to add.

The User name attribute specifies the user name. The Password element specifies the password. The Allow, Deny,
and Order elements specify the hosts from which the administrator can connect to the Administration Console.
The following sample XML adds a user who can connect from any domain:


${SERVER.ADMIN_PASSWORD}


Allow,Deny


Ex4mpl3P4ss


Allow,Deny



For more information, see the comments in the Users.xml file.
4 Validate the XML and save the Users.xml file.

Delete administrator accounts and reset passwords
Only server administrators (not virtual host administrators) can perform operations on the Manage Users tab.
Passwords are stored as salted hashes in the rootinstall/conf/Users.xml configuration file.
Delete user account
1 Log in to the Administration Console as a server administrator.
2 Click Manage Users.
3 Select a user.
4 Click Delete This User Account On The Server.
5 Confirm the action.

Reset user password
1 Log in to the Administration Console as a server administrator.
2 Click Manage Users.
3 Select a user.
4 Click Reset The Password For This User.

Last updated 8/21/2014

92

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Using the Administration Console

5 Enter a new password.

Use the command line to reset a user password
1 Open a shell window.
2 Go to the Adobe Media Server installation directory:

(Windows) C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Media Server 5.0
(Linux) /opt/adobe/fms
3 Stop Adobe Media Server and Adobe Media Administration Server. See Start and stop the server.
4 Enter one of the following:

• (Windows) amsadmin -console -user 
• (Linux) ./amsadmin -console -user 
Enter an eight character password.
Note: The password is not exposed because terminal echo is off.
Use the Administration API to reset a user password
❖ Call the changePswd() API.
For more information about using the Administration API, see “Working with the Administration API” on
page 118.

Managing the server
Monitoring server performance
You can review the performance of individual servers or a group of servers using the Administration Console. The
servers are arranged in a tree structure.
A series of tabs is displayed along the top of the Manage Servers panel. From here, you can perform the following
actions:

• Review the performance statistics for the computer where the applications are running.
• Review information about connections to the server.
• Review information about the applications located on the server or virtual hosts.
• Review server licenses and, if necessary, add serial keys.
• Review the access log and server log.
The Servers panel occupies the left side of the screen in this section of the Administration Console. The panel lists the
servers and virtual hosts that you can access and manage.

Last updated 8/21/2014

93

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Using the Administration Console

Manage Servers panel

Use the small buttons at the top and bottom of the panel to perform the following tasks:

• Add a new server to the list.
• Edit server login information (user name and password) and select options such as remembering the password and
automatically connecting when logging in to the server.

• Delete a server from the list.
• Connect to the selected server.
• Ping the server to verify that it is running.
• Restart the server or a virtual host.
• Run garbage collection to clear unused server resources, such as streams and application instances, from memory.
(Automatic garbage collection intervals can be set in the Server.xml and VHost.xml configuration files.)

• Stop a server or virtual host.

Viewing server details
The Administration Console Details panel displays live information for the server.
1 Follow the steps in “Connect to the Administration Console” on page 82.
2 Click Manage Servers.
3 Click Details.
4 Select a server from the list. The following information is displayed:

• Total number of current clients
• Life span of the server

Last updated 8/21/2014

94

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Using the Administration Console

• Graphical displays of active connections, bandwidth resources consumed, and CPU and memory resources
consumed

Viewing connection details
The Administration Console Connections panel lists all client connections to the selected server.
1 Follow the steps in “Connect to the Administration Console” on page 82.
2 Click Manage Servers.
3 Click Connections.
4 Select a server from the list. The following information is displayed for each client accessing the server or virtual host:

• Server name
• If connection has been made
• Number of connections
• Number of disconnections
• Number of bytes in and out
• Number of messages dropped

Viewing application details
The Administration Console Applications panel displays detailed information for all the applications running on the
selected server or virtual host.
1 Follow the steps in “Connect to the Administration Console” on page 82.
2 Click Manage Servers.
3 Click Applications.
4 Select a server from the list. The name of each application, along with the following information, is displayed:

• Server name
• Application name
• Number of instances of the application that have been loaded on and unloaded from the server
• Number of users that are connected
• Number of users that have connected and disconnected
• Number of instances currently active
• Number of instances that have been unloaded from the server
• Total number of connections that have been accepted or rejected for each application

Viewing license files
The Administration Console License panel is where you add serial keys. The panel also displays detailed information
for all serial keys authorizing you to run Adobe Media Server on the selected server. The lower frame displays
information about custom licenses.
1 Follow the steps in “Connect to the Administration Console” on page 82.
2 Click Manage Servers.

Last updated 8/21/2014

95

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Using the Administration Console

3 Click License.
4 Select a server from the list. For each license, the following information is displayed:

• The individual serial key number
• Authorized peak number of client connections
• Bandwidth cap
• Whether the license is valid (true) or not (false)
Note: Your organization may have more than one license, so note the capacity totals listed near the bottom of the
Administration Console.

Add a serial key
Add serial keys in the Administration Console License panel.
1 Follow the steps in “Connect to the Administration Console” on page 82.
2 Click Manage Servers.
3 Click License.
4 Enter the serial key number in the text boxes at the bottom of the Administration Console.
5 Click Add Serial Key.
6 Restart the server.

Note: Serial numbers that are added manually (that is, added by editing configuration files directly) to either ams.ini or
the  tag of the Server.xml file cannot be removed using the Administration Console. Only serial numbers
that are added using the Administration Console can be deleted using the Administration Console.

View the access log file
The Administration Console Server Log panel displays messages that are written to the access log.
1 Follow the steps in “Connect to the Administration Console” on page 82.
2 Click Manage Servers.
3 Click Server Log.
4 Select a server from the list.
5 To locate a specific string, type it in the Find text box and click Find Next. Use the Find Previous and Clear Log

buttons as necessary.

Last updated 8/21/2014

96

97

Chapter 4: Monitoring and Managing Log
Files
Adobe Media Server has a variety of log files to help you manage and troubleshoot the server. The log files track server
activity, such as who is accessing the server, how users are working with applications, and general diagnostics. Logs are
in W3C format. Administrators can use standard parsing tools to parse the log files.

Working with log files
About log files
The server maintains several different types of logs. The server outputs statistics about client connections and stream
activity to access logs. The server also maintains diagnostic logs and application logs for application activities.
access.XX.log Tracks information about users accessing the server.
application.XX.log Tracks information about activities in application instances.
diagnostic logs Track information about server operations.

Note: In Adobe Flash Player 9 Update 3, Flash Player no longer notifies the server about pause events.

Configuration files for logging
Use the Server.xml and Logger.xml configuration files to configure logging. The Server.xml file contains a Logging
section that controls logging behavior for the entire server. The Logging section includes an Enable tag that
determines whether the server logs events. The Logging section also contains a Scope tag that determines whether the
server writes separate log files for each virtual host or one file for the entire server. The location of each log file is
determined by the Directory and FileName tags in the Logger.xml files.
If the Scope tag is set to server, the Logger.xml file in the rootinstall/conf folder determines the logging configuration
for the whole server.
If the Scope tag is set to vhost, you can place Logger.xml files in virtual host root folders to control the behavior of
each virtual host. If the Scope tag is set to vhost and a virtual host Logger.xml file doesn’t exist, the root Logger.xml
file controls the logging behavior. If the Scope tag is set to server, virtual host Logger.xml files are ignored.
For more information, see comments in the Server.xml and Logger.xml files installed in the rootinstall/conf directory.

Working with web server log files
Adobe Media Server installs with the Apache HTTP Server.
The default location of the ApachAdobe Mediae log files is RootInstall/Apache2.2/logs. The logs are in the default
Apache error and combined access log formats. To change the location of the log files, edit the
RootInstall/Apache2.2/conf/httpd.conf file.
The Apache logs are named access_log and error_log. Adobe Media Server handles log rotation for the Apache logs.
For more information about Apache log files, see the Apache documentation at www.apache.org.

Last updated 8/21/2014

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Monitoring and Managing Log Files

Rotating and backing up log files
Log files grow larger over time, but there are methods for managing log file size.
One option is to rotate log files, moving or deleting the oldest files. Use the rotation element in the Logger.xml file
to specify a rotation schedule for log files. Two types of rotation schedules can be established. The first option is to set
a daily rotation at a certain time. For example, setting daily at 00:00 rotates files every 24 hours at midnight.
Alternatively, set a rotation that occurs when the log exceeds a specified length. Name, maximum file size in kilobytes,
and maximum number of log files to keep can also be customized using the rotation element. For an example, see
the Logger.xml file installed in the /conf directory.
Note: Log file rotation cannot be disabled. However, you can set values in the Logger.xml configuration files that
effectively turn off rotation. Choose a large value for the MaxSize tag. Set the Schedule type to "duration" and choose
a long maximum duration. For more information about the Logger.xml configuration files, see “Configuration files for
logging” on page 97.
You can write an operating system script to delete or back up the log regularly. For important log files, move the log
directory to a backup location. You can move the current active file; the server creates a new file on the next log event.

Access logs
Reading access logs
The access log records information about requests by Flash Player and Adobe Media Server application instances.
Using these logs, you can find out about various events, such as when a user connected to the server, how much total
bandwidth was consumed during the session, and which streams were accessed by the connection (and similar
resource information). You can use the status codes associated with specific events to troubleshoot event failures. You
can also use this information to determine which applications are used most.
The default access log is access.xx.log, which is located in the RootInstall/logs directory. The default configuration
creates a single access log per server. You can also configure the server to create a separate file per virtual host. When
logging is configured on a per-virtual-host basis, all logs for a particular virtual host are found in a subdirectory within
the logs directory. The name of the subdirectory matches the virtual host name. Substitution strings can be found in
the [] brackets, with YYYY, MM, DD, and NN representing year, month, date, and version, respectively. You can use
the substitution string to customize the filename of the access log. (For example, access.[YYYYMMDDNN].log could
be named access.2007052401.log.) To configure the server to create separate log files for each virtual host, set the value
of the Scope tag in the Server.xml file to “vhost.” (This is a separate scope tag just for logging.)
Adobe Media Server defines event categories, and for each category, it defines events that can be recorded. Logging
can be customized to record all events or only specific events by editing the  and  elements in the
Logger.xml file.

Logging events periodically for live and 24/7 applications
Many companies use statistics from the access log to bill customers. If your programming includes live events or 24/7
programming, the events you need to calculate billing might not occur within a billing cycle. To solve this problem,
you can enable checkpoint events. Checkpoint events log bytes periodically from the start to the end of an event. You
can configure how often the server logs checkpoint events. The following are available as checkpoint events: connectcontinue, play-continue, and publish-continue. For information about configuring checkpoint events, see
“Enable checkpoint logging events” on page 45.

Last updated 8/21/2014

98

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Monitoring and Managing Log Files

Access events defined in access logs
Event

Category

Description

connect-pending

session

Client connects to the server, waiting for the client to be authenticated.

connect

session

Client connects to the server.

disconnect

session

Client disconnects.

connect-continue

session

A checkpoint event that provides updates of a corresponding connect event at
intervals. Use the c-client-id field to find the corresponding connect event.

publish

stream

Client publishes a live stream.

unpublish

stream

Client unpublishes a live stream.

publish-continue

stream

A checkpoint event that provides updates of a corresponding publish event at
intervals. Use the x-sid field (stream id) and the c-client-id field to find the
corresponding publish event.

play

stream

Client plays a stream.

play-continue

stream

A checkpoint event that provides updates of a corresponding play event at intervals.
Use the x-sid field (stream id) with the c-client-id field to find the corresponding play
event.

pause

stream

Client pauses stream.

unpause

stream

Client resumes playing stream.

client-pause

stream

Client pauses a stream but the server still sends data to the client so the player has
enough data to play when the client unpauses. This type of pause is called a “smart
pause”. Smart pause requires Flash Player 9,0,115,0 and Adobe Media Server 3 and
later. The stream position is logged in the “c-spos” field.

client-unpause

stream

Client smart unpauses a stream. The stream position is logged in the “c-spos” field.

seek

stream

Client seeks in a stream and NetStream.inBufferSeek=false. Also fires when
NetStream.inBufferSeek=true and the client seeks outside the buffer.

client-seek

stream

The seek position when the client seeks within the buffer when
NetStream.inBufferSeek=true (called a “smart seek”). If a client seeks outside
the buffer, the client sends a “seek” event. The stream position is logged in the “cspos” field.

stop

stream

Client stops playing or publishing a stream.

record

stream

Client begins recording a stream.

recordstop

stream

Client stops recording a stream.

server-start

sever

The server has started.

server-stop

server

The server has stopped.

vhost-start

server

A virtual host has started.

vhost-stop

server

A virtual host has stopped.

registry.start

registry

The registry has started.

registry.stop

registry

The registry has stopped.

service.start

registry

A service has started.

service.stop

registry

A service has stopped.

app-start

application

An application instance has started.

Last updated 8/21/2014

99

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Monitoring and Managing Log Files

Event

Category

Description

app-stop

application

An application instance has stopped.

service.request

registry

A service request has been made.

debug-pending

session

A debug request is pending.

debug-approved

session

A debug request has been approved.

filenametransform

authorization

A virtual stream path has been mapped to a physical location. This event occurs if an
Authorization plug-in is present to handle the event.

loadsegment

stream

A stream segment has loaded.

action

application

An action has occurred.

codec

stream

A codec has changed.

Authconnect

authorization

Client connects to server. This event occurs if an Authorization plug-in is present to
handle the event.

Authplay

authorization

Client plays a stream. This event occurs if an Authorization plug-in is present to
handle the event.

Authpublish

authorization

Client publishes a live stream. This event occurs if an Authorization plug-in is present
to handle the event.

Authseek

authorization

Client jumps to a new location within a recorded stream. This event occurs if an
Authorization plug-in is present to handle the event.

AuthRecord

authorization

Client begins recording a stream. This event occurs if an Authorization plug-in is
present to handle the event.

start-transmit

stream

The server received a “startTransmit” command. This command asks the server to
transmit more data because the buffer is running low.

stop-transmit

stream

The server received a “stopTransmit” command. This command asks the server to
suspend transmission until the client sends a “startTransmit” event because there is
enough data in the buffer.

Fields in access logs
Note: When the data for this field contains a space or delimiter, the data is wrapped in double quotation marks. The
double quotation marks surrounding the data are not part of the data, but are present for better parsing of the data. This
applies to the tz, x-ctx, x-adaptor, x-vhost, s-uri, c-referrer, c-user-agent, cs-bytes, sc-bytes, and xsname fields.
The following formats apply to the fields in the table below:
For date: YYYY-MM-DD
For time: hh:mm:ss
For time zone: string such as “UTC,” “Pacific Daylight Time,” or “Pacific Standard Time”
Field

Description

x-event

Type of event.

x-category

Event category.

date

Date of the event.

time

Time the event occurred.

Last updated 8/21/2014

100

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Monitoring and Managing Log Files

Field

Description

tz

Time zone information.

x-ctx

Event-dependent context information.

s-ip

IP address or addresses of the server.

x-pid

Server process ID.

x-cpu-load

CPU load.

x-mem-load

Memory usage (as reported by the getServerStats() method).

x-adaptor

Adaptor name.

x-vhost

Virtual host name.

x-app

Application names.

x-appinst

Application instance name.

x-duration

Duration of a stream or session event. For a stream, this value is the number of seconds the stream has
played. For a session, this value is the number of seconds the client has been connected.

x-status

For a complete description of the x-status codes and descriptions, see “Event status codes in access logs”
on page 103.

c-ip

Client IP address.

c-proto

Connection protocol.

c-proto-ver

Connection protocol version.

s-uri

URI of the Adobe Media Server application.

cs-uri-stem

The stem portion of the s-uri field.

cs-uri-query

The query portion of the s-uri field.

c-referrer

URI of the referrer.

c-user-agent

User agent.

c-client-id

Client ID.

cs-bytes

This field shows the number of bytes transferred from the client to the server.
This information can be used to bill customers per session. To calculate the bandwidth usage per session,
subtract cs-bytes in the “connect” event from cs-bytes in the “disconnect” event.

sc-bytes

This field shows the number of bytes transferred from the server to the client.
This information can be used to bill customers per session. To calculate the bandwidth usage per session,
subtract sc-bytes in the “connect” event by sc-bytes in the “disconnect” event

c-connect-type

Type of connection received by the server:
Normal: Connection from a client, such as Flash Player
Group: Connection between an edge and an origin server
Virtual: Client connection that goes through an edge server, using the group connection between the
servers for transmission

x-sname

Stream name.

x-sname-query

Query portion of the stream URI specified in the call to play or publish.

x-suri-query

Same as x-sname-query.

Last updated 8/21/2014

101

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Monitoring and Managing Log Files

Field

Description

x-suri-stem

This is a composite field: cs-uri-stem + x-sname + x-file-ext.

x-suri

This is a composite field: cs-uri-stem + x-sname + x-file-ext + x-sname-query.

x-file-name

Full path of the file representing the x-sname stream.

x-file-ext

Stream type (FLV, MP3, or MP4).

x-file-size

Stream size, in bytes.

x-file-length

Stream length, in seconds.

x-spos

Stream position, in milliseconds.

cs-stream-bytes

This field shows the number of bytes transferred from the client to the server per stream.
To calculate the bandwidth usage per stream, subtract cs-stream-bytes in the “publish” event from csstream-bytes in the “unpublish” event.

sc-stream-bytes

This field shows the number of bytes transferred from the server to the client per stream. This value can
be less than sc-bytes which is the total number of bytes transferred from the server to the client. When
possible, use sc-bytes for billing.
To calculate the bandwidth usage per stream, subtract sc-stream-bytes in the “play” event from scstream-bytes in the “stop” event.
The value of sc-stream-bytes can be greater than x-file-size after streaming files not encoded in FLV
format, such as MP3 files.
Note: The value of sc-stream-bytes is not necessarily the same as the value of the QoS ByteCount property.

x-service-name

Name of the service providing the connection (only applicable to certain connection types).

x-sc-qos-bytes

Number of bytes sent to the client for quality of service.

x-comment

Comments.

x-sid

The ID of a stream. This ID is unique for the client session but not across sessions.

x-trans-sname

The name of the stream that the server transitions from (the original stream).

x-trans-sname-query

The query stream portion of the stream name for the stream that the server transitions from.

x-trans-file-ext

The file extension portion of the stream name for the stream that the server transitions from.

x-plugin

Name of the plug-in. This field is only available in authorization (auth-) events.

x-page-url

The URL of the web page in which the client SWF file is embedded.

x-smax-rec-size

The maximum file size of a recorded stream.

x-smax-rec-duration

The maximum duration of a recorded stream.

x-trans-mode

The transition mode sent by the client in the NetStream.play2() call.

x-soffset

When a stream is reconnected, the offset value indicates where to resume streaming.

c-spos

The client stream position when a “client-pause” or “client-seek” event is logged.

c-proto-ver

The RTMPE version. For all other types of RTMP, this field is empty.

x-eid

An event ID received by Authorization plug-in. This event is visible only in the auth.log file. This field is
empty in the access.log file.

Last updated 8/21/2014

102

103

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Monitoring and Managing Log Files

Field

Description

x-codec-type

Codec type of the frame retrieved in the Authorization plug-in’s E_CODEC event. This event is visible only
in the auth.log file. This field is empty in the access.log file.

x-codec-value

Codec value of the “x-codec-type” retrieved in the Authorization plug-in’s E_CODEC_CHANGE event. This
event is visible only in the auth.log file. This field is empty in the access.log file.

x-forwarded-for

A string inserted by an HTTP proxy that usually contains the IP address of the originating client. This string
can contain several IP address or other values. Adobe Media Server copies the string and reports it
unchanged. For more information, see en.wikipedia.org/wiki/X-Forwarded-For.

Event status codes in access logs
The Event status codes are based on HTTP response codes.
Field

Symbol

Status Code

Description

connect pending

status_continue

100

Waiting for the application to authenticate.

disconnect

status_admin_command

102

Client disconnected due to admin command.

disconnect

status_shutdown

103

Client disconnected due to server shutdown (or
application unloaded).

connect, publish, unpublish, play, status_OK
record, record stop, stop

200

Successful.

play, stop

status_transition

210

A transition between streams has occurred.

connect

status_unavailable

302

Application currently unavailable.

connect, publish, play

status_bad_request

400

Bad request; invalid parameter or client
connected to server using an unknown
protocol.

connect, play, publish

status_unauthorized

401

Connection rejected by application script or
access denied by application.

connect

status_forbidden

403

Connection rejected by Authorization plug-in
or connection rejected due to invalid URI.

connect, play

object_not_found

404

Application or stream not found.

play

client_disconnect

408

Stream stopped because client disconnected.

connect, publish

status_conflict

409

Resource limit exceeded or stream is already
being published. Can also mean that a change
has been made by the Authorization plug-in.

connect

status_lic_limit_exceeded

413

License limit exceeded.

play, publish

unsupported_type

415

Unsupported media type.

disconnect

data_exceeded

416

Message queue too large; disconnect the client.

connect

chunkstream_error

417

Unable to process unknown data type.

disconnect

cannot_broadcast

418

Client does not have privilege to broadcast.

disconnect

cannot_screenshare

419

License to receive screen sharing video failed.

disconnect

remote_link_closed

420

Close downstream connection.

Last updated 8/21/2014

104

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Monitoring and Managing Log Files

Field

Symbol

Status Code

Description

connect

process_msg_failed

422

Unable to process message received when
client connection was in pending or closed
state.

disconnect

process_msg_exception

423

Error handling message.

disconnect

process_remote_msg_failed

424

Expected response not provided when
command was issued.

disconnect

process_admin_msg_failed

425

Expected response not provided when issued
an admin command.

disconnect

process_rtmp_S2S_msg_failed

426

Expected response not provided when
command issued.

disconnect

write_error

427

Client is not connected or client terminated;
unable to write data.

disconnect

invalid_session

428

Client connection invalid; closed due to
inactive or idle status.

disconnect

gc_client

429

Unable to obtain ping response or client states
not connected.

disconnect

remote_onstop

430

Upstream connection closed.

disconnect

remote_on_client_disconnect

431

Upstream connection closed because the last
client disconnected.

disconnect

gc_idle_client

432

Adobe Media Server autoclose feature
automatically closed the connection.

disconnect

swf_hash_fail

433

SWF verification failure.

disconnect

swf_hash_timeout

434

SWF verification timeout.

disconnect

encoding_mismatch_error

435

Client disconnected due to incompatibility with
object encoding.

disconnect

invalid_client

437

Client connects and fails to perform the
standard RTMP handshaking.

play

invalid_transition

438

Client attempted to play a non-existent file
during dynamic streaming.

disconnect

swf_hash_wrong_version

439

This version of SWF Verification version is not
allowed.

stop

live_stream_destroyed

440

A call to Stream.destroy() destroyed an
instance of the server-side Stream class.
Publishers are disconnected and recordings are
stopped.

disconnect, play

server_internal_error

500

Server internal error.

connect

bad_gateway

502

Bad gateway.

connect

service_unavailable

503

Service unavailable; for instance, too many
connections pending for authorization by
access module.

disconnect

js_disconnect

600

Application disconnect.

disconnect

js_close_previous_client

601

Network connection was closed or reused.

Last updated 8/21/2014

105

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Monitoring and Managing Log Files

Field

Symbol

Status Code

Description

disconnect

js_exception

602

An unknown exception is thrown from the JS
engine.

disconnect

js_chunkstream_error

603

Bad application data.

disconnect

js_debug_forbidden

604

Application does not allow debug connections.

play

js_gc_object

605

~fcstreamjshook() clean up.

Application logs
Application log file
The application log records information about activities in application instances. This log is used primarily for
debugging (logging uncommon events that occur in an application instance).
The default application log is application.xx.log, located in the subdirectory within the Adobe Media Server logs
directory. Adobe Media Server is configured, by default, to create one application log per application instance. The
application folder is located in the matching virtual host directory. The “xx” in the filename is a two-digit number
representing the history of the application log. The most recent logs can be found in application.00.log.

Fields in application logs
Field

Event(s)

Description

date

All

Date of the event.

time

All

Time of the event.

x-pid

All

Server process ID.

x-status

All

Status code: The code is a 10-character string that represents the severity, category, and
message ID.
The first three characters represent severity, as follows:
(w) = warning
(e) = error
(i) = information
(d) = debug
(s) = trace from server-side script
(_) = unknown
The next three characters represent the category. All categories are listed in “Status
categories in diagnostic logs” on page 106.
The last four characters represent message ID. All message IDs are listed in “Diagnostic
logs” on page 106.

x-ctx

All

Event-dependent context information.

Last updated 8/21/2014

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Monitoring and Managing Log Files

Diagnostic logs
Diagnostic log file
The diagnostic log records information about Adobe Media Server operations (this is in addition to the information
logged by the operating system). This log is used primarily for debugging (logging uncommon events that occur in
Adobe Media Server processes).
The default diagnostic logs are master.xx.log, edge.xx.log, core.xx.log, admin.xx.log, and httpcache.xx.log. All the
diagnostic logs are located in the Adobe Media Server logs directory. Adobe Media Server is configured, by default, to
create a diagnostic log for each type of process. The “xx” in the filename is a two-digit number representing the version
of the log.
For a list of messages that appear in the diagnostic log files, see “Diagnostic logs” on page 106.

Fields in diagnostic logs
Field

Event(s)

Description

date

All

Date on which the event occurred.

time

All

Time at which event occurred.

x-pid

All

Server process ID.

x-status

All

Status code: The code is a 10-character string that represents the severity, category, and
message ID.
The first three characters represent severity, as follows:
(w) = warning
(e) = error
(i) = information
(d) = debug
(s) = trace from server-side script
(_) = unknown
The next three characters represent category. All categories are listed in “Status categories
in diagnostic logs” on page 106.
The last four characters represent the message ID.

x-stx

All

Event-dependent context information.

Status categories in diagnostic logs
Category

Description

257

TCService

258

TCServer

259

Presence

260

Storage

261

Stream

Last updated 8/21/2014

106

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Monitoring and Managing Log Files

Category

Description

262

SMTP

263

Adaptor

264

JavaScript

265

TCApplication

266

TCConnector

267

Admin

268

SharedObject

269

Configuration

270

VirtualHost

271

SSL

Last updated 8/21/2014

107

108

Chapter 5: Administering the server
Perform regular administrative tasks to keep the server running smoothly.

Start and stop the server
Start and stop the server on Windows
Use one of the following methods to shut down or restart the server.
Start the server from the Start menu
❖ Do one of the following:

• Choose Start > All Programs > Adobe > Adobe Media Server 5 > Start Adobe Media Server 5
• Choose Start > All Programs > Adobe > Adobe Media Server 5 > Start Adobe Media Administration Server 5
Stop the server from the Start menu
❖ Do one of the following:

• Choose Start > All Programs > Adobe > Adobe Media Server 5 > Stop Adobe Media Administration Server 5
• Choose Start > All Programs > Adobe > Adobe Media Server 5 > Stop Adobe Media Server 5
Start, stop, or restart the server from the Services window
1 Choose Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.
2 Do one of the following:

• Select Adobe Media Server from the Services list and click Stop, Start, or Restart.
• Select Adobe Media Administration Server from the Services list and click Stop, Start, or Restart.

Start and stop the server on Linux
Start, stop, or restart Adobe Media Server using amsmgr
1 Log in as a root user.
2 Change to the directory where the server is installed.
3 Open a shell window and type one of the following:

•

./amsmgr server start

•

./amsmgr server stop

•

./amsmgr server restart

Start, stop, or restart the Administration Server using amsmgr
1 Log in as a root user.

Last updated 8/21/2014

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Administering the server

2 Change to the directory where the server is installed.
3 Open a shell window and type one of the following:

•

./amsmgr adminserver start

•

./amsmgr adminserver stop

•

./amsmgr adminserver restart

Start, stop, or restart Adobe Media Server using the command line
1 * cd /.
2 Enter ./server [start | stop | restart]

Start, stop, or restart the Administration Server using the command line
1 * cd /.
2 Enter ./adminserver [start | stop | restart]

For more information about using amsmgr, see “Managing the server on Linux” on page 115.

Checking server status
View server events in the Windows Event Viewer
The Windows Event Viewer can be used for tracking Adobe Media Server activity and debugging server applications.
The Event Viewer displays a list of events that the server generates. (The following steps are accurate if you are working
directly on the server. To view the events from another Windows machine, use Event Viewer to open a remote
connection to the server.)
1 From the Windows Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Event Viewer.
2 Select the Application panel.
3 Double-click an event generated by Adobe Media Server to view details.

Check server health
AMSCheck is a command line utility program that can be used to diagnose and determine server status. The tool is
available for both Windows and Linux using different executable files. As a command line tool, AMSCheck is
completely scriptable using the language of your choice, such as Cscript, bash, C shell, or Python. AMSCheck provides
information about whether the server is running or not, what the response time is, and which amscore processes are
not responding. A small video file for testing is included. The Users.xml file must be configured to accept a connection
from this tool (this configuration is required to use --allapps and its dependent commands).
When the tool connects to Adobe Media Server, it does the following:

• Checks the connection to any instance of an application
• Checks all active instances of the server by connecting to those applications
• Can publish and play a stream
• Can play the available server-side stream for an application

Last updated 8/21/2014

109

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Administering the server

Note: Currently, AMSCheck only supports RTMP connections and does not check for shared objects.
AMSCheck commands and options
Option

Description

--host 

Required; tells the program where to connect the server. Example: --host localhost

--port 

Port number is optional. The default value is 1935. Example: --port 1935

--app 

Allows the program to connect to an application. Administrator must specify the application.
Example: --app app1/inst1

--allapps

Queries the Administration Server for active instances and makes a connection to each active
instance. In this case, the administrator must use the --auser, --apswd, and -ahostport options in order to log in to the Administration Server. The administrator must
configure Users.xml to accept connections from this program. This command can take time
to finish; verify that the timeout value is adequate.

--help

Displays Help for using AMSCheck.

--logfile 

Allows the program to output a response to a file. If this option is not specified, a result
cannot be provided. Example: --logfile output.log

--play  [start [duration]]

Instructs the program to play video files. Options are start and duration.
Values for start and duration must be in positive numbers or 0 and represent the number
of seconds. The default value of start is any, which plays the file from the beginning. The
default value of duration is 1 second. You can specify all to play the entire file. You cannot
give the play and publish commands at the same time.
Example: --play foo 10 5

--publish  
[record|append]

Publishes files to the server. This command must be used along with --pubfile.
The duration parameter is required; only a positive number, zero, or all is allowed.
Both record and append are optional. If neither is specified, the default behavior is to
record. If the file already exists and record is used, the existing file is overwritten. After the file
is published, it is automatically played to verify the success of the publish operation.
Example: --publish foo -1

--pubfile 

Specifies a filename. This command must be used with --publish. Specify the name of the
input video file residing on the client side, the name of the output file to be created on server
side, and the duration.
Example: --pubfile input.flv --publish output 10

--parallel []

Allows the program to play multiple applications at the same time. This command is used
with --allapps. If there is more than one application, tests are run on each application
serially (connect to the first application, run test, connect to the second application, run test,
and so on). Running parallel without specifying max tests every application in parallel.
However, if there is a large number of applications, running all of them in parallel may not be
desirable. Indicate the maximum number of applications that can be run in parallel by
specifying a value for max. For example, to run 10 tests in parallel, use the following:
--parallel 10

--stagger 

Inserts a pause between tests. This command is used along with --parallel. The value of
 is in seconds, and the default value is 1 second. If you specify a very long stagger time
(longer than the duration of the test), then you are effectively running in serial mode.
Example: --stagger 2

--query <" ">

Allows you to input your own string for special purposes, such as authentication. Example:
rtmp://host/app/inst?foo=abcd

--timeout 

Specifies a timeout value, in seconds. If the program does not receive a response from the
server within this interval, an error is returned.

Last updated 8/21/2014

110

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Administering the server

Option

Description

amscheck -v

Prints a version string.

--auser 

Specifies a user name for the Administration Server user. Example: --auser admin

--apswd 

Specifies a password for the Administration Server. Example: --apswd admin

--ahostport 

Specifies the Administration Server port number. If the port number is not specified in the
command line, the default port is 1111. Example: --ahostport 1111

Usage examples for Windows:

•

* amscheck.exe --host localhost --app app1 --logfile output.txt

•

* amscheck.exe --host localhost --app app1 --play foo 0 10 --logfile output.txt

•

* amscheck.exe --host localhost --app app1 --pubfile foo.flv --publish bar 10 --logfile
output.txt

•

* amscheck.exe --host localhost --allapps --auser admin --apswd admin --parallel 10 -stagger 2 --timeout 100 logfile output.txt

All of the Windows examples can be adapted to Linux by using * ./amscheck instead of * amscheck.exe.
AMSCheck return codes
Return codes for the AMSCheck tool report the status after the tool has been run.
Code

Status

0

Success.

-1

Invalid command line argument.

-2

File not found.

-3

Connection failed.

-4

Operation timed out.

-5

Play failed.

-6

Publish failed.

-7

At least one application failed.

Checking video files
Checking FLV files created or modified with third-party tools
Third-party tools are available to create and modify FLV files, but some of the tools create files that do not comply with
the FLV standard. Common problems include bad timestamps in the FLV file, invalid onMetaData messages, bad
message headers, and corrupted audio and video. The FLVCheck tool can be used to analyze FLV files before they are
deployed on Adobe Media Server. In addition, the tool can also add or update metadata to reflect file duration
correctly. The tool verifies that metadata is readable, specifies an accurate duration, and checks that the FLV file is
seekable by Adobe Media Server. The tool supports unicode filenames.

Last updated 8/21/2014

111

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Administering the server

Note: The FLVCheck tool does not correct FLV file content corruption. The tool does fix metadata by scanning the
Duration and Can Seek To End metadata fields. The tool can then merge the server metadata with the data present in
the file.

Checking other video files
Adobe Media Server supports playback and recording of H.264-encoded video and HE-AAC-encoded audio within
an MPEG-4–based container format. A subset of the MPEG-4 standards are supported. All MP4 files and Adobe F4V
files are part of the supported subset.
For MPEG-4–based container formats, use the FLVCheck tool to verify that the server can play back your files.
Note: The FLVCheck tool does not correct corrupted H.264-encoded files or make any other fixes to MP4/F4V files.

Check a video file with the FLVCheck tool
The FLVCheck tool is a command line program; the executable is named flvcheck.
1 Open your operating system’s command prompt and change directories to RootInstall/tools.
2 Use the following syntax to run the FLVCheck tool:
flvcheck [-option] 

For example, to check two files:
flvcheck -f abc.flv ../test/123.flv

The following table describes the command line options available.
Option

Description

-f [ --file ] file ...

Specifies the path to the video file(s) being checked. Relative paths may be used. (Avoid
using the “\\xd3 character; try the “/” character instead.)

-v [--verbose]

Sets the verbose flag.

-V [ --version ]

Prints version information.

-n [ --nobanner ]

Turns off header.

-h [ --help ]

Provides a description of options and an example.

-d [ --duration ]

Specifies the margin of error, in seconds, that FLVCheck reports. (The default is 2 seconds.)
When validating metadata, the absolute difference between metadata_duration and
actual_duration is calculated and compared against the margin specified in this
command. If the margin is exceeded, the server logs a warning that the metadata duration
is incorrect. If the margin has not been exceeded, nothing will be logged.
To get the exact duration, specify -d 0.

-q [ --quiet ]

Specifies that only the status code, not the text output, be returned. The --help option
overrides this option.

-w [ --warnings]

Display warnings.

-W [--warnings_as_errors]

Treat warnings as errors.

Last updated 8/21/2014

112

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Administering the server

Option

Description

-s [ --fixvideostall ]

Fix a stall in video playback (FLV only).

-u [ --usage ]

Displays an example and information about command-line parameters.

-m [ --fixmeta ]

(FLV files only) If a metadata tag is corrupted, creates a new copy of the original FLV file in
the same directory as the original, with corrected metadata. (If the file contains no errors, a
backup file is not created.) Only the Duration and Can Seek To End metadata fields are
corrected.

3 If the FLVCheck tool finds no errors in the FLV file, the status code returned is 0. If there are one or more errors,

a positive number indicating the total number of invalid files found is returned. If a return code of -1 is returned,
an invalid command-line parameter was specified.
Errors and warnings are logged in a log file (stdout).
4 (FLV files only) If an error is returned from an FLV file due to a metadata error, you can use the tool to try to correct

the problem. Try the following:
a Use the -m option to try to fix the metadata in the file:
flvcheck -m  [-quiet] [-help]

b Use the -d option to change the duration field margin of error. The duration field in the metadata may be

inaccurate by a few seconds. For example, flvcheck -f abc.flv -d 5 would allow the metadata duration to
be inaccurate +/- 5 seconds.
Other types of errors cannot be fixed using the FLVCheck tool. MP4/F4V files cannot be fixed using the
FLVCheck tool.

FLVCheck errors
If an error is found, the error is logged to the stdout file in the following format: Date, Time, ErrorNumber,
ErrorMessage, and FileName. The possible error numbers, types of errors, and messages are as follows.
Error numbers

Error type

Error messages

-2

General

Invalid file system path specified.

-3

General

File not found.

-4

General

Cannot open file.

-5

General

File read error.
Adobe Media Server cannot read the file, indicating that the encoding of part or all
of the file is not compatible with the codecs that are supported.

-6

General

Cannot create corrected file.
This error occurs if you run the tool with the -m option set, but the tool cannot create
a file with corrected metadata.

-7

FLV

Invalid FLV signature.

-8

FLV

Invalid FLV data offset.

-9

FLV

Invalid FLV message footer.

-10

FLV

Unrecognized message type.

-11

FLV

Found backward timestamp.

Last updated 8/21/2014

113

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Administering the server

Error numbers

Error type

Error messages

-12

FLV

Unparsable data message.

-13

MP4

File does not contain a movie box.
This error occurs if the MP4 file is empty.

-14

MP4

File does not contain any valid tracks.
This error could occur if the MP4 file contains audio or video encoded with
unsupported codecs.

-15

MP4

Too many tracks. Maximum allowed is 64.

-16

MP4

Only one sample type allowed per track.

-17

MP4

Box is too large.

-18

MP4

Truncated box.
The reported length of a box is longer than the remaining length of the file. The file
may have been truncated, or the reported box length may be invalid.

-19

MP4

Duplicate box.

-20

MP4

Invalid box version.

-21

MP4

Invalid movie time scale.

-22

MP4

Invalid number of data entries in box.

-23

MP4

Invalid sample size.

-24

MP4

Invalid chapter time.

-25

MP4

Too many tag boxes. Max is 64.

-26

General

File appears to be FLV with wrong extension.

-27

MP4

Unsupported DRM scheme.

-28

MP4

Error reading MP4 tables.

-29

MP4

File contains unexpected movie fragments.

-30

MP4

File contains out-of-order movie fragments.

-127

MP4

Found negative CTTS Offset.
The MP4 standard stores the CTTS offset as an unsigned 32-bit value. The RTMP
standard stores the CTTS offset as a 24-bit unsigned value. However, if a file has
negative CTTS offsets, the value becomes very large when converted to unsigned
32-bit, and RTMP strips off 8 bits. This behavior may cause artifacts to be seen during
playback.

FLVCheck warnings
Generally, warnings are informative and are not fatal errors; Adobe Media Server will ignore the error that caused the
warning and continue to load and play back the video or audio file, but you may experience problems with playback.
Warnings are logged to the stdout file in the following format: Date, Time, Warning Number, Warning Message, and
File Name.

Last updated 8/21/2014

114

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Administering the server

Warning number

Warning type

Message

-100

General

Metadata duration is missing or is incorrect.

-101

FLV

canSeekToEnd is false.

-102

MP4

Unrecognized box.

-103

MP4

Found incomplete track.

-104

MP4

Found duplicate video track. Ignoring...

-105

MP4

Found duplicate audio track. Ignoring...

-106

MP4

Found duplicate data track. Ignoring...

-107

MP4

Track has unsupported sample type.
Adobe Media Server ignores (will not play back) tracks that are encoded with
unsupported codecs.

-108

MP4

Invalid video codec.
This warning indicates that a track has an invalid video codec. Adobe Media Server
cannot play back the track.

-109

MP4

Invalid audio codec.
This warning indicates that a track has an invalid audio codec. Adobe Media Server
cannot play back the track.

-110

FLV

Video may appear stalled due to lack of audio data.

-111

MP4

File has unsupported metadata format.

-112

MP4

Box has extraneous bytes at end.

-113

FLV

Video messages found but video flag not set.

-114

FLV

Audio messages found but audio flag not set.

-115

FLV

Video flag set but no video messages found.

-116

FLV

Audio flag set but no audio messages found.

-117

MP4

File is truncated. Will only be partially playable.

-118

MP4

Track contains unsupported edit list.

-119

FLV

Missing FLV metadata.

-120

MP4

Bad NellyMoser Frequency. Sample(s) skipped.

-121

MP4

Invalid Track Extends Box.

-122

MP4

Track contains unsupported sample flags.

Managing the server on Linux
Use the amsmgr utility to perform basic management tasks for Adobe Media Server running on Linux systems, such as
starting and stopping the server and services. You must be a root user to use the amsmgr utility.

Last updated 8/21/2014

115

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Administering the server

For tasks not listed in the following table, such as adding users or checking the status of applications, use the
Administration Console. A root user must use the amsmgr utility to start the Adobe Media Administration Server
before anyone can use the Administration Console. You do not need to be a root user to use the Administration
Console.
Note: Running multiple Adobe Media Server services concurrently is not supported.
Syntax
amsmgr server  

For commands that use the  parameter, if you do not specify , the command is
performed on the name of the server you selected during installation. The server name is ams by default. If
 does not exist, the command fails.
The amsmgr utility supports the following commands:
Command

Description

amsmgr adminserver start|stop|restart

Starts, stops, or restarts Adobe Media Administration Server.

amsmgr server 
start|stop|restart

Starts, stops, or restarts a Adobe Media Server service.

amsmgr clearautostart

Sets the Adobe Media Administration service to start manually.

amsmgr list

Lists all the services installed, including Administration services, with additional
information about services that are currently running.

amsmgr remove

Removes the Adobe Media Server service from the amsmgr tables. If you remove a
server service, the corresponding Administration service is also removed.
Warning: Use this command only if you want to uninstall the server service; you still
need to manually remove the installed files.

amsmgr add   Add an Adobe Media Server service to the amsmgr tables. If 

already appears in the amsmgr tables, the old entry is updated with the new one. The
 parameter is the absolute directory path where you installed
Adobe Media Server.
amsmgr setadmin 

Changes the default Administration service.
The Administration service name is the same as the Adobe Media Server service name.
Any installed Administration service can be used to administer one or more servers.
Only one Administration service can be running at a time.

amsmgr getadmin

Gets the name of the default Administration service.

amsmgr setautostart

Sets the Adobe Media Server service to start automatically when the system is started.

amsmgr clearautostart 

Removes the named service from the set of services to start automatically when the
system is started.

amsmgr suggestname

Suggests a service name that does not already appear in the amsmgr tables.

Scramble tool
The scramble tool obfuscates data on disk to prevent people who have access to the system from reading sensitive
information. Protected HTTP Dynamic Streaming (PHDS) and Protected HTTP Live Streaming (PHLS) use the
scramble tool to obfuscate credential passwords and the content encryption key. To create a new content encryption
key, use the scramble tool.

Last updated 8/21/2014

116

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Administering the server

The scramble tool uses AES-128 and a hard-coded key to obfuscate data. The data is unscrambled using the same hardcoded key. The key is a random sequence of bytes generated by the scramble tool.
Important: The hard-coded key can be retrieved from source code. It’s a good idea to use additional techniques to secure
the data as well.
The scramble tool is installed to the following location:
rootinstall/tools/scramble
The scramble tool supports the following options:
Option

Description

-scramble 

Takes an input string from the command line, encrypts it, and prints out a
Base64 encoded string. Use this option to encrypt credential passwords.This
option assumes that the string to scramble is already Base64 encoded. The
tool doesn't decode the string.

-randCode 

Generates a sequence of random bytes. Specify the sequence length in the
 command line parameter.The output is formatted as a
C++ array initialization code snippet.The installer uses this option to generate
the scrambling key and IV that are hard-coded in the scrambler tool and the
unscrambling utility function.

-randBase64 

Generates a sequence of random bytes. Specify the sequence length in the
 command line parameter.The output is a Base64 string
encoding the random data.Use this option to generate a content encryption
key. Use the output of this command as the  input
for the -scramble option. Combining those two commands generates data
in the same format as the -KeyGen option.

-KeyGen  [-f ]

Generates a sequence of random bytes, Base64 encodes it, encrypts the
resulting string and prints out a Base64 encoded string of the result.
Specify the sequence length in the  command line
parameter.
Use the -f option to redirect the output to an output file.
The Adobe Media Server installer uses this option to generate a unique PHDS
and PHLS content encryption key.

For example, the following command outputs a 16 byte key:
scramble -KeyGen 16 -f server.key

Last updated 8/21/2014

117

118

Chapter 6: Using the Administration API
Working with the Administration API
About the Administration API
Use the Administration API to monitor, manage, and configure the server from an Adobe Flash Player or Adobe AIR
client over RTMP or RTMPE or from a web client over HTTP. The Adobe Media Server Administration Console was
built using the Administration API. The API is documented in Adobe Media Server Administration API Reference.
Here are a few important tips for working with the Administration API:

• Both Adobe Media Server and Adobe Media Administration Server must be running.
• This document assumes that you have not changed the default port number (1111) for the Administration Server;
if you have, use your valid port number in all examples.

• If you do not specify an optional parameter, a default value may be used depending on the method. For example, if
you do not specify a virtual host in the scope parameter, it is assumed that you want to perform the command on
the virtual host to which you connected when you logged in to Adobe Media Server.

• By default, administrators are logged in to the “_defaultRoot_” adaptor. When logging in to a virtual host not on
the default adaptor, virtual-host administrators must specify the name of the adaptor. For example, when logging
in (over RTMP using NetConnection) to a virtual host on the adaptor _secondAdaptor_, the administrator JLee
would enter the following information for the administrator user name parameter in the method call:
_secondAdaptor_/JLee.

Set permissions for Administration API method calls over HTTP
Note: You do not need to set permissions to call methods over RTMP.
1 Open the ams.ini file in the RootInstall/conf folder.
2 Make sure that the USERS.HTTPCOMMAND_ALLOW parameter is set to true.
3 Open the Users.xml file in the RootInstall/conf folder.
4 In the  element, enter method names in a comma-delimited list to allow HTTP requests to execute

Administration API calls. For example, the following code allows the ping() and changePswd() methods:


${USERS.HTTPCOMMAND_ALLOW}/Enable>
ping,changePswd
All
Deny,Allow



Note: There are additional XML elements in the Users.xml file that give you finer control over permissions. For more
information, see “XML configuration files reference” on page 125.
5 Save the file and restart Adobe Media Administration Server.

Last updated 8/21/2014

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Using the Administration API

Call an Administration API method over HTTP
1 Verify that Adobe Media Administration Server is running.
2 Open a browser window and enter the following in the address bar:
http://localhost:1111/admin/ping?auser=username&apswd=password

If the web browser is on a different computer than Adobe Media Server, use the server address instead of
localhost. Substitute your administrator user name and password, which are located in the ams.ini file.
Note: You can construct an Administration API call from any language that can send HTTP requests. This example
uses a web browser because it’s the simplest client and good for testing purposes.
3 The server sends the XML results back to the browser:


status
NetConnection.Call.Success
10/3/2007 05:31:01 PM


Constructing an HTTP request string
Many Administration APIs expect one or more parameters in addition to auser and apswd. Parameters passed in an
HTTP request must adhere to the following formatting rules:

• Name the parameters in the string. For example, the following code calls the addAdmin() method:
http://localhost:1111/admin/addAdmin?auser=adminname&apswd=adminpassword&username="joe"&pa
ssword="pass123"&vhost="_defaultRoot_/foo.myCompany.com"

• Strings are passed as literals surrounded by quotation marks. You can use either single quotation marks (') or
double quotation marks (").
"Hello World"
'String2'

The only exceptions are the auser and apswd parameters, which should be passed without quotation marks.

• Numbers are passed as either integer or floating-point literals.
245
1.03
-45

Note: When a number is used for an application name, the application name must be included within quotation
marks (" ") for methods such as reloadApp() and unload App() to work properly.

• Arrays are passed as comma-separated values enclosed in square brackets.
[1,2,3,4]
['abcd',34,"hi"]
[10,20,[31,32],40]

• Objects are passed as inline object literals.
{foo:123,bar:456}

Last updated 8/21/2014

119

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Using the Administration API

{user:"Joe",ssn:"123-45-6789"}

Call Administration API methods over RTMP or RTMPE
To call the Administration API over RTMP or RTMPE, you need a Flash Player or AIR client.
Note: To call the Administration API over RTMPE, follow the instructions below, but change the protocol in the example
NetConnection.connect() call to RTMPE.
1 In the client application, create a NetConnection to Adobe Media Administration Server, passing in three

parameters: the URI of the Administration Server, an administrator user name, and an administrator password.
Only valid administrators, as defined in the Users.xml configuration file, can connect to the server.
The following code creates a NetConnection for the administrator MHill with password 635xjh27 to the server on
localhost:
ncAdmin = new NetConnection();
ncAdmin.connect("rtmp://localhost:1111/admin", "MHill", "635xjh27");

Note: If you want to connect to a virtual host, specify the virtual host’s domain name or IP address as part of the URI—
for example, rtmp://www.myVhost.com/admin:1111.
2 Call the NetConnection.call() method and pass it the Administration API method, a response object (if needed)

and any parameters (if needed):
ncAdmin.call("getAppStats", new onGetAppStats(), "vod");

The getAppStats() method returns performance data for an application running on the server; the response
object onGetAppStats() captures the result of the call; and vod is the name of the application instance from which
to retrieve statistics.
3 Define a function to handle the information object returned by the Administration API method; in this example,
onGetAppStats():
ncAdmin.call("getAppStats", new onGetAppStats(), appName.text);
...
function onGetAppStats(){
this.onResult = function(info){
if (info.code != "NetConnection.Call.Success"){
outputBox.text = "Call failed: " + info.description;
} else {
outputBox.text = "Info for "+appName.text+ " returned:" + newline;
printObj(info, outputBox);
}
}
}

The data is returned to the handler function in an information object. All information objects have level, code, and
timestamp properties. Some information objects have a data property (containing return data, often in an object or
array) and description and details properties, which typically provide information about errors.

Create your first Flash application
This section contains the code for a simple Flash application that calls the getAppStats() method.
To call Administration APIs over RTMP, you need a Flash Player or AIR client. The following sample is built in Flash.

Last updated 8/21/2014

120

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Using the Administration API

Note: You can call Administration APIs from applications written in ActionScript 1.0, ActionScript 2.0, or ActionScript 3.0.
1 In Flash, create an application with the following elements:

• An input text field named appName
• A button called button_btn
• A multiline, dynamic text field called outputBox
• A scroll component attached to the outputBox text field
Note: Because this is a Adobe Media Server application, you must create an application directory with the application
name in the RootInstall\applications directory.
2 Enter the following code on frame 1 of a Flash file:
/** Establishes the connection to Adobe Media Server **/
ncAdmin = new NetConnection();
// Replace admin_name and admin_pass with your
// administrator name and password.
ncAdmin.connect("rtmp://localhost:1111/admin","admin_name","admin_pass");
/** Makes the API call, for example, "getAppStats" **/
function doGetAppStats() {
function onGetAppStats(){
this.onResult = function(info){
if (info.code != "NetConnection.Call.Success"){
outputBox.text = "Call failed: " + info.description;
} else {
outputBox.text = "Info for "+appName.text+ " returned:" + newline;
printObj(info, outputBox);
}
};
}
// Calls the getAppStats() API on the name of application
// in the input text field
// places the response in the onGetAppStats funtion
ncAdmin.call("getAppStats", new onGetAppStats(), appName.text);
}
function printObj(obj, destination){
for (var prop in obj) {
destination.text += "\t";
destination.text += prop + " = " + obj[prop] + newline;
if (typeof (obj[prop]) == "object") { // recursively call printObj
printObj(obj[prop], destination);
}
}
}
button_btn.onRelease = function(){
doGetAppStats();
}

3 Before running this sample application, start another Adobe Media Server application.
4 Open the Administration Console to verify that the application you started in step 3 is running.
5 Run the sample Flash application and enter the name of the application you started in step 3 in the input text field.

Last updated 8/21/2014

121

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Using the Administration API

This example uses the NetConnection class to make a single request to the Adobe Media Server. If you want to create
a persistent connection that updates automatically (like the Administration Console), you can use the NetStream class
to create a streaming connection over the NetConnection.

Create your first application in Flex
The following application built in Flex uses the HTTPService class to call the Adobe Media Server administration API.
It calls the getAppStats method and prints the results to the TextArea control.
Before you compile and run this example, you must add your admin username and password to the request
parameters.
When you run the example, enter an application name in the TextInput control and click the Get App Stats button.
Default applications include “live” and “vod”, but you can use the name of any application that you created on the
server.






your_admin_username
your_admin_password


















This application was written for Flex 4.
If the call is successful, the getAppStats method returns a result similar to the following:

status
NetConnection.Call.Success
6/30/2010 2:42:21 PM

6/30/2010 2:42:03 PM
17
17060
17501
290075
271130
202
61
0
2
0
2
2
0
0
0
0
0

Last updated 8/21/2014

123

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Using the Administration API

2
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

<_0>
15720
0


0
0



Last updated 8/21/2014

124

125

Chapter 7: XML configuration files
reference
Edit the configuration files in the RootInstall/conf directory to configure the server.
Important: Do not modify certain XML elements without contacting Adobe Support. These elements are marked with
an Important note.

More Help topics
“Edit a configuration file” on page 17

Changes to configuration files from 4.5 to 5.0.1
When upgrading from version 4.5 of Flash Media Server to version 5.0.1 of Adobe Media Server, be aware of changes
to the XML configuration files.
The changes are primarily related to the introduction of Closed captioning support in Adobe Media Server 5.0.1.

Server.xml changes
• See Closed captioning VOD case - Configuring Server.xml (only for RTMP)
• See Closed captioning support for OSMF

Application.xml changes
• See Closed captioning Live case - Configuring Application.xml (HDS and RTMP)
• Protected RTMP (introduced in 4.5.1) change:




60






Changes to configuration files from 4.0 to 4.5
When upgrading from version 4.0 to version 4.5 of Flash Media Server, be aware of changes to the XML configuration
files.

Last updated 8/21/2014

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

ams.ini (fms.ini) changes
The configuration file fms.ini has been renamed to ams.ini.
The cache cleaning tool can be started when the HTTP server starts:
SERVER.HTCACHECLEAN_ENABLED = true

The cache root for the web server can be specified in this configuration file:
SERVER.HTCACHEROOT = /opt/adobe/ams/Apache2.2/cacheroot

The Flash Media Server 4.5 fms.ini file does not store the Administrator password. The following parameter has been
removed from the 4.5 fms.ini file:
>
>
>
>
>

# Password for server admin
# For example:
#
SERVER.ADMIN_PASSWORD = bar
#
SERVER.ADMIN_PASSWORD = adminadmin

The password is stored in the Users.xml file as a salted hash. To reset the password, see “Delete administrator accounts
and reset passwords” on page 92.

Adaptor.xml file changes
The default value of MaxHeaderLineLength is now 8192.
There are two new elements: Adaptor/SSL/SSLVerifyClient and Adaptor/SSL/SSLVerifyDepth.
Two new tags FlowSendMaxBufferSize and FlowSendMaxUnsentAge have been introduced:




2097152

8000


Application.xml file changes
The “PeerLookupEvents” on page 172 element is new. Use this element to determine how peer lookup events are
dispatched.
The element /StreamManager/EventsDir specifies the physical location where Event information for live streaming
is stored.
The RTMFP section provides the means to control the behavior of application-specific RTMFP functionality. It includes
the following elements: PeerLookupEvents, GroupControl, and JoinLeaveEvents. The HDS section provides the
means to control the behavior of application-specific HTTP dynamic streaming functionality. It includes the following
elements: Recording and ContentProtection.

Logger.xml file changes
There are no changes to the Logger.xml file.

Last updated 8/21/2014

126

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Server.xml file changes
You can specify how the cacheclean tool can be started:








Apache2.2/bin
htcacheclean
-p${SERVER.HTCACHEROOT} -d5 -l1024K
-n -t -i


The /RTMP/ConnectionTimeout element and /HTTP/ConnectionTimeout element specify how long to wait before
timing out an outgoing connection, in milliseconds. The default is -1 which uses the OS timeout to block outgoing
connections.
-1

Enable a Registry core to activate a single AMSCore instance dedicated to handling services for Adobe Media
Gateway. This AMSCore process comes to life on start-up and allows Adobe Media Gateway to register its services to
Adobe Media Server. Enable this registry core only when using Adobe Media Gateway.


_defaultRoot_


Users.xml file changes
The Users.xml file contains a salted password hash for the Administrator Console password:
e206a5e1b52dcb4eaf024ca6adbe321b86cf0079bb747b78134ddaf8375e10aff905da0b28e84c5a

Vhost.xml file changes
No changes.

Adaptor.xml file
The Adaptor.xml file is the configuration file for individual network adaptors. It determines the number of threads
that can be used by the adaptor, the communications ports the adaptor binds to, and the IP addresses or domains from
which the adaptor can accept connections.
You can also implement SSL with the Adaptor.xml file, if you want to use different digital certificates for different
adaptors.

Last updated 8/21/2014

127

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Each adaptor has its own directory inside the server’s conf directory. The name of the directory is the name of the
adaptor. Each adaptor directory must contain an Adaptor.xml file. For example, the default adaptor included with the
server at installation is named _defaultRoot_ and its directory is found in the conf/ directory. To change an adaptor’s
settings, edit the elements in its Adaptor.xml file.
To see the element structure and default values in the Adaptor.xml file, see the
RootInstall/conf/_defaultRoot_/Adaptor.xml file.

Adaptor
Root element. Contains all the elements in the Adaptor.xml file.

Allow
A comma-delimited list of host names, domain names, and/or full or partial IP addresses from which clients can
connect to the server.
Example
foo.yourcompany.com, adobe.com, 10.60.1.133, 10.60

See also
Deny, Order

Deny
A comma-delimited list of host names, domain names, and/or full or partial IP addresses from which clients cannot
connect to the server.
Example
foo.yourcompany.com, adobe.com, 10.60.1.133, 10.60

See also
Allow, Order

Edge
Container element.
Contains elements that specify an edge to configure for HTTP tunnelling. Edges are defined in HostPort elements in
the HostPortList container. Each edge can have different HTTPTunnel configurations.
Attribute
name A name identifying an edge. Use the name specified in the HostPort element.
Contained elements
Enable, IdlePostInterval, IdleAckInterval, MimeType, WriteBufferSize, SetCookie, Redirect, NeedClose,

Enable
Specifies whether or not to allow HTTP tunnelling connections.

Last updated 8/21/2014

128

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

These are the possible values for the Enable element:
Value

Description

true

Allow all HTTP tunnelling connections. This is the default value.

false

Disallow all HTTP tunnelling connections.

http1.1only

Allow only HTTP 1.1 tunnelling connections.

keepalive

Allow HTTP 1.1 or HTTP 1.0 keepalive connections.

Important: Only one application can use a port at a time. For example, if you configure Adobe Media Server to use port
80 for HTTP tunnelling, the web server cannot use port 80.
Example
true

See also
IdlePostInterval, IdleAckInterval, MimeType, WriteBufferSize, SetCookie, Redirect, MimeType,

EnableAltVhost
Determines whether an alternative virtual host may be specified as a part of the RTMP URL as query parameter
rtmp://host1/app/?_fcs_vhost=host2. This does not apply to administrative connections, which are always on by
default. The default value is false.
false

See also
HTTPTunnel, RTMP, SSL

Host
Redirects unknown requests to an external server.
See also
Redirect

HostPort
Specifies to which IP address and port(s) an adaptor binds. If you want to bind an adaptor to multiple IP addresses,
add a HostPort element for each IP address. The format is IP:port,port,...,port. To bind to any IP address, don’t
specify anything in front of the colon.
This element is exposed as the ADAPTOR.HOSTPORT parameter in the RootInstall/conf/ams.ini file. The default value is
:1935,80,-443. This value instructs the adaptor to bind to any IP address on ports 1935, 80, and 443, where 443 is
designated as a secure port that will only receive RTMPS connections.

Last updated 8/21/2014

129

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

When assigning port numbers, keep in mind the following:

• There is a risk in assigning more than one adaptor to listen on the same IP:port pair. If another process tries to
bind to the same IP:port combination, a conflict results. To resolve this conflict, the first adaptor to bind to the
specified HostPort wins. Adobe Media Server logs a warning in the Access log file indicating that the specified
IP:port is in use.

• Only one application can use a port at a time. For example, if you configure Adobe Media Server to use port 80 for
HTTP tunnelling, the web server cannot use port 80.
Attributes
name A name to identify this HostPort element. If there are multiple HostPort elements, each must have a different
name.
ctl_channel The internal port that an AMSEdge (amsedge in Linux) process listens on. When an AMSCore process
is started (amscore in Linux), it connects to an AMSEdge process on this internal port to establish a control channel.
Each HostPort element corresponds to an AMSEdge process. If there are multiple HostPort elements, each must
have a different ctl_channel.

Example
The following HostPort value instructs the adaptor to bind to the IP address 127.0.0.1 on ports 1935, 80, and 443,
where 443 is designated as a secure port that will only receive RTMPS connections. (A port is marked as secure by
specifying a minus sign in front of the port number.) RTMPS connection attempts to ports 1935 or 80 will not succeed.
The client will attempt to perform an SSL handshake that the server will fail to complete. Similarly, a regular RTMP
connection to port 443 fails because the server tries to perform an SSL handshake that the client fails to complete.
127.0.0.1:1935,80,-443

If there is no colon in the HostPort value, or there is a colon with no ports specified, the data is assumed to be an IP
address and binds to port 1935. The following values instruct the adaptor to bind to IP 127.0.0.1 on port 1935:
127.0.0.1
127.0.0.1:

See also
HostPortList

HostPortList
Container element.
The elements in this container list HostPort elements associated with this adaptor.
Example

${ADAPTOR.HOSTPORT}
:1936,-444


Contained elements
HostPort

Last updated 8/21/2014

130

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

HTTPIdent
Configures the server to respond to or reject an HTTP identification request from a client. For a response to be
returned, the HTTPIdent function must be enabled and the client must do a POST or GET for the "/fcs/ident"
resource.
When the server receives an HTTP Identification request, it logs the request to the edge.xx.log file.
Attributes
enable A Boolean value specifying whether the server responds to an HTTP identification request (true) or not
(false). The default value is false. When the enable attribute is set to true, all elements in the HTTPIdent section
are returned as a response. The entire response is enclosed in  elements, which are added by the server.
If the HTTPIdent function is enabled but no content is specified, the  response is returned without
content.
Example

Adobe System Inc
Adobe Media Server


The following is an example request:
http://serverIP:1935/fcs/ident

The following is an example response:

Adobe System Inc
Adobe Media Server


See also
HTTPNull, HTTPTunnel, HTTPUserInfo

HTTPIdent2
Configures the server to respond to or reject a special HTTP request from the client before the client attempts to make
a RTMPT connection to Adobe Media Server. For a response to be returned, the HTTPIdent2 function must be
enabled. This function is available when using Flash Player Update 3 or later.
RTMPT (Tunnelled Real-Time Messaging Protocol) can have difficulties working with load balancers. If a single
RTMPT session consists of multiple socket connections, each connection may be sent to any one of many Adobe
Media Servers behind load balancers. This causes the session to be split across machines. Using  enables
Flash Player to send a special HTTP request before connecting to Adobe Media Server.
Attributes
enabled A Boolean value specifying whether the server responds to a special HTTP identification request before
making a RTMPT connection (true) or not (false). This feature is enabled by default, even if the  tag
or the enabled attribute is missing. The IP address can be explicitly configured and does not need to be the IP of the
Adobe Media Server machine. (This allows RTMPT connections to be redirected to a different server.) If the tag is left
empty, the IP address is determined automatically.

Last updated 8/21/2014

131

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

If you are running Adobe Media Server on Linux and have enabled IPv6 but are using an IPv4 hostname (a hostname
that resolves to IPv4), then use this tag to resolve RTMPTE and RTMPE connections more quickly: either set the
enabled attribute to false or set it to true and set the value of the tag to the IP address to which you’re connecting.
Example
10.133.128.71

See also
HTTPNull, HTTPTunnel, HTTPUserInfo

HTTPNull
Configures the server to respond to or reject an HTTP GET request for the “/” resource from a client. When the enable
attribute is set to true, an HTTP 404 response is sent in response to an HTTP GET request. By default, the HTTPNull
function is disabled.
If HTTPNull is disabled and the webserver is enabled, requests for the "/" resource are passed to the webserver.
Attributes
enable A Boolean value. The default value is false.
Example


HttpProxy
Specifies whether the server proxies unknown requests to an external server. For proxying to work,
HTTPTunnel/Enable must be set to true.
Request proxying to a specific host can be further controlled based upon port on which the request arrived. Flow
control kicks in when the buffer in either direction fills up, automatically handling the case when producers and
consumers differ widely in bandwidth.
Attributes
enable A Boolean value. The default value is true.
maxbuf

The size of the io buffers. The default value is 16384.

Example
In the default Adaptor.xml file, the value of the Host element is a variable from the ams.ini file. You can set the value
of HTTPPROXY.HOST in the ams.ini file, or replace the variable in the Adaptor.xml file. The following is from the
default Adaptor.xml file:

${HTTPPROXY.HOST}


The IP address and port to which the server proxies unknown HTTP requests.HTTPPROXY.HOST =
webfarm.example.com:80
If you do not specify an IP address or domain name, the server uses a localhost port, as in the following:
HTTPPROXY.HOST = :8134

Last updated 8/21/2014

132

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

HTTPTunnel
Container element.
The elements in this section configure the incoming HTTP tunnelling connections to the adaptor. You can use the
contained Edge element to configure each edge individually.
Contained elements
Enable, NodeID, IdlePostInterval, IdleAckInterval, IdleTimeout, MimeType, WriteBufferSize, SetCookie,
Redirect, Host, HttpProxy, NeedClose, MaxHeaderLineLength, Edge

HTTPUserInfo
Container element.
The elements in this section configure the absolute path to XML files and the cache settings.
Contained elements
Path, MaxSize, UpdateInterval

IdleAckInterval
Specifies the maximum time in milliseconds the server waits before it sends an acknowledgement code for a client idle
post. An acknowledgement code is a transmission control character used to indicate that a transmitted message was
received uncorrupted and without errors, and that the receiving server is ready to accept transmissions. The default
value is 512 milliseconds, which provides medium latency.
The values for this element and the IdlePostInterval element affect the latency observed by a client tunnelling into
the server. These elements should be configured at the same time.
Lower values reduce latency but increase the network bandwidth overhead. Applications desiring low latency may
configure the combination of values 128/256 for the IdlePostInterval and IdleAckInterval elements. For
applications not sensitive to high latencies, use the combination 1024/2048.
512

See also
IdlePostInterval, IdleTimeout

IdlePostInterval
Specifies the interval in milliseconds at which the client sends idle posts to the server to indicate that Flash Player has
no data to send.
The default settings for the IdleAckInterval and IdlePostInterval elements provide medium latency and are set
to 512/512 milliseconds.
Low values reduce the latency but increase the network bandwidth overhead. Applications desiring low latency may
configure the combination of values 128/256 for IdlePostInterval and IdleAckInterval elements. Applications
that do not have high latencies can use the configuration 1024/2048.
Example
512

Last updated 8/21/2014

133

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

See also
IdleAckInterval, IdleTimeout

IdleTimeout
Specifies the maximum inactivity time, in seconds, for a tunnel session before it is closed.
When a client using HTTP tunnelling disconnects unexpectedly, their session may remain open for a long period of
time after disconnecting. The value of IdleTimeout indicates the maximum time, in seconds, that such a session may
remain idle before it will be automatically disconnected. An IdleTimeout of -1 indicates that idle tunnel sessions will
not be disconnected. The default setting for IdleTimeout is 8 seconds. Values that are too low may cause clients with
very high latencies to become disconnected. Values that are too high may result in disconnected sessions consuming
server resources for longer than necessary.
Example
8

See also
IdlePostInterval, IdleAckInterval

MaxFailures
Specifies the maximum number of failures an edge server may incur before it restarts.
The default number of failures is 2.
Example
2

See also
IdleAckInterval

MaxHeaderLineLength
The maximum size of an HTTP header line, in bytes, that the server can accept. The default value is 8192. To accept
longer header lines, increase this value.
See also
“Specify the maximum HTTP header line length” on page 54

MaxPipelinedRequests
Configures the maximum number of requests Flash Player will allow to be pipelined. The value must be greater than
or equal to 1.
The default value is 5.
Example
6

Last updated 8/21/2014

134

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

MaxSize
Specifies the maximum number of HTTP requests the server keeps in the cache. When the cache size reaches the
maximum size, the server reduces the cache. By default, the value is 100.
Example
100

See also
Path, UpdateInterval

MimeType
Specifies the default MIME (Multi-purpose Internet Mail Extensions) type header sent on tunnel responses.
The server generally uses the MIME type specified by the incoming requests. The server uses the entry for the
MIMEType element only if it is unable to determine the MIME type from the incoming requests.
Example
application/x-fcs

See also
HTTPTunnel

NeedClose
A Boolean value specifying whether or not HTTP 1.0 non-keepalive connections are closed once the response is
written. The default value is true, which closes the connections.
Example
true

NodeID
Specifies a unique node identification that supports the implementation of load balancers.
If the NodeID element is used, a following string of up to nine characters is prefixed to the tunnel session IDs and can
be used by the load balancers to uniquely identify each node in the cluster.
The ID must contain URL-safe characters: alphanumerical A-Z, a-z, and 0-9, and the special characters $-_.+!*'()
See also
HTTPTunnel

Order
Specifies the sequence in which the server evaluates the Allow and Deny elements. The following is the default
sequence:
Allow,Deny

The default sequence indicates that access to a server is denied unless it is specified in the Allow element.

Last updated 8/21/2014

135

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

The alternative sequence Deny,Allow indicates that access to a server is allowed unless specified in the Deny element
and not specified in the Allow element.
Example
The following is the default sequence:
Allow,Deny

See also
Allow, Deny

Path
Specifies the absolute path of the folder where the server looks for XML files. By default, it is set to uInfo/ in the Adobe
Media Server installation directory.
See also
MaxSize, UpdateInterval

RecoveryTime
Specifies the number of seconds an edge server waits before restarting after a failure.
When an edge server fails, it waits for the interval specified here before it restarts. The wait time is specified in seconds.
The number of failures is specified by the MaxFailures element.
Example
30

See also
MaxSize

Redirect
Specifies whether or not the adaptor redirects unknown requests to an external server.
Note: For redirection to work, HTTP tunnelling must be enabled.
An unknown request may connect only when it is the first request on a newly accepted connection. At any other time,
the request is considered an error and the connection is closed.
The maxbuf attribute determines how big the IO buffers are. Flow control automatically handles the request when the
bandwidth resources for producers and consumers differ widely. Flow control begins when the buffer in either
direction fills up.
Example
This example instructs the server to redirect unknown requests to the specified redirect host.

:8080
:8443


Last updated 8/21/2014

136

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

See also
NeedClose

ResourceLimits
Container element.
The elements in this container configure the resource limits for the edge server.
Contained elements
MaxFailures, RecoveryTime

RTMP
Container element.
The elements in this container determine whether encrypted RTMP (RTMPE) and encrypted tunnelling RTMP
(RTMPTE) can be used.
Contained elements
RTMPE

RTMPE
Specifies whether encrypted RTMP (RTMPE) can be used. RTMPE is the encrypted RTMP protocol covering both
RTMPE and RTMPTE. This element is enabled by default; setting enabled to false will not allow RTMPE or
RTMPTE on this adaptor.
Example


See also
RTMP

SetCookie
Specifies whether or not the server sets a cookie.
If the server does not have an externally visible IP address, then for HTTP tunnelling to work, you should enable
cookies when you deploy servers behind a load balancer. The load balancer checks the cookie and sends requests with
this cookie to the same server. Keep in mind that the cookie adds to the HTTP header size and increases the bandwidth
overhead.
Note: For tunnelling connections, cookies are currently supported only on Flash Player 9.0.28 or later, in Windows only.
Example
false

See also
NodeID

Last updated 8/21/2014

137

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

SSL
Container element.
The elements in this section configure the incoming connections via the Secure Sockets Layer protocol, known as SSL.
The SSL elements in Adaptor.xml configure the server to act as an SSL-enabled server to accept incoming SSL
connections.
You need to acquire a digital certificate to use SSL. Once you get your SSL certificate through a certificate authority,
such as Verisign, or by creating it yourself with a product such as OpenSSL, you then use the SSL elements to configure
the server for SSL.
The following is a quick start to allowing SSL-enabled connections to the server:

•

to the SSL section of the Adaptor.xml file.

• Specify the location of the certificate in the SSLCertificateFile element.
• Specify where to find the associated private key file in the SSLCertificateKeyFile element.
• If the private key file is encrypted, specify the passphrase to use for decrypting the private key file in the
SSLPassPhrase element.

• Save the modified Adaptor.xml file.
Contained elements
SSLServerCtx

SSLCertificateFile
Specifies the location of the certificate to return to clients who want to make a secure connection to the server.
If an absolute path is not specified, the certificate location is assumed to be relative to the adaptor directory.
Example
c:\myCertFile

See also
SSLCertificateKeyFile, SSLPassPhrase, SSLCipherSuite, SSLSessionTimeout

SSLCertificateKeyFile
This specifies the location of the private key file that corresponds to the public key in the certificate specified in
SSLCertificateFile element.
If this file is encrypted, a password must be specified for decrypting and placed in the SSLPassPhrase element
described below. If an absolute path to the key file is not specified, it is assumed to be relative to the adaptor directory.
Example


The type attribute specifies the type of encoding used for the certificate key file. The encryption format is either PEM
(Privacy Enhanced Mail) or ASN1 (Abstract Syntax Notation 1). The default is PEM.
See also
SSLCertificateFile, SSLPassPhrase, SSLCipherSuite, SSLSessionTimeout

Last updated 8/21/2014

138

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

SSLCipherSuite
Specifies the suite of encryption ciphers that the server uses to secure incoming connections.
This element contains a list of colon-delimited components. A component can be a key exchange algorithm,
authentication method, encryption method, digest type, or one of a selected number of aliases for common groupings.
Note: Contact Adobe Support before changing the default settings as listed in this example.
Example
ALL:!ADH:!LOW:!EXP:!MD5:@STRENGTH

See also
SSLCertificateFile, SSLCertificateKeyFile, SSLPassPhrase, SSLSessionTimeout

SSLPassPhrase
Specifies the passphrase to use for encrypting the private key file.
Specifies the password to use for decrypting the key file if the key file is encrypted. If the key file is not encrypted, this
element is left blank.
To prevent plain text passwords from appearing in the configuration file, encode the password in base64 format and
set the encrypt attribute to true.
Example
dGluY2Fu

The encrypted password is equivalent to the plain text format:
tincan

or
tincan

Even though the element attribute is named "encrypt", it is not a true encryption. It is a base64 encoding that makes
the password less readable.
See also
SSLCertificateFile, SSLCertificateKeyFile, SSLCipherSuite, SSLSessionTimeout

SSLServerCtx
Container element.
The elements in this section control the incoming SSL configuration for this adaptor.
Contained elements
SSLCertificateFile, SSLCertificateKeyFile, SSLPassPhrase, SSLCipherSuite, SSLSessionTimeout,
SSLVerifyClient, SSLVerifyDepth

SSLSessionTimeout
Specifies in minutes how long a SSL-based session remains valid. The default time period is 5 minutes.

Last updated 8/21/2014

139

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

SSL sessions are used to improve performance by avoiding the need to perform the full SSL handshake for every
connection. When a client connects to a server for the first time, it must perform the full handshake. After that first
handshake, the server sends back a session object to the client, which the client can place in the cache and reuse at a
later time.
If the client connects to the same server again at a later time, it can send back the cached session object. The server does
not require the full SSL handshake if the session is still valid.
Example
5

See also
SSLCertificateFile, SSLCertificateKeyFile, SSLPassPhrase, SSLCipherSuite

SSLVerifyClient
Sets the certificate verifcation level for client authentication. The following are valid levels:

• none
Server does not send request for client certificate.

• optional
The client may send a certificate. If sent, it is checked. If certificate verification fails, TLS/SSL handshake is
immediately terminated.

• required
Server sends a request for a client certificate. If the client does not send one, TLS/SSL handshake is immediately
terminated.

• optional_no_ca
Server sends a request for a client cert. But the certificate need not be successfully verifiable. This should not be used
in a production deployment, but can be useful for testing/debugging purposes.
The default value is none. The log attribute specifies whether or not to log when client certificate verification passes
or fails.
Example
none

SSLVerifyDepth
The maximum depth of CA certificates allowed in client certificate verification. The value 0 indicates that only selfsigned certificates are accepted. The default value is 9.

UpdateInterval
Specifies how often the server refreshes the cache content, in milliseconds. By default, the value is 5000 milliseconds.
Example
5000

Last updated 8/21/2014

140

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

See also
Path, MaxSize

WriteBufferSize
Specifies the size of the write buffer in kilobytes. The default size is 16 KB.
Example
16

See also
ResourceLimits

Application.xml file
The Application.xml file contains the settings for Adobe Media Server applications.
The Application.xml file in the virtual host directory configures the default settings for all applications within the
virtual host. If you want to have different settings for a particular application, copy an Application.xml file to the
application’s registered application directory (/applications/app_name) and edit it to include the settings you want.
In most cases, the settings in the Application.xml file in the application directory override settings in the
Application.xml file in the virtual host directory, but not always. You can add an override attribute to certain
elements in a virtual host’s Application.xml file, as in the following:
false

The server uses the following rules when applying the override attribute:

• When the override attribute is included in an element and set to no, application-specific Application.xml files
cannot override that element’s setting.

• If an element has the override attribute set to no, then all subelements also cannot be overridden.
• If an Application.xml file is located in the application directory and specifies a different value than the default for
an element that cannot be overridden, it is ignored, and the default is used.

• If the default Application.xml file is missing or invalid, the server will not start.
• If the user-specified Application.xml configuration file is invalid, it is ignored.
• All subelements under the LoadOnStartup element cannot be overridden.
• If you omit the override attribute, the LoadOnStartup element can be overridden.
• To change an element so it cannot be overridden, set the override tag to no in the uppermost tag.
Note: By default, the Bandwidth and BandwidthCap container elements include an override parameter set to yes,
which allows the values for the ClientToServer and ServerToClient elements nested in these sections to be
overridden. The Client element in this XML file includes an override="no" attribute by default.
To see the element structure and default values, see the Application.xml file installed with Adobe Media Server in the
RootInstall/conf/_defaultRoot_/_defaultVhost_ directory.

Last updated 8/21/2014

141

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Access
Container element.
The Access plug-in consists of the libconnect.dll file. It intercepts and examines each connection request to Adobe
Media Server to determine whether the connection should be accepted or rejected.
Contained elements
FolderAccess

Access (Logging)
Container element.
Contains elements that configure logging in the Access log.
Contained elements
Checkpoints

AccumulatedIFrames
Container element.
The elements in this section specify the maximum size and duration of intermediate frames a live stream can hold in
the buffer.
Contained elements
MaxTime, MaxSize (AccumulatedIFrames)

AdaptorId
Availability
Flash Media Server 4
Description
Important: Do not change the value of this element.
Specifies an identifier for an adaptor to the server-side script engine. The default script adaptor is
as1.
The ScriptAdaptors element in the Server.xml configuration file contains an element for each adaptor. The default
adaptor is as1:




See also
ScriptEngine

Last updated 8/21/2014

142

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

AggregateMessages (Client)
Specifies whether or not to send aggregate messages to clients. When the enabled attribute is set to true, the server
will deliver aggregate messages to clients that support them. When this setting is disabled, aggregate messages are
broken up into individual messages before being delivered to clients. The default is false.

AggregateMessages (Queue)
Container element; contains an element that control the size of the aggregate messages.
This element also specifies, when queuing is enabled, whether messages in the queue can be combined to form
aggregate messages. When the enabled attribute is set to true (the default value), the server creates aggregate
messages.
The server attempts to send aggregate messages to supported clients whenever possible. When this setting is disabled,
aggregate messages are always broken up into individual messages before being delivered to clients.
Example
<\AggregateMessages>

See also
MaxAggMsgSize, HTTPTunnel, MaxMessageSizeLosslessVideo, OutChunkSize

Allow
Specifies whether or not to allow the "following and Location:" header that is sent with redirection of an HTTP
header. The default is true, allowing HTTP redirects.
Example
true

See also
Max, UnrestrictedAuth

AllowDebugDefault
Specifies the default value for application.allowDebug. This is an opening that allows debug connections on a per
application basis. The default value is false.
Example
false

See also
MaxPendingDebugConnections

AllowHTTPTunnel
This element configures the server to allow HTTP tunnelling connections into this application.

Last updated 8/21/2014

143

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

By default, Flash Player communicates with the server using the RTMP protocol over port 1935. If that fails, it will try
again over ports 443 and 80 in an attempt to get around firewall settings, which prevents TCP/IP connections over
nonstandard ports.
In some cases, Flash Player has to negotiate a connection to Adobe Media Server through an edge server, or use the
HTTP protocol to transmit RTMP packets (called HTTP tunnelling) if there is a firewall that allows only HTTP content
to be sent out to public servers.
The values for this element are described in the following table.
Value

Description

true

Allows tunnelling connections.

false

Disallows tunnelling connections.

http1.1only

Allows HTTP 1.1 connections only.

keepalive

Allows HTTP 1.0 and 1.1 keepalive connections.

Example
true>

See also
Allow

Application
This is the root element for Application.xml.
See also
Process, LoadOnStartup, MaxAppIdleTime, JSEngine, StreamManager, SharedObjManager, AllowHTTPTunnel,
Client, Debug, HTTP, SWFVerification

AssumeAbsoluteTime
Determines whether an incoming live stream has timestamps that are based on an absolute clock. An example of an
absolute clock is an SMPTE time signal that is contained within the encoder’s input source.
The default value is false.
Example
true

Availability
Flash Media Server 4

Audio
Container element.
The elements in this section specify the settings for audio streams on the server.

Last updated 8/21/2014

144

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Contained elements
CombineSamples, SendSilence

AutoCloseIdleClients
Container element.
Contains elements that determine whether or not to close idle clients automatically.
Set the enable attribute to true to close idle clients. If the enable attribute is omitted or set to false, the feature is
disabled. The default value is false.
A client is active when it is sending or receiving data. Use the AutoCloseIdleClients element to specify how often
the server should check for idle clients. When a client has been idle longer than the maximum idle time (60 seconds
by default), the server sends a status message to the NetConnectionobject (the client). The server closes the client
connection to the server and writes a message to the access log. The server also writes a message such as “Client x has
been idle for y seconds” in the core and event logs.
To configure the closing of idle connections, you must enable the feature in the Server.xml file. Once you enable the
feature in the Server.xml file, you can disable the feature for individual virtual hosts in the Vhost.xml files or for
individual applications in Application.xml. The values defined in the Vhost.xml configuration file apply to all clients
connected to the Vhost, unless values are defined in the Application.xml file. The Application.xml values override the
Vhost.xml values. (Subsequently, the values defined in the Server.xml configuration file apply to all clients connected
to the server, unless the values are defined in the Vhost.xml file. The Vhost.xml values override the Server.xml values.
Example

60
600


AudioSampleAccess
Allows the client application to access the raw uncompressed audio data in a stream. By default, this element is
disabled. To enable it, set the enable attribute to true. In the tag, specify a list of semicolon-delimited folders to which
client applications have access. When this element is enabled, all clients can access the audio data in streams in the
specified folders. To enable access to all audio data streamed by the server, specify / in the tag.
The folder path is restricted to the application’s streams folder or folders, so do not use absolute paths in the list of
folders.
While you can also enable access through Server-Side ActionScript, this element allows access to the data without
requiring Server-Side ActionScript. You can also override this element with the Access plug-in or Server-Side
ActionScript.
Example
If an application is configured to store streams in folders C:\low_quality and C:\high_quality, the configuration
to allow access to sample those streams is as follows:
low_quality;high_quality

See also
VideoSampleAccess

Last updated 8/21/2014

145

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

AutoCommit
Specifies whether shared objects are automatically committed when they have been changed. Setting this element to
false disables Flash Player function for all shared objects within this instance.
Note: If the AutoCommit function is disabled, the server-side script has to call the save function or the
SharedObject.commit command for the shared object to persist; otherwise, all data will be lost when the application is
shut down.
Example
true

See also
StorageDir, DuplicateDir, ResyncDepth, LockTimeout, MaxProperties, MaxPropertySize

Bandwidth
Container element.
The elements nested in this container specify the bandwidth settings for upstream (client-to-server) and downstream
(server-to-client) data.
By default, the Bandwidth element includes an override parameter set to yes, which allows the values for the
ClientToServer and ServerToClient elements to be overridden as well.
Contained elements
ClientToServer (Bandwidth), ServerToClient (Bandwidth)

BandwidthCap
Container element.
The elements in this section specify the bandwidth settings that a user can set. By default, this element includes an
override parameter set to yes, which allows the values for the ClientToServer and ServerToClient elements
nested in this section to be overridden, too.
Contained elements
ClientToServer (BandwidthCap), ServerToClient (BandwidthCap)

BandwidthDetection
Container element.
This element contains settings for how the server detects bandwidth. Set the enable attribute to true or false to turn
this feature on or off.
The server can detect client bandwidth in the core server code (native) or in a server-side script (script-based). Native
bandwidth detection is enabled by default and is faster than script-based because the core server code is written in C
and C++.
The server detects bandwidth by sending a series of data chunks to the client, each larger than the last. You can
configure the size of the data chunks, the rate at which they are sent, and the amount of time the server sends data to
the client.

Last updated 8/21/2014

146

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

The following table lists the values available for the BandwidthDetection element.
Element

Description

BandwidthDetection

Set the enabled attribute to true or false to turn this
feature on or off.

MaxRate

The maximum rate in Kbps at which the server sends data
to the client. The default value is -1, which sends the data at
whatever rate is necessary to measure bandwidth.

DataSize

The amount of data in bytes that the server sends to the
client. To detect the client’s bandwidth, the server attempts
to send a series of random blocks of data to the client, each
time sending this much more data. For example, x bytes are
sent, followed by 2x bytes, followed by 3x bytes, and so on
until MaxWait time has elapsed.

MaxWait

The number of seconds the server sends data to the client.
Increasing this number provides a more accurate
bandwidth figure but also forces the client to wait longer.

Example

-1
16384
2


Contained elements
MaxRate, DataSize, MinBufferTime (Live)

Bits
This element contains the settings for Flash Player on the Windows and Macintosh platforms.
Example
0x01
0x01

See also
UserAgent

BufferRatio
Specifies the ratio of the buffer length used by server-side stream to live buffer.
Example
0.5

See also
Server

Last updated 8/21/2014

147

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Cache
Container element; contains elements that configure the cache setting for SWF verification.
See also
TTL, UpdateInterval

CachePrefix
Specifies the cache prefix that is passed from the origin server to the edge server.
This element is set on the origin server. The edge server uses the value of this element as a relative path to locate the
cache file defined in the CacheDir element.
The type attribute provides additional specification for the cache prefix. The type attribute can be set to path or
sname. The default is path.
Examples


When the attribute type is path, the server appends the physical path of the recorded stream to the prefix.


When the attribute type is sname, the server appends the stream name to the prefix.
The cache prefix is any text with or without preset parameters. The prefix can be any name without special characters,
such as \, :, *, ?, ", <, >, |. All parameters are surrounded by “?”. The server substitutes the actual names for everything
specified within the “?”.
By default, the prefix is set to ?IP?.
Cache prefix

Actual name

?IP?

IP address of the server

?APP?

Application name

?APPINST?

Application instance

?VHOST?

vhost name

You can include the IP address in the prefix to avoid file collision. For example, the edge server might be connecting
to two different origin servers with the same file in c:\data\foo.flv. Adding the IP to the prefix for these files points each
file to the appropriate server.
If you want more than one origin server to share the cache file, do not include the IP as a parameter. Remember the
cache prefix is a relative path used by the edge server to look up the cache stream file.
Examples
The cache prefix creates a relative path in the edge’s CacheDir. All parameters are separated by \ or /.
c:\ams\flvs\foo.flv. data/?IP?

resolves to:
data/xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/c/ams/flvs/foo.flv
?APPINST?/data

Last updated 8/21/2014

148

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

resolves to:
app1/inst1/data/c/ams/flvs/foo.flv
origin1/data/

resolves to:
origin1/data/c/ams/flvs/foo.flv

See also
StorageDir, DuplicateDir, CacheUpdateInterval

CacheUpdateInterval
This element defines the wait interval for updating cache streaming in the edge server. The interval is defined in
milliseconds. The default value is 10 minutes. The minimum interval is 10 seconds. The maximum interval is 24 hours.
Example
10

See also
StorageDir, DuplicateDir, CachePrefix

Checkpoints
Many companies use statistics from the access log to bill customers. If your programming includes live events or 24/7
programming, the events you use to calculate billing might not occur within a billing cycle. To solve this problem, you
can enable checkpoint events. Checkpoint events log bytes periodically during an event. The following are available as
checkpoint events: connect-continue, play-continue, and publish-continue.
Logging checkpoint events to the Access log is enabled in the Vhost.xml file by default. You can disable logging
checkpoints for this application, or change the checkpoint interval of this application. If the checkpoint interval is not
specified in the Application.xml file, or if the value is invalid, the server uses the value set in the Vhost.xml file.
Contained elements
LogInterval

Client
Container element.
The elements nested within this container configure the client.
By default, the Client element includes an override="no" parameter. Individual applications cannot override how
the elements in the Client section are configured.
Contained elements
Bandwidth, BandwidthCap, BandwidthDetection, MsgQueue, HTTPTunnel, MaxMessageSizeLosslessVideo,
OutChunkSize

Client (RPC)
Lets you list methods allowed for client RPCs. If a method is not listed then it cannot be called.

Last updated 8/21/2014

149

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

To add methods, use a comma-delimited list of method names in the  sub-elements.
The default is to not allow any methods for client RPCs.
Contained elements
Method
Example






See also
NetConnection (RPC), Stream, SharedObject

Availability
Flash Media Server 4

ClientToServer (Bandwidth)
Specifies the bandwidth the client can use for sending data upstream to the server. The default bandwidth is 1,250,000
bytes per second.
You can configure this value in the Bandwidth section of XML and in the BandwidthCap section of XML. The values
in the Bandwidth section can be overridden, but the values in the BandwidthCap section are not. This allows ISPs to
host applications for customers and ensure that no customer abuses the bandwidth limit. For example, a customer can
set any bandwidth limit for their applications, but cannot exceed the caps set by the ISP.
Example
1250000

See also
ServerToClient (Bandwidth)

ClientToServer (BandwidthCap)
Specifies the maximum bandwidth a client can send to the server. The default bandwidth is 100,000,000 bytes per
second.
You can configure this value in the Bandwidth section of XML and in the BandwidthCap section of XML. The values
in the Bandwidth section can be overridden, but the values in the BandwidthCap section are not. This allows ISPs to
host applications for customers and ensure that no customer abuses the bandwidth limit. For example, a customer can
set any bandwidth limit for their applications, but cannot exceed the caps set by the ISP.
Example
100000000

See also
ServerToClient (BandwidthCap)

Last updated 8/21/2014

150

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

CombineSamples
Container element.
The server conserves system resources by combining sound samples. This strategy saves the CPU and bandwidth
overhead when transmitting individual audio packets only.
Note: Use this strategy of combining sound samples advisedly during periods of high CPU usage, as it can cause latency.
Contained elements
LoCPU, HiCPU, MaxSamples, Subscribers

ContentProtection
The enabled attribute can be set to "true", "false" or "allow". Content protected is enabled when the attribute is
set to "true", and disabled when set to "false". If enabled is set to "allow", settings in the Event.xml
ContentProtection section can override the ContentProtection section in the Application.xml file.








See also
Configuring content protection

Connections
Container element.
The elements in this section configure the HTTP connections for this application.
Contained elements
MaxTimeOut (Connections), Reuse, Interface

DataSize
Specifies the amount of data in bytes that the server sends to the client. To detect the client’s bandwidth, the server
attempts to send a series of random blocks of data to the client, each time sending this much more data. For example,
x bytes are sent, followed by 2x bytes, followed by 3x bytes, and so on until MaxWait time has elapsed.
Example
16384

See also
MaxRate, MinBufferTime (Live)

Debug
Container element.

Last updated 8/21/2014

151

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

The elements in this section configure debug connections, including the maximum number of connections and the
value for application.allowDebug.
Contained elements
AllowDebugDefault, MaxPendingDebugConnections

Diagnostic
Specifies whether diagnostic logging for the message queue is enabled. The default value is false.
See also
Enabled

DirLevelSWFScan
Specifies the number of levels of subfolders within a parent folder to scan for SWF files. The parent folder is specified
in the SWFFolder element.
Specifying a positive value scans that number of subfolder levels. Specifying zero scans the parent folder and no
subfolders. Specifying a negative value scans all subfolder levels. The default value is 1, which means that the server
scans only one subfolder level.
See also
SWFFolder, SWFVerification

DisallowedProtocols
Specifies which protocols cannot be used to connect to an application. Specify protocols in a comma delimited list. Any
protocol not specified is allowed. For example, the following disallows rtmp and rtmps connections:
rtmp,rtmps

The default value is blank, which allows all protocols to connect to the server.

Distribute
Specifies how to distribute application instances to processes. The default value is insts, meaning each application
instance runs in its own process. This tag contains a numprocs attribute, which specifies the maximum number of
processes to run concurrently. The default value of the numprocs attribute is 3.
This feature is turned on by default. To use this feature, the numprocs attribute must be set to a value higher than 0 or
1. With the default configuration, for all your applications and application instances under a single virtual host, three
core processes will run. Each virtual host is allotted three core processes, so systems that use multiple virtual hosts will
generate more running processes.
Note: There is no limit to the value of the numprocs attribute, but you should never need more than 40.
Scopes have an enclosing relationship with a strict ordering: adaptors contain virtual hosts, which contain
applications, which contain instances, which contain clients. The value of the Distribute tag must be a scope that is
lower in order than the value in the Scope tag. In other words, if the value of Scope is adaptor, the value of
Distribute can be vhosts, apps, insts, or clients. If the value of Scope is app, the value of Distribute can be
insts or clients. By default, the server uses the value immediately lower than the one specified in the Scope tag.

Last updated 8/21/2014

152

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

The following table lists the values available for the Distribute element:
Value

Description

vhosts

All instances of applications in a virtual host run together in a process.

apps

All instances of an application run together in a process.

insts

Each application instance runs in its own process. This is the default value. If you choose this value, you must also
set the Distribute numprocs attribute to a value greater than 1.

clients

Each client connection runs in its own process.
Use this value for stateless applications—applications that don’t require clients to interact with other clients and
don’t have clients accessing live streams. Most vod (video on demand) applications are stateless because each
client plays content independently of all other clients. Chat and gaming applications are not stateless because all
clients share the application state. For example, if a shared chat application were set to client, the messages
wouldn't reach everyone in the chat because they’d be split into separate processes.

Example


See also
Scope, LifeTime, MaxFailures, RecoveryTime

DuplicateDir
Note: This feature has been deprecated.
This is one of two DuplicateDir elements in the Application.xml file: one is in the SharedObjManager container and
one is in the StreamManager container.
Specifies the physical location where duplicate copies of shared objects or recorded streams are stored.
This location serves as a backup for shared object files and recorded stream files. This location must already exist when
a shared object is copied to it.
Example
To include the application name in the paths for the backup files, change the appName attribute to "true".
c:\backupSharedObjects
c:\backupStreams

See also
StorageDir

Duration
This element instructs the server how long, in seconds, to wait before it notifies the client when the audio has stopped
in the middle of a live or recorded audio stream.
The default wait time is 3 seconds. The minimum wait time is 1 second. There is effectively no maximum value (the
maximum is the maximum value of a 32-bit integer).
Example
3

Last updated 8/21/2014

153

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

See also
Password

Enabled
Specifies whether diagnostic logging for the message queue is enabled. The default value is false.
See also
Diagnostic

EnhancedSeek
This element enables or disables fine-tuning of the seeking performance within streams by creating a keyframe.
Keyframes improve the visual display of video files while seeking. When set to true, a new keyframe is dynamically
generated to provide smooth seeking to that index point.
Note: The server generates new keyframes for Sorenson Spark-encoded FLV files. For On2 VP6, the new keyframe is
calculated and generated in Flash Player 9a or later. For H.264-encoded video, the new keyframe is calculated and
generated in Flash Player 9 Update 3 or later.
The default value is true. The server does not insert keyframes and all seeks begin at the nearest existing keyframe.
Example
true

See also
KeyFrameInterval

EraseOnPublish
When set to true, the server erases a recorded stream when a publisher starts publishing a live stream with the same
name. By default, this setting is disabled and the server does not erase a recorded stream.
See also
Live (StreamManager)

EventsDir
The element /StreamManager/EventsDir specifies the physical location where Event information for live streaming
is stored, as in the following example:
c:\myapp\events\

See also
“StreamManager” on page 182

Exception
This element indicates that a specific user agent is an exception to authentication. Use the from and to attributes to
indicate the lowest and highest versions to except. This is a string comparison with editing to make all numeric fields
equal length.

Last updated 8/21/2014

154

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

For example, using a specific Flash Player will report WIN 9,0,28,0 as its UserAgent. Add To="WIN 9,0,28,0" and
From="WIN 9,0,28,0" and only that version is an exception.
See also
UserAgentExceptions

FileObject
Container element.
As of Flash Media Server 4.0, the FileObject element has an override attribute set to "no", by default. When
override="no", the applcation-level Application.xml file cannot override the VirtualDirectory settings for the
FileObject defined in a Vhost-level Application.xml file.
The VirtualDirectory element nested within this container configures the ScriptEngine file object settings.
Contained elements
VirtualDirectory

FinalHashTimeout
This element defines the maximum amount of time that a client can use to provide its final verification to the server.
See also
SWFVerification

FirstHashTimeout
This element defines the maximum amount of time that a client can use to provide its first verification to the server.
See also
SWFVerification

FlushOnData
Specifies whether the server flushes the message queue when a data message arrives. This element is important for
streaming data-only messages, so the server can send out the messages immediately. The default is true.
See also
Queue, MaxQueueSize, MaxQueueDelay, AccumulatedIFrames

FolderAccess
Configures the level of permission that the Access plug-in can set for accessing streams and shared objects. This allows
two levels of permissions: file-level access (a value of false), which allow access to a particular file only, and folderlevel access (a value of true), which allows access to a particular directory.
Example
false

Last updated 8/21/2014

155

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

See also
Access

GroupControl
Settings within the GroupControl section control server-side functionality corresponding to the server channel. A
server channel is a channel that clients within a Flash Group can open to the server. The presence of a server channel
depends on serverChannelEnabled=true for the GroupSpecifier used to generate the groupspec value to join a
Flash Group.
See also
JoinLeaveEvents

HDS
Container for configurations for HTTP Dynamic Streaming.
Contained Elements
“Recording (HDS)” on page 175
“ContentProtection” on page 151

HiCPU
This element instructs the server to start combining samples when CPU utilization is higher than the specified
percentage of CPU resources. The default percentage of utilization is 80.
Example
80

See also
Subscribers, LoCPU, MaxSamples

Host
This element identifies the HTTP proxy. The value of the Host element can be the host name or an IP address. The
port number can also be specified in the Port element.
Example
www.example.com:8080

See also
Port, Type, Tunnel, Username, Password

HTTP
Container element.
The elements in this section configure the HTTP connection settings for this application.

Last updated 8/21/2014

156

157

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Contained elements
HTTP1_0, Verbose, Connections, Proxy, Redirect

HTTP1_0
This element determines whether or not the server can use the HTTP 1.0 protocol. The default is false, disallowing
the use of the HTTP 1.0 protocol.
Example
false

See also
HTTP, Verbose, Connections, Proxy, Redirect

HTTPTunnel
Container element.
The elements nested within this container configure the parameters for HTTP tunnelling (sending RTMP packets
through HTTP).
The tunnelling protocol is based on the client continuously polling the server. The frequency of polling affects both
network performance and the efficiency of the HTTP protocol. The IdleAckInterval and IdlePostInterval
elements control the polling frequency on a per-client basis. Selecting too small a delay value for the above parameters
will increase the polling frequency and reduce network performance and efficiency. Selecting too high values can
adversely affect the interactivity of the application and the server.
The Application.xml configuration file offers three settings for these parameters. The following table presents these
settings.
Acceptable Latency

IdlePostInterval

IdleAckInterval

Low

128 milliseconds

256 milliseconds

Medium

512 milliseconds

512 milliseconds

High

1024 milliseconds

2048 milliseconds

Example

512
512
application/x-fcs
16


Contained elements
IdlePostInterval, IdleAckInterval, MimeType, WriteBufferSize

IdleAckInterval
Specifies the maximum time the server may wait before it sends back an ack (acknowledgement code) for an idle post
sent by the client.

Last updated 8/21/2014

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

The server may respond sooner than the value of this element if it has data to send back to the client or if some other
client is being blocked by the current idle request.
This interval implies that the client may not be able to reach the server for the selected duration. The interval cannot
be set to a negative value.
The default interval is 512 milliseconds.
Example
512

See also
IdlePostInterval, MimeType, WriteBufferSize

IdlePostInterval
Specifies how long Flash Player should wait before sending an idle post to the server.
Idle posts are sent when Flash Player has no data to send, but posting is necessary to provide the server with an
opportunity to send data downstream to the client.
The interval for an idle post ranges from 0 to 4064 milliseconds. If the IdlePostInterval element is set to a value
that lies outside of this range, the default value of 512 milliseconds is used.
Note: At times, the server will not be able to send any data to the client for the selected duration.
Example
512

See also
IdleAckInterval, MimeType, WriteBufferSize

Interface
This element defines the name to use as the outgoing network interface.
The name can be an interface name, an IP address, or a host name.
Example
www.example.com

See also
MaxTimeOut (Connections), Reuse

Interval
Specifies the interval in milliseconds for sending silence messages when no audio is being published to a live stream.
Silence messages are used to support older versions of Flash Player. The server only sends the silence message to clients
specified in the UserAgent element in the Client section. Bit-flag 0x01 is used to control the silence message.
The default interval is 3 seconds. Set this to 0 to disable silence message transmission.

Last updated 8/21/2014

158

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Example
3

See also
SendSilence

JoinLeaveEvents
Flash Media Server 4.5
The JoinLeaveEvents element controls whether events for clients that join or leave a Group are dispatched to serverside script or handled internally. This element has a mode attribute with the following possible values:
None (default)—All Group join and leave events are handled internally at this Adobe Media Server node.
All—All Group join and leave events are dispatched to the server-side script.

See also
PeerLookupEvents

JSEngine
Availability
Flash Communication Server 1.
In Flash Media Server 4, this element is deprecated. See ScriptEngine.
Availability
Container element.
The elements nested within this container configure the JavaScript engine.
Inside the JSEngine element, you can define properties for the server-side Application object. Defining properties in
the default Application.xml file creates properties available for all applications on a virtual host. Defining properties
in an Application.xml file in an application folder creates properties available for that application only.
To define a property, create an XML tag. The property name corresponds to the tag’s name, and the property value
corresponds to the tag’s contents.
Example
The following XML fragment defines the properties user_name and dept_name, with the values jdoe and
engineering, respectively:


jdoe
engineering



To access the property in server-side code, use the syntax in either of these examples:
application.config.prop_name
application.config["prop_name"]

Last updated 8/21/2014

159

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Note: The properties you define are accessible from application.config.property, not from
application.property.
Contained elements
RuntimeSize, MaxGCSkipCount, MaxTimeOut (JSEngine and ScriptEngine), ScriptLibPath, FileObject,
XMLSocket, NetConnection (ScriptEngine)

KeyFrameInterval
This element defines how often to generate and save keyframes in an FLV file.
The initial value is 60000, which is the recommended value. However, if this tag is unspecified or set to a value out of
range, the server uses a default value of 1000. Setting this element to a higher value than the initial value reduces the
number of keyframes added to the FLV file and thus reduces the file size. Setting a higher value for the interval,
however, reduces the seeking accuracy. The value of this element is defined in milliseconds.
For example, a 15-second video with a file size of 76 KB is increased only to 89 KB when the KeyFrameInterval
element is set to 5000, which is an increase of 13 KB, or 17%. The same video has a size of 109 KB with the
KeyFrameInterval element set to 1000, which is an increase of 33 KB, or 43%.
Note: Be aware of the correlation between file size and accuracy of seeking when you set this value.
Example
1000

See also
StorageDir, DuplicateDir, CacheUpdateInterval

LifeTime
Container element.
This element determines the lifetime of core processes. To roll over such processes, set this element to a nonzero value.
Process rollover happens only when the Scope element is set to inst.
Contained elements
MaxCores, RollOver

Live (StreamManager)
Container element.
The elements nested within this container configure the intermediate frames in a live stream and the message queue,
and the amount of time the server waits before allowing another publisher to take over a live stream.
Contained elements
AccumulatedIFrames, Queue, PublishTimeout, StartClockOnPublish, MaxLatency, EraseOnPublish,
AssumeAbsoluteTime

Last updated 8/21/2014

160

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Live (MsgQueue)
Container element.
The elements nested within this container configure live audio.
Contained elements
MaxAudioLatency, MinBufferTime (Live)

LoadOnStartup
This element determines whether or not the server loads an application instance when the server starts.
Having an application instance loaded at server start-up saves time when the first client connects to that application.
The default value is false.
If you set this element to true, an instance of each application on the server will be loaded at start-up.
Example
false

See also
Process, MaxAppIdleTime, JSEngine, StreamManager

LockTimeout
Specifies the timeout value before automatically unlocking a shared object if there is a client waiting for an update. The
timeout value is specified in seconds. The default value is -1, which instructs the server to wait for an indefinite time.
Example
-1

See also
StorageDir, DuplicateDir, ResyncDepth, AutoCommit, MaxProperties, MaxPropertySize

LoCPU
This element instructs the server to stop combining samples when CPU utilization is lower than the specified
percentage of CPU resources. The default percentage of utilization is 60.
Example
60

See also
Subscribers, HiCPU, MaxSamples

Logging
A container element.
Contains elements that control the server logs.

Last updated 8/21/2014

161

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Contained elements
Access (Logging)

LogInterval
The interval at which the server logs checkpoint events.
See also
Checkpoints

Max
This element defines the maximum number of redirects allowed.
See also
Allow

MaxAggMsgSize
Specifies the maximum size in bytes of the aggregate messages created from the message queue, when aggregate
messages are enabled. The default value is 4096.
See also
Queue, MaxQueueSize, MaxQueueDelay, FlushOnData, AccumulatedIFrames

MaxAppIdleTime
Specifies the maximum time an application instance can remain idle with no clients connected before it is unloaded
from the server’s memory.
An application instance is evaluated as idle after all clients disconnect from it. If the application instance is loaded with
no clients connected, it is not evaluated as idle.
The maximum idle time is specified, in seconds. The default is 600 seconds (10 minutes).
Example
600

See also
Process, LoadOnStartup, JSEngine, StreamManager, ApplicationGC

MaxAudioLatency
Specifies that live audio should be dropped if audio exceeds the time specified. Time is expressed in milliseconds.
Example
2000

See also
MinBufferTime (Live)

Last updated 8/21/2014

162

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

MaxBufferRetries
Specifies the maximum number of attempts to start buffering stream data. This configuration tag prevents the server
from indefinitely trying to buffer data that is never delivered by the origin server. It is only applicable in edge servers.
The default value of 128 is sufficient in most cases.
Example
128

See also
StorageDir, DuplicateDir, CachePrefix, CacheUpdateInterval

MaxCores
The value of this element determines how many core processes can exist for an application.
By default, the MaxCores function is disabled. The default value is zero. For more information on setting the maximum
number of core processes, see “Configure how applications are assigned to server processes” on page 28.
Example
0

See also
LifeTime, RollOver

MaxDuration
Specifies the maximum duration, in seconds, of a recorded file. The value 0 disables recording. The value -1 means
there is no maximum duration. The default value is -1.
Set this parameter when you deploy a DVR application to prevent the disk from exceeding its capacity.
Note: The F_STREAM_RECORD_MAXDURATION field in the Authorization plug-in can override this value.
See also
MaxDurationCap, MaxSizeCap, MaxSize (Recording)

MaxDurationCap
Specifies the cap on the maximum duration (in seconds) of a recorded file. Values set in the MaxDuration element or
in Server-Side ActionScript cannot exceed this value. Setting the value 0 disables recording. Setting the value -1
removes the maximum duration cap. The default value is -1.
This element allows ISPs to host applications for customers and ensure that no customer abuses the MaxDuration
limit. For example, a customer can set any MaxDuration for their applications, but cannot exceed the
MaxDurationCap set by the ISP.
Note: The F_STREAM_RECORD_MAXDURATION field in the Authorization plug-in can override this value.
See also
MaxDuration, MaxSizeCap, MaxSize (Recording)

Last updated 8/21/2014

163

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

MaxGCSkipCount
Specifies the maximum number of times that the server will skip garbage collection (GC) when the JS engine is busy.
This element determines the frequency of the garbage collection process.
By default, the server only performs GC when the JS engine is not busy. However, the JS engine does not necessarily
perform GC when it is busy, so in some cases you must force the server to perform GC regardless of the JS engine state.
If MaxGCSkipCount is set to 0, the server forces a GC regardless of the JS engine state. If MaxGCSkipCount is set to a
positive value, the server forces a GC when the skip count exceeds the value in MaxGCSkipCount.
Example
-1

See also
RuntimeSize, MaxTimeOut (JSEngine and ScriptEngine), ScriptLibPath,FileObject, XMLSocket,
NetConnection (ScriptEngine)

MaxFailures
The value of this element determines the maximum number of core process failures that can occur before a core
process is disabled.
Once the core processes are disabled, the server does not launch a core process until some minimum recovery time has
elapsed. Having a time lag for recovery avoids a denial-of-service action, which can happen when a faulty core
consumes all CPU resources by repeatedly launching itself.
Example
2

See also
Scope, Distribute, LifeTime, RecoveryTime

MaxIdleTime
The maximum time a client can be idle before the server closes the connection. This value is set in the Server.xml file
by default. You can set the value in the Vhost.xml file to override the value set in the Server.xml file. You can set the
value in the Application.xml file to override the value set in the Vhost.xml file.
See also
AutoCloseIdleClients

MaxInitDelay
The maximum number of seconds used to process SWF files. The default value is 5 seconds.
Example
5

Example
SWFVerification

Last updated 8/21/2014

164

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

MaxLatency
The maximum latency, in milliseconds, of incoming messages in a live stream. When a server-side script injects a data
message into a live stream, this setting determines the timestamp of the message. If the injection time is larger than
MaxLatency, the server adds the time difference between the last message time and the injection time to the timestamp
of the data message. Otherwise, the timestamp is the last message time. The default value is 500. The minimum value is 0.
See also
Live (StreamManager)

MaxMessageSizeLosslessVideo
Specifies the maximum size of messages for screen-sharing packets.
Example
0

See also
OutChunkSize, AccumulatedIFrames, Access, UserAgent

MaxPendingDebugConnections
Specifies the maximum number of pending debug connections. The default is 50. (If the number is set to 0, debugging
connections are disabled.)
Once the specified number is reached, the oldest pending debug connection is rejected to create space.
Example
50

See also
AllowDebugDefault

MaxProperties
The maximum number of properties for each shared object. To specify unlimited, use -1.
Example
-1

See also
StorageDir, DuplicateDir, ResyncDepth, LockTimeout, AutoCommit, MaxPropertySize

MaxPropertySize
The maximum size in bytes for each property of a shared object. To specify unlimited size, use -1.
Example
-1

Last updated 8/21/2014

165

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

See also
StorageDir, DuplicateDir, ResyncDepth, LockTimeout, AutoCommit, MaxProperties

MaxQueueDelay
Specifies how often the server will flush the message queue, in milliseconds. The default value is 500 milliseconds.
See also
Queue, MaxQueueSize, FlushOnData, AggregateMessages (Queue)

MaxQueueSize
Specifies how often the server will flush the message queue, in bytes. A value of 0 disables queuing. The default value
is 4096.
See also
Queue, MaxQueueDelay, FlushOnData, AggregateMessages (Queue)

MaxRate
Specifies the maximum rate in Kbps at which the server sends data to the client. The default value of -1 sends the data
at whatever rate is necessary to measure bandwidth without throttling.
Example
-1

See also
DataSize, MinBufferTime (Live)

MaxSamples
Specifies how many sound samples can be combined into one message.
The default number of samples is 4.
See also
Audio

MaxSize (AccumulatedIFrames)
Specifies the maximum size, in kilobytes, of intermediate frames that a live stream can hold in the buffer.
The buffer contains a history of the video messages up to the last keyframe. This enables clients to catch up to the latest
message even if they join between keyframes. If the buffer size is larger than MaxSize, the server clears the messages.
This setting prevents the buffer from growing too large and should be set larger than the total size of intermediate
frames between keyframes. A default value of -1 means the size of intermediate frames is unlimited.
Example
-1

Last updated 8/21/2014

166

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

See also
Subscribers, LoCPU, HiCPU

MaxSize (Recording)
Specifies the maximum size, in kilobytes, of a recorded file. The value -1 means there is no maximum size. The value
0 disables recording. The default value is -1.
Set this parameter when you deploy a DVR application to prevent the disk from exceeding its capacity.
Note: The F_STREAM_RECORD_MAXSIZE field in the Authorization plug-in can override this value.
See also
MaxSizeCap, MaxDuration, MaxDurationCap

MaxSizeCap
Specifies the maximum size cap, in kilobytes, of a recorded file. The value -1 means there is no maximum size. The
value 0 disables recording. The default value is -1.
This element allows ISPs to host applications for customers and ensure that no customer abuses the MaxSize limit.
For example, a customer can set any MaxSize for their applications, but cannot exceed the MaxSizeCap set by the ISP.
Note: The F_STREAM_RECORD_MAXSIZE field in the Authorization plug-in can override this value.
See also
MaxSize (Recording), MaxDuration, MaxDurationCap

MaxStreamsBeforeGC
Specifies that garbage collection (GC) should be forced if the stream list grows over the set value. The default value is
-1 (unlimited). GC occurs during the application GC interval.
Example
-1

See also
StorageDir, DuplicateDir, CachePrefix, CacheUpdateInterval, MaxBufferRetries

MaxTime
Specifies the maximum duration, in seconds, of intermediate frames that a live stream can hold in the buffer.
The buffer contains a history of the video messages up to the last keyframe. This enables clients to catch up to the latest
message even if they join between keyframes. If the duration in the buffer is larger than the MaxTime, the server clears
the messages. This setting prevents the buffer from growing too large and should be set larger than the keyframe
interval. The default value of -1 means the duration is unlimited.
Example
-1

Last updated 8/21/2014

167

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

See also
RuntimeSize, MaxGCSkipCount, ScriptLibPath, FileObject, XMLSocket, NetConnection (ScriptEngine)

MaxTimeOut (Connections)
This element defines the maximum time for a transfer to be completed. The default time is 60 seconds.
Operations such as DNS lock-ups may take more time. If the value of this element is too low, the risk of aborting
correctly functioning operations increases.
Example
60

See also
Reuse, Interface

MaxTimeOut (JSEngine and ScriptEngine)
Note: In Flash Media Server 4, the JSEngine element is deprecated and replaced by the ScriptEngine element.
The maximum time, in seconds, a script can take to execute a JavaScript (Server-Side ActionScript) function. If its
execution takes longer than the maximum allowed time, then the script is evaluated as a runaway script and its
execution is terminated. Setting a maximum time to execute a script prevents infinite looping in scripts.
The default value is 0 and no checks are performed to detect runaway scripts. This setting may be useful in a debugging
environment. In a production environment, after the applications and scripts have been thoroughly tested, you should
set this element to a more realistic value that does not impose limits on the time scripts take to execute.
Example
0

See also
RuntimeSize, MaxGCSkipCount, ScriptLibPath,FileObject, XMLSocket, NetConnection (ScriptEngine)

MaxUnprocessedChars
Specifies how much data can be received from an XML server (without receiving an end tag) before XMLSocket closes
the connection. This can be overridden by each XMLSocket by specifying the property XML.maxUnprocessedChars,
but that number cannot exceed the number specified in this element.
Example
4096

See also
XMLSocket

MaxUrlLength
Defines the maximum URL lengths, in bytes. Most modern browsers support up to 64KB URLs. The default value is
32KB. The maximum allowable value is 1000KB.

Last updated 8/21/2014

168

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Use this element to restrict the lengths of outgoing SSAS-initiated NetConnection URLs. For incoming requests, use
the MaxUrlLength element in the Server.xml file.
Example
65536

See also
Security

MaxWait
This element specifies the number of seconds to wait before the server sends data to the client.
Increasing this number provides a more accurate bandwidth figure, but it also forces the client to wait longer.
Example
4096

See also
MaxRate, DataSize

MimeType
Specifies the default MIME (Multi-purpose Internet Mail Extensions) type header sent on tunnel responses.
The server generally uses the MIME type specified by the incoming requests. The server will use the entry for the
MIMEType element only when it is unable to determine the MIME type from the incoming requests.
Example
application/x-fcs

See also
IdleAckInterval, IdlePostInterval, WriteBufferSize

MinBufferTime (Live)
Specifies the default buffer length in milliseconds for the live audio and video queue.
Example
2000

See also
MaxAudioLatency

MinBufferTime (Recorded)
Specifies the default buffer length in milliseconds for audio and video. The value cannot be set below this by Flash
Player.

Last updated 8/21/2014

169

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Example
2000

See also
Recorded

MinGoodVersion
Specifies the minimum accepted version of SWF verification allowed by the server. The default value is 0, which allows
the current and all future versions.
Example
0

See also
SWFFolder, UserAgentExceptions

MinQueuedVideo
The minimum number of video messages to queue at the start of a stream. Streams that use H.264 or any other
pipelined codec need messages to begin playback. This setting ensures that regardless of the buffer setting there are
enough messages to begin playback quickly. Setting this value to less than 64 may cause content with a low FPS to delay
before starting. The default value is 64.
See also
Server

MsgQueue
Container element.
The elements nested within this container configure live and recorded audio.
Contained elements
Live (MsgQueue), Recorded, Server

NetConnection (ScriptEngine)
Container element.
The element nested within this container specifies object encoding to use for Server-Side ActionScript NetConnection.
Contained elements
ObjectEncoding

NetConnection (RPC)
Lets you list methods allowed for NetConnection RPCs. Any method not listed is blocked.
When a client creates a NetConnection object and attempts to call an SSAS Client class method with that object, the
method must be explicitly allowed in this section for the call to succeed.

Last updated 8/21/2014

170

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

To add methods, use a comma-delimited list of method names in the  sub-elements.
The default is to allow the onStatus method for NetConnection RPCs.
Contained elements
Method

Example


onStatus



See also
Stream, SharedObject, Client (RPC)
Availability
Flash Media Server 4

NotifyAudioStop
Container element.
The Duration element nested within this container determines whether or not the server is notified when an audio
transmission ending on a stream is encountered.
Example


Contained elements
Duration

ObjectEncoding
Specifies the default object encoding to use for SSAS NetConnection. This can be AMF0 or AMF3. The default is AMF3.
The default can be overridden for each individual NetConnection by setting the NetConnection.objectEncoding
property to either 0 for AMF0 or 3 for AMF3.
Example
AMF3

See also
NetConnection (ScriptEngine)

Last updated 8/21/2014

171

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

OutChunkSize
Specifies the RTMP chunk size in bytes to use in all streams for this application. The server breaks stream content into
chunks of this size. Larger values reduce CPU usage but cause larger writes that can delay other content on lower
bandwidth connections. This can have a minimum value of 128 bytes and a maximum value of 65536 bytes. The
default value is 4096.
Note that older clients might not support chunk sizes larger than 1024 bytes. If the chunk setting is larger than these
clients can support, the chunk setting is capped at 1024 bytes.
Example
4096

See also
Bandwidth, BandwidthCap, BandwidthDetection, MsgQueue, HTTPTunnel, MaxMessageSizeLosslessVideo

OverridePublisher
Deprecated; see the PublishTimeout element.
Specifies whether a second client is able to take over the ownership of a live stream when the stream is already
published by another client. The default value is false. If set to true, add application logic to avoid stream name
collision.
Example
true

See also
Audio, Live (StreamManager), SendDuplicateStart, SendDuplicateOnMetaData

Password
Specifies the password for connecting to the proxy.
See also
Host, Port, Type, Tunnel, Username

PeerLookupEvents
Flash Media Server 4.5
In a peer-assisted networking application, use this element to configure how the server handles peer lookup events.
RTMFP clients establish direct peer-to-peer connections through the use of NetStream DIRECT_CONNECTIONS and
peerIDs, or by using NetGroup to join a Flash Group where clients can be automatically bootstrapped to neighbors or
can manually initiate connections to them. The process of establishing a peer-to-peer connection begins with the
initiating client sending a peer lookup request to the server. These events are processed differently depending upon the
mode attribute.
The following are possible values of the mode attribute:

Last updated 8/21/2014

172

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Value

Description

None

The default value. Lookup events are handled by the server. You cannot use Server-Side
ActionScript to distribute peer introductions or filter peer introductions.

Partial

The server automatically handles peer lookup events for clients connected to the same
core process. Developers must handle other peer lookup events with Server-Side
ActionScript.

All

Developers must handle all lookup events in Server-Side ActionScript.

To filter peer lookup requests, set  to All:

...



...


To distribute introductions across multiple servers, set mode to Partial or All.
For more information, see Filter introduction requests and Build peer-assisted networking applications to run on
multiple servers.

Port
Specifies the proxy port to connect to if the port is not specified as part of the host in the Host element.
See also
Host, Password, Type, Tunnel, Username

Prioritization
Specifies whether outgoing messages are prioritized by message type when sending across a server-to-server
connection. This setting is relevant for multi-point publishing. By default, prioritization is set to false, which is the
correct setting to avoid possible latency when server-side NetStream objects are used to publish messages to remote
servers. Messages are sent out through one channel and all messages have the same priority.
If the value is set to true, the server sends messages through multiple channels and prioritizes messages based on the
message type, as follows (where 1 has the highest priority):
1 Data
2 Audio
3 Video

See also
Server

Process
Container element.
The elements nested within this container determine how a core process is managed.

Last updated 8/21/2014

173

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

The following table lists descriptions of the contained elements.
Value

Description

Scope

Specifies the level at which application instances are assigned to core processes. Scopes have an enclosing
relationship with a strict ordering: adaptors contain virtual hosts, which contain applications, which contain
instances, which contain clients.

Distribute

Specifies how to distribute application instances to processes. The value of the Distribute tag must be a scope
that is lower in order than the value in the Scope tag (for example, if the value of Scope is adaptor, the value of
Distribute can be vhosts, apps, insts, or clients). Distribution may be turned off by setting numproc to
0 or 1.

LifeTime

Specifies the lifetime of core processes. Process rollover happens only when the Scope element is set to inst.

MaxFailures

The value for this element determines the maximum number of core process failures that can occur before a core
process is disabled.

RecoveryTime

Specifies the recovery time for a core.

Contained elements
Scope, Distribute, LifeTime, MaxFailures, RecoveryTime,

Proxy
Container element.
The elements nested within this container configure the HTTP Proxy settings.
Contained elements
Host, Port, Type, Tunnel, Username, Password

PublishTimeout
Specifies how long in milliseconds the server waits to receive a response from a publisher when another client tries to
publish to the same stream.
If a client tries to publish to the same live stream that is being published by another client, Adobe Media Server pings
the first publisher and waits to receive a response. If the first publisher fails to respond within the time specified in this
tag, the server allows the second publisher to take over the live stream. The default value is 2000 milliseconds. To
prevent the server from pinging the first client, disable this setting by setting the value of the tag to -1.
This tag replaces the OverridePublisher tag.

QualifiedStreamsMapping
Enables mapping of virtual stream paths to different physical locations. This tag is applicable when using the
Authorization plug-in.
When a client requests to play a stream, an E_FILENAME_TRANSFORM event occurs in the Authorization plug-in. You
can map the stream differently for each client in the F_STREAM_PATH property of your Authorization plug-in code.
For example, suppose client 1 and client 2 both request to play myStream.flv. You can remap the stream to
c:\video1\myStream.flv for client 1 and c:\video2\myStream.flv for client 2.

Last updated 8/21/2014

174

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Queue
Container element; contains elements that configure the settings of the message queue. A message queue is used to
buffer incoming messages from the publisher so that the server can send messages in chunks to the subscribers. You
can disable queuing so that individual messages are immediately sent to subscribers. To disable queuing, set the
enabled attribute to false.
Contained elements
MaxQueueSize, MaxQueueDelay, FlushOnData, AggregateMessages (Queue)

Recorded
Container element.
The element nested within this container specifies the ratio of buffer length used by the server-side stream to the live
buffer.
Contained elements
MinBufferTime (Recorded)

Recording (HDS)
Container for configurations for HTTP Dynamic Streaming.
Contained Elements
“ContentProtection” on page 151

Recording (StreamManager)
Container element.
The elements nested within this container specify the duration and file size of files recorded by the server.
Contained elements
MaxDuration, MaxDurationCap, MaxSize (Recording), MaxSizeCap

RecoveryTime
Specifies the recovery time for a core.
The server will not launch a core process until some minimum recovery time has elapsed. The time lag for recovery
can avoid a denial-of-service action, which happens when a faulty core process consumes all CPU time by repeatedly
launching itself.
The recovery time for a core process is specified, in seconds. A value of 0 disables any checking for process failures.
Note: Loading an application with Adobe Media Administration Server tools or APIs bypasses this check.
Example
300

See also
Scope, Distribute, LifeTime, MaxFailures

Last updated 8/21/2014

175

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Redirect
Container element.
The elements nested within this container configure the settings for redirecting the HTTP connection.
Contained elements
Allow, Max, UnrestrictedAuth

ResyncDepth
This element instructs the server to resynchronize a shared object file. The shared object is resynchronized when its
version number is greater than the head version minus the current version. The default value of -1 sends a
resynchronized version of the file with every connection.
Example
-1

See also
StorageDir, DuplicateDir, LockTimeout, AutoCommit, MaxProperties, MaxPropertySize

Reuse
This element configures whether or not the server explicitly closes the HTTP connection after each transfer. The
default is to reuse connections. Set this to false to use a new connection after every transfer.
Example
true

See also
MaxTimeOut (Connections), Interface

RollOver
Specifies how many seconds a core process can be in use before the server creates a new core process.
After the time limit for a core is reached, a new core is instantiated. All subsequent connections are directed to the new
core.
The rollover functionality is disabled by default. The default value is 0 (seconds). For more information on rollover
processes, see “Configure how applications are assigned to server processes” on page 28.
Example
0

See also
MaxCores

Last updated 8/21/2014

176

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

RPC
Configures RPCs (remote procedure calls) for each class. By default, all methods are rejected. Only methods that are
explicitly listed for each class are allowed. This whitelisting approach is more secure than a blacklist.
Contained Elements
NetConnection (RPC), Stream, SharedObject, Client (RPC)

Availability
Flash Media Server 4

RTMFP
This section provides the means to control the behavior of application-specific RTMFP functionality.
Contained Elements
“GroupControl” on page 156
“JoinLeaveEvents” on page 159
“PeerLookupEvents” on page 172

RuntimeSize
Specifies the maximum size in kilobytes that an application instance can use to run Server-Side ActionScript code
before the server removes unreferenced and unused JavaScript objects.
The default size is 1024 kilobytes, which is the equivalent of 1 megabyte. The lower limit is 10 kilobytes. There is no
upper limit. The default value applies when the engine size lies outside of these limits.
If your application consumes a significant amount of memory, you must increase the engine size. If you create a new
script object that will cause the runtime size of the application instance to exceed the value of this element, an out-ofmemory error occurs and the application instance is shut down. In most cases, increasing the engine size to 30720 (30
MB) is sufficient to run intensive Server-Side ActionScript operations.
Example
1024

See also
MaxGCSkipCount, MaxTimeOut (JSEngine and ScriptEngine), ScriptLibPath, FileObject, XMLSocket,
NetConnection (ScriptEngine)

Scope
This element determines the level at which application instances are assigned to core processes.
Starting Adobe Media Server starts a process called AMSMaster.exe (Windows) or amsmaster (Linux). Application
instances run in processes called AMSCore.exe (Windows) amscore (Linux). The master process is a monitor that
starts core processes when necessary. Only one master process can run at a time, but many core processes can run at
the same time.
Settings in an Application.xml file in a virtual host folder apply to all applications running in that virtual host. Settings
made in an Application.xml file in an application’s folder apply only to that application.
The following table lists the values available for the Scope element.

Last updated 8/21/2014

177

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Value

Description

adaptor

All application instances in an adaptor run together in a process.

vhost

All application instances in a virtual host run together in a process. This is the default value.

app

All instances of a single application run together in a process.

inst

Each application instance runs in its own process. If you choose this value, you must also set the Distribute
numprocs attribute to a value greater than 1.

Example
vhost

See also
Distribute, LifeTime, MaxFailures, RecoveryTime

ScriptEngine
Availability
Flash Media Server 4
Replaces the JSEngine element.
Description
Container element.
The elements nested within this container configure the server-side script engine.
Inside the ScriptEngine element, you can define properties for the server-side Application object. Defining
properties in the default Application.xml file creates properties available for all applications on a virtual host. Defining
properties in an Application.xml file in an application folder creates properties available for that application only.
To define a property, create an XML tag. The property name corresponds to the tag’s name, and the property value
corresponds to the tag’s contents.
Example
The following XML fragment defines the properties user_name and dept_name, with the values jdoe and
engineering, respectively:


jdoe
engineering



To access the property in server-side code, use the syntax in either of these examples:
application.config.prop_name
application.config["prop_name"]

Note: The properties you define are accessible from application.config.property, not from
application.property.

Last updated 8/21/2014

178

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Contained elements
AdaptorId, RuntimeSize, MaxGCSkipCount, MaxTimeOut (JSEngine and ScriptEngine), ScriptLibPath,
FileObject, XMLSocket, NetConnection (ScriptEngine), Security

ScriptLibPath
A list of paths delimited by semicolons instructing the server where to look for server-side scripts loaded into a
main.asc file with the load() method.
These paths are used to resolve a script file that is loaded with the load API. The server first looks in the location where
the main.asc or application_name.asc file is located. If the script file is not found there, the script engine searches, in
sequence, the list of paths specified in this element.
Example
${APP.JS_SCRIPTLIBPATH}

See also
RuntimeSize, MaxGCSkipCount, MaxTimeOut (JSEngine and ScriptEngine), FileObject, XMLSocket,
NetConnection (ScriptEngine)

Security
Container element.
Contains elements that define security features for the application.
Contained elements
MaxUrlLength, RPC
Availability
Flash Media Server 4

SendDuplicateOnMetaData
Specifies whether an onMetaData message is sent at the beginning of video files when the play and seek commands are
called. The default value is true.
The following values are available:

•

true sends onMetaData for the play and seek commands.

•

false sends onMetaData for play only.

•

once falls back to Flash Media Server 1.x behavior and sends onMetaData based on the start position, regardless of

the command. If no onMetaData is found at the start position, no onMetaData is sent.
Example
true

See also
SendDuplicateStart

Last updated 8/21/2014

179

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

SendDuplicateStart
Specifies whether status message NetStream.Play.Start is sent for all commands, including play, seek, and unpause.
If set to false, only the play command receives the start message.
Example
true

See also
SendDuplicateOnMetaData, OverridePublisher

SendSilence
Container element.
The Interval element nested within this container configures the settings for sending silent messages.
Contained elements
Interval

Server
Container element.
Contains two elements: BufferRatio, which specifies the ratio of the buffer length used by the server-side stream to
the live buffer, and Prioritization, which specifies whether to prioritize outgoing messages for server-to-server
connections.
Contained elements
BufferRatio, Prioritization

ServerToClient (Bandwidth)
Specifies the bandwidth in bytes per second that the server can use for sending data downstream to the client.
The default bandwidth is 250,000 bytes per second.
You can configure this value in the Bandwidth section of XML and in the BandwidthCap section of XML. The values
in the Bandwidth section can be overridden, but the values in the BandwidthCap section are not. This allows ISPs to
host applications for customers and ensure that no customer abuses the bandwidth limit. For example, a customer can
set any bandwidth limit for their applications, but cannot exceed the caps set by the ISP.
Example
250000

See also
ClientToServer (Bandwidth)

ServerToClient (BandwidthCap)
Specifies the maximum bandwidth in bytes per second that the server can use for sending data downstream to the
client.

Last updated 8/21/2014

180

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

The default bandwidth is 10,000,000 bytes per second.
You can configure this value in the Bandwidth section of XML and in the BandwidthCap section of XML. The values
in the Bandwidth section can be overridden, but the values in the BandwidthCap section can not. This allows ISPs to
host applications for customers and ensure that no customer abuses the bandwidth limit. For example, a customer can
set any bandwidth limit for their applications, but cannot exceed the caps set by the ISP.
Example
10000000

See also
ClientToServer (BandwidthCap)

SharedObject
Lets you list methods allowed for SharedObject RPCs. Any method not explicitly listed here is blocked.
If a client subscribes to a remote SharedObject and tries to call remote methods on SSAS using the SO.send() method,
the method must be explicitly listed here to succeed.
To add methods, use a comma-delimited list of method names in the  sub-elements.
The default is to not allow any method calls for SharedObject RPCs.
Contained elements
Method

Example


setFps



See also
NetConnection (RPC), Stream, Client (RPC)

Availability
Flash Media Server 4

SharedObjManager
Container element.
The elements nested within this container configure the Shared Object Manager setting of an application.
Contained elements
StorageDir, DuplicateDir, ResyncDepth, LockTimeout, AutoCommit, MaxProperties, MaxPropertySize

Last updated 8/21/2014

181

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

StartClockOnPublish
Specifies whether the stream time is sensitive to the difference between publish time and the arrival of the first stream
message. The default value is false.
To use dynamic, multibitrate streaming, leave this value false.
See also
Live (StreamManager)

StorageDir
Specifies the physical location where shared objects or streams are stored.
By default the physical location is not set. Set this element only if the files for shared objects or recorded streams must
be stored in a location other than the application directory.
Example
C:\myapp\sharedobjects\
C:\myapp\streams\

See also
DuplicateDir

Stream
Lets you list methods allowed for stream RPCs.
To add methods, use a comma-delimited list of method names in the  sub-elements.
The default is to allow onStatus method calls only for stream RPCs.
Contained elements
Method

Example


onStatus



See also
NetConnection (RPC), SharedObject, Client (RPC)

Availability
Flash Media Server 4

StreamManager
Container element.
The elements in this section configure the Stream Manager settings for this application.

Last updated 8/21/2014

182

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Contained elements
StorageDir, DuplicateDir, EventsDir, CachePrefix, CacheUpdateInterval, MaxBufferRetries,
ThrottleBoundaryRequest, ThrottleLoads, ThrottleDisplayInterval, EnhancedSeek, KeyFrameInterval,
MaxStreamsBeforeGC, Audio, Live (StreamManager), SendDuplicateStart, SendDuplicateOnMetaData,
MaxSize (Recording), MaxSizeCap, MaxDuration, MaxDurationCap

Subscribers
This element instructs the server to combine sound samples only if there are more than the default number of
subscribers to that stream. The default number of subscribers is 8.
Example
8

See also
LoCPU, HiCPU, MaxSamples

SWFFolder
Specifies a single folder or a semicolon-delimited list of folders containing copies of client SWF files. The server
compares these SWF files to client SWF files connecting to applications on the server.
The default value of the SWFFolder element is the application's folder appended with /SWFs. Use a semicolon to
separate multiple directories. SWF files located under an instance named folder can only connect to that specific
instance.
Example
For an application named myApplication located at C:\applications\, authenticating SWF files should be placed
in C:\applications\myApplication\SWFs.
See also
MinGoodVersion, UserAgentExceptions

SWFVerification
Container element.
Specifies how the server verifies client SWF files before allowing the files to connect to an application. Verifying SWF
files is a security measure that prevents someone from creating their own SWF files that can attempt to stream your
resources. For more information, see “Verify SWF files” on page 33.
Note: SWF files connecting to Adobe Media Administration Server cannot be verified.
Contained elements
SWFFolder, MinGoodVersion, DirLevelSWFScan, MaxInitDelay, FinalHashTimeout, FirstHashTimeout,
UserAgentExceptions, Cache

ThrottleBoundaryRequest
Controls the maximum number of concurrent boundary requests per recorded stream. When streaming through a
proxy server, the boundary information about video segments are sent to the proxy server by request.

Last updated 8/21/2014

183

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

The default value is 8.
Example
8

See also
ThrottleDisplayInterval, ThrottleLoads

ThrottleDisplayInterval
Controls the interval at which the server displays the throttle queue length. The default value is 64, which means the
server displays the message 1 out of 64 times when the throttle queue is full.
Example
64

See also
ThrottleBoundaryRequest, ThrottleLoads

ThrottleLoads
Controls the maximum number of concurrent segment loads per recorded stream. When streaming through a proxy
server, video segments are sent to the proxy server by request. The default value is 8.
Example
8

See also
ThrottleBoundaryRequest, ThrottleDisplayInterval

Tunnel
Specifies whether or not to tunnel all operations through a given HTTP proxy. The default setting is false.
Example
false

See also
Host, Port, Type, Username, Password

TTL
Specifies in minutes how long each SWF file remains in the cache. The default value is 1440 minutes (24 hours).
See also
Cache, UpdateInterval

Last updated 8/21/2014

184

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Type
Specifies the type of proxy being connected to. The value for this element can be HTTP or SOCKS5. The default is HTTP.
Example
HTTP

See also
Host, Port, Tunnel, Username, Password

UnrestrictedAuth
A Boolean value that determines whether or not to allow sending the user name/password combination with each
HTTP redirect. Sending the user name/password combination is useful only if the Allow element permits redirections.
The default setting is true.
Example
true

See also
Allow, Max

UpdateInterval
Specifies the maximum time in minutes to wait for the server to scan the SWF folders for updates when there is a miss
in the cache. The default value is 5 minutes.
See also
Cache, TTL

UserAgent
Container element.
The settings for clients vary according to whether Flash Player platform is Windows or Macintosh. Setting the value
0x01 will configure the player and platform for silent messages.
Contained elements
Bits

UserAgentExceptions
Container element.
Contains an element that specifies a user agent that should be an exception to authentication. Use the to and from
attributes to indicate the lowest and highest versions to except.
Example




Last updated 8/21/2014

185

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Contained elements
Exception

Username
Specifies the user name for connecting to the edge.
See also
Host, Port, Type, Tunnel, Password

Verbose
This element determines whether or not the server outputs verbose information during HTTP operations.
Example
false

See also
HTTP1_0, Connections, Proxy, Redirect

VideoSampleAccess
Allows the client application to access the raw uncompressed video data in a stream. By default, this element is
disabled. To enable it, set the enable attribute to true. In the tag, specify a list of semicolon-delimited folders to which
client applications have access. When this element is enabled, all clients can access the video data in streams in the
specified folders. To enable access to all video data streamed by the server, specify / in the tag.
The folder path is restricted to the application’s streams folder or folders, so do not use absolute paths in the list of
folders.
While you can also enable access through Server-Side ActionScript, this element allows access to the data without
requiring Server-Side ActionScript. You can also override this element with the Access plug-in or Server-Side
ActionScript.
Example
If an application is configured to store streams in folders C:\low_quality and C:\high_quality, the configuration
to allow access to sample those streams is as follows:
low_quality;high_quality

See also
AudioSampleAccess

VirtualDirectory
Specifies virtual directory mappings for Server-Side ActionScript File objects.
If you map File objects in the Application.xml file and don't have the feature enabled in the Server.xml file, you'll see
the following message in the log:
"Virtual directories for file objects is not supported due to the Server level security
setting."

Last updated 8/21/2014

186

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

The VirtualDirectory element is contained by a FileObject element. The FileObject element has an override
attribute whose default value is "no". When override="no", the applcation-level Application.xml file cannot
override the VirtualDirectory settings for the FileObject defined in a Vhost-level Application.xml file.
Use the following syntax:
virtual_dir_name;physical_dir_path

To specify multiple directories, use multiple  elements, as in the following:

/key1;C:\example\folder1
/key2;C:\example\folder2


For more information, see comments in the Application.xml file and “Mapping virtual directories to physical
directories” on page 51.
See also
FileObject

WindowsPerAck
Controls how many messages can be sent before receiving an acknowledgement from the other end.
Note: Adobe recommends that you do not change the value of this element.

WriteBufferSize
Specifies in kilobytes the size of the write buffer. The default size is 16 KB.
Example
16

See also
IdlePostInterval, IdleAckInterval, MimeType

XMLSocket
Container element.
Contains an element that specifies how much data can be received from the XML server (without receiving an end tag)
before XMLSocket closes the connection. This can be overridden by each XMLSocket by specifying the property
XML.maxUnprocessedChars, but that number cannot exceed the number specified in this element.
Example

4096


Contained elements
MaxUnprocessedChars

Last updated 8/21/2014

187

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Logger.xml file
The Logger.xml file is located at the root level of the /conf directory and is the configuration file for the logging file
system. Logger.xml contains the elements and information used to configure log files.You can edit this file to add or
change configuration information, including the location of the log files. The default location of the log files is in the
/logs directory in the server installation directory.
Log files are written in English. Field names displayed in the log file are in English. Some content within the log file,
however, may be in another language, depending on the filename and the operating system. For example, in the
Access.log file, the columns x-sname and x-suri-stem show the name of the stream. If the name of the recorded
stream is in a language other than English, the name is written in that language, even if the server is running on an
English-language operating system.
The Logging section in the Server.xml file enables or disables the log files.
To see the element structure and default values, see the Logger.xml file installed in the RootInstall/conf/ folder.
Note: Log file rotation cannot be disabled. To effectively turn off rotation, choose a large maximum size and a long
maximum duration for the log files.

Access
Container element.
The elements nested within this container configure the Access log settings.
Contained elements
LogServer, Directory, FileName, Time

admin
Container element.
The elements nested within this container configure the admin log settings.
Contained elements
LogServer

Application
Container element.
The elements nested within this container configure the Application log file settings.
Contained elements
Directory, Time, Rotation

AuthEvent
Container element.
The elements in this section configure the AuthEvent log file settings.

Last updated 8/21/2014

188

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Contained elements
LogServer, Directory. FileName, Time, Rotation, Events, Fields, Delimiter, QuoteFields, EscapeFields

AuthMessage
Container element.
The elements in this section configure the AuthMessage log file settings.
Contained elements
Directory, Time. Rotation

core
Container element.
The elements nested within this container configure the core log settings.
Contained elements
LogServer

Delimiter
Specifies whether or not to use a single quotation mark (') as a delimiter to separate the fields in the log file.
A delimiter is used to separate the fields in the log file. The use of the number sign (#) as a delimiter is not
recommended, since # is used as the comment element in the Logger.xml file.
The following characters are not allowed as delimiters:

• triple quotation marks (''' )
• paired double quotation marks ("")
• comma (,)
• colon (:)
• hyphen (-)
See also
Directory, EscapeFields, QuoteFields

Diagnostic
Container element.
The elements in this section configure the diagnostic log file.
Contained elements
Directory, Time. Rotation

Directory
Specifies the directory where the log files are located.

Last updated 8/21/2014

189

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

By default, the log files are located in the logs directory in the server installation directory.
Example
${LOGGER.LOGDIR}

See also
Time, Rotation

DisplayFieldsHeader
Formatting element. Specifies how many lines to write to the log file before repeating the field headers. The default line
count is 100 lines.
Example
100

See also
Delimiter, EscapeFields, QuoteFields

edge
Container element.
The elements nested within this container configure the edge log settings.
Contained elements
LogServer

EscapeFields
Formatting element. This element controls whether or not the fields in the log file are escaped when unsafe characters
are found. This optional flag can be set to enable or disable. By default, it is set to enable.
The unsafe characters are as follows: the space character; open or closed angle brackets (< >); a double quotation mark
("); the number sign (#); the percent sign (%); open or closed curly braces ({ }); bar (|); the carat (^); the tilde (~); square
brackets ([ ]); and the apostrophe (' ).
Example
enable

See also
LogServer, Directory, FileName, Time, Rotation, Events, Fields, Delimiter, and QuoteFields

Events
Specifies the events written to the log file.
Specify events in a semicolon-separated list. The keyword * instructs the server to log all events. For a list of events that
are recorded in the Access log file, see “Access events defined in access logs” on page 99.

Last updated 8/21/2014

190

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

See also
Fields

Fields
Specifies which fields for an event are logged in the Access log file.
Fields are associated with the events found in the Access log file. The field specification is a semicolon-separated list of
one or more fields associated with an event in the log file.
The keyword * specifies that all fields are to be logged. Fields without data are left empty. Adobe recommends that you
include the following fields in the fields to be logged: the type, category, date, and time fields.
For a list of fields associated with events in the Access log file, see “Fields in access logs” on page 100. Not every field
is associated with each event in the log file.
See also
Events

FileIO
Container element.
The elements in this section configure the settings for the File plug-in log file settings.
Contained elements
Directory, Time, Rotation

FileName
Specifies the name of the Access log file.
The Access log filename includes a date stamp and version number. Y represents the year of its creation; the format
YYYY must be used. M represents the month of its creation; the formats M or MM are both allowed. D represents the
day of the month of the file’s creation; the formats D or DD are both allowed. N represents the version number of the
file. Note that there is no limit on the number of versions.
The repetition of a letter represents the number of digits. For example, M represents 4 (April). MM represents 04
(April).
Example
access.2007103043.log

This example identifies version 43 of the access log file for October 30, 2007.
See also
LogServer, Directory, Time, Rotation, Events, Fields, Delimiter, QuoteFields, EscapeFields

History
Specifies the maximum number of log files to keep.
The files are named access.01.log, access.02.log, access.03.log, and so on. The default number of files to retain is 5.

Last updated 8/21/2014

191

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Example
5

See also
MaxSize, Schedule, Rename

HostPort
Specifies the IP and port of the log server.
Example
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:1234

See also
ServerID, DisplayFieldsHeader

Logger
Root element.
The Logger element is a container for all the other elements in Logger.xml.

LogServer
Container element.
The elements nested in this section configure the server to send messages to a remote log server.
Contained elements
HostPort, ServerID, DisplayFieldsHeader

master
Container element.
The elements nested within this container configure the master log settings.
Contained elements
LogServer

MaxSize
Specifies the maximum log file size in bytes. The default file size is 10240 KB, or approximately 1 MB.
Example
10240

See also
Schedule, History, Rename

Last updated 8/21/2014

192

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

QuoteFields
Formatting element. Specifies whether or not to use quotation marks to surround those fields in the log file that include
a space.
This element can be set to enable or disable. By default, it is set to disable.
Example
disable

See also
LogServer, Directory, FileName, Time, Rotation, Events, Fields, Delimiter, EscapeFields

Rename
Specifies a new name for log files when rotation occurs. The default is true.
If Rename is set to true, application.00.log is renamed application.01.log, and application.01.log is renamed
application.02.log (and so on) when it is time to rotate the log files. This occurs until the maximum history setting is
reached. The log file with the highest version number keeps the oldest log history.
If Rename is set to false, a new log file is created with the next available version when rotation occurs. The log file with
the lowest version number keeps the oldest log history.
Examples
true

See also
MaxSize, Schedule, History

Rotation
Container element.
The elements in this section configure the rotation of the log files.
Contained elements
MaxSize, Schedule, History, Rename

Schedule
Specifies the rotation schedule for the log files.
There are two types of scheduling: daily rotation and rotation that occurs when the log exceeds a specified length.
Examples
If the type attribute is daily, the server rotates the log files every 24 hours.


If the type attribute is hh:mm, the timestamp 00:00 causes the file to rotate every midnight.


Last updated 8/21/2014

193

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

If the type attribute is duration, rotation occurs when the duration of the log exceeds a specified length. The duration
is specified in minutes.


See also
MaxSize, History, Rename

ServerID
By default, the value of the ServerID element is the IP address of the server whose events are being logged.
Example
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:1234

See also
HostPort, DisplayFieldsHeader

Time
The Timefield in a log file can be logged either in UTC (GMT) or local time. Valid values are utc, gmt, or local.
The setting for the Time element can be used to override the server-wide configuration. The default is local time.
See also
Logging

Server.xml file
The Server.xml file is located at the root level of the conf directory. Edits made in the Server.xml file affect the entire
server unless they are overridden in another configuration file.
To see the element structure and default values in Server.xml, see the Server.xml file installed with Adobe Media Server
in the RootInstall/conf/ directory.

Access
Container element.
The elements nested within the Access container configure the Access log settings. The Access logs are located in the
RootInstall\logs directory.
Contained elements
Enable, Scope

ACCP
Container element.

Last updated 8/21/2014

194

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

The elements nested within the ACCP container configure the Admin Core Communication Protocol (ACCP). Adobe
Media Administration Server and the active cores communicate over ACCP. This protocol is also used for collecting
performance metrics and issuing administrative commands to Adobe Media Server cores.
The Adobe Media Administration Console connects to Adobe Media Administration Server, which in turn connects
to Adobe Media Server.
Contained elements
MinIOThreads, MaxIOThreads, SocketTableSize, SocketOverflowBuckets

ActiveProfile
Specifies the limits enforced by the server on each license key (set in the LicenseInfo element). Select a profile to
determine bandwidth, connection, and other licensed limits.
See also
Process, Mask, LicenseInfo

AdaptorName
Enable a registry core to activate a single AMSCore instance dedicated to handling services for Adobe Media Gateway.
This AMSCore process comes to life on start-up and allows Adobe Media Gateway to register its services to Adobe
Media Server. Enable this registry core only when using Adobe Media Gateway.


_defaultRoot_


See also
“Registry” on page 222

Admin
Container element.
The elements nested within the Admin container configure the RTMP (Real-Time Messaging Protocol) for the
amsadmin process. RTMP is the protocol used for communication between Flash Player and Adobe Media Server.
Contained elements
MinIOThreads, MaxIOThreads, SocketTableSize, SocketOverflowBuckets

AdminElem
Specifies the format used to display an element name in an HTTP command. The default value is false, which means
the element name is displayed as <_x>; otherwise the element name is displayed as .
The getActiveVHost() command lists only the active virtual hosts. The getActiveVHostStats()command allows
administrators to query the statistics information for all active virtual hosts. To display  instead of
<_x> in the HTTP command, set the AdminElem element to true.
Example
true

Last updated 8/21/2014

195

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

See also
Process, Allow, Deny, Order

AdminServer
Container element.
The elements nested within the AdminServer container configure Adobe Media Administration Server.
Contained elements
RTMP (AdminServer), HostPort, SocketGC, Process, AdminElem, Allow, Deny, Order, CrossDomainPath

Allow
Specifies the administrator connections that are to be accepted. By default, a client can connect to Adobe Media
Administration Server from any domain or IP address. This potential security risk can be managed by the Allow
element. Permissible administrator connections are detailed as a comma-delimited list of host names, domain names,
and full or partial IP addresses. The keyword all can also be used.
Example
x.foo.com, foo.com, 10.60.1.133, 10.60

or
all

See also
Deny, Order

AllowAnyAACProfile
By default, the server does not stream any AAC audio profiles that are not supported by Flash Player 10. To override
this behavior, set this value to true.
See also
Playback

AllowAnyAVCProfile
By default, the server does not stream any H.264 video profiles that are not supported by Flash Player 10. To override
this behavior, set this value to true.
See also
Playback

AllowedVideoLag
The number of milliseconds the server holds audio messages in the recording buffer while waiting for a video message.
This lag allows the server to sort timestamps before flushing the buffer to disk when video is delayed. The default value is 5.

Last updated 8/21/2014

196

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Application
Container element.
The Enable element nested within the Application container enables the Application log file.
Contained elements
Enable

ApplicationGC
Specifies in minutes how often the server checks for and removes unused application instances. The default interval is
5 minutes, which is also the minimum value for this element. An application is considered idle if it has no clients
connected for longer than the amount of time specified in MaxAppIdleTime in Application.xml.

AudioAutoBufferReadSize
The server caches F4V/MP4 video, audio, and other data in memory. Caching data allows the server to make fewer
disk reads and to perform better. Each data type (audio, video, and other) has its own cache. You can tune the size of
each cache, depending on the type of content you are delivering, to achieve better disk performance. For example, if
you are delivering audio-only content, increase the AudioAutoBufferReadSize buffer, and decrease the
VideoAutoBufferReadSize buffer.
The minimum size is 1024 bytes. The default value is 51200 bytes.
See also
VideoAutoBufferReadSize, OtherAutoBufferReadSize

AuthEvent
Container element. The Enable element nested within the AuthEvent container enables the logging of events from
the Authorization plug-in.
Contained elements
Enable

AuthMessage
Container element. The Enable element nested within the AuthMessage container enables the logging of messages
from the Authorization plug-in.
Contained elements
Enable

AutoCloseIdleClients
Container element. Determines whether or not to automatically close idle clients.
Set the enable attribute to true to close idle clients. If the enable attribute is omitted or set to false, the feature is
disabled. The default value is false.

Last updated 8/21/2014

197

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

A client is active when it is sending or receiving data. Use AutoCloseIdleClients to specify how often the server
should check for idle clients. When a client has been idle longer than the maximum idle time (60 seconds by default),
the server sends a status message to the NetConnection object (the client). The server closes the client connection to
the server and writes a message to the access log. The server also writes a message such as “Client x has been idle for y
seconds” in the core and event logs.
To configure the closing of idle connections, you must enable the feature in the Server.xml file. Once you enable the
feature in the Server.xml file, you can disable the feature for individual virtual hosts in the Vhost.xml files or for
individual applications in Application.xml. The values defined in the Server.xml configuration file apply to all clients
connected to the server, unless the values are defined in the Vhost.xml file. The Vhost.xml values override the
Server.xml values. (Subsequently, the values defined in the Vhost.xml configuration file apply to all clients connected
to the virtual host, unless values are defined in the Application.xml file. The Application.xml values override the
Vhost.xml values.)
Example

60
600


Contained elements
CheckInterval, MaxIdleTime

Cache
Container element. Contains elements that configure the cache setting for SWF verification.
See also
TTL, UpdateInterval (Cache)

CheckInterval
Specifies the interval, in seconds, at which the server checks for active client connections. The minimum and default
value is 60 seconds.
A client is disconnected the first time the server checks for idle connections if the client has exceeded the MaxIdleTime
value. A shorter interval results in more reliable disconnection times, but can also result in decreased server
performance.
Example
60

See also
Checkpoints

Checkpoints
Enables logging checkpoint events. Checkpoint events log bytes periodically from the start to the end of an event. The
following are available as checkpoint events: connect-continue, play-continue, and publish-continue.

Last updated 8/21/2014

198

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

This element contains the enable attribute which you can set to true or false. Set the enable attribute to true to
turn on checkpoint events in logs. The default value is false.
You must enable checkpoint events at the server level in the Server.xml file. You can disable checkpoints at the vhost
and application level in the Vhost.xml and Application.xml files. You can also override the logging interval at the vhost
and application levels.
Contained elements
CheckInterval, LogInterval

ConnectionTimeout
Flash Media Server 4.5
The /RTMP/ConnectionTimeout element and /HTTP/ConnectionTimeout element specify how long to wait before
timing out an outgoing connection, in milliseconds. The default is -1 which uses the OS timeout to block outgoing
connections.
-1

See also
“HTTP” on page 207
“RTMP” on page 137

Connector
Container element.
The elements nested within the Connector container configure the connector subsystem. Adobe Media Server
provides connectors that allow application scripts to connect to other Adobe Media Servers or HTTP servers.
Contained elements
HTTP, RTMP (Connector)

Content
Enables operations in the current File plug-in on content (streams or SWF files). The value of true enables the
operation on the specified content type and false disables it.
This element contains the type attribute, which you can set to the following values:

•

Streams. Enables stream file operations. Enabled by default.

•

SWF. Enables operations on SWF files. Disabled by default. Enable if you plan to use the File plug-in to retrieve SWF
files for verification by the server.

This element is nested within the FilePlugin tag.
Example
true
false

See also
FilePlugin

Last updated 8/21/2014

199

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Core
Container element.
The elements nested within the Core container configure the RTMP protocol for the AMSCore.exe process.
Contained elements
MinIOThreads, MaxIOThreads, SocketTableSize, SocketOverflowBuckets

CoreExitDelay
Specifies how much wait time, in seconds, an idle core is given to exit on its own before it is removed from the server.
The default wait time is 20 seconds.
Example
60

See also
CoreGC

CoreGC
Specifies how often, in seconds, to check for and remove idle or unused cores. The default is 300 seconds.
Example
300

See also
CoreExitDelay

CoreTimeout
Specifies the timeout value, in seconds, for detecting unresponsive cores. The default timeout is 30 seconds. A value of
0 disables the timeout check.
Example
30

See also
CoreGC

CPUMonitor
Specifies, in seconds, how often the server monitors CPU usage. The default interval is 1 second. The value cannot be
set to less than 1 second.
Example
1

Last updated 8/21/2014

200

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

See also
ResourceLimits

CrossDomainPath
Specifies an absolute path on the server to a cross-domain file. This element lets you specify a list of domains from
which a client can access the server. The default value is *, which allows clients from all domains to access the server.
This element is nested within both the Server element and the AdminServer element. Use it for both edge and
administration server requests.
Example
C:/Security/config/files/ams/crossdomain.xml

Deny
Specifies administrator connections that should be ignored. The connections are specified as a comma-delimited list
of host names, domain names, and full or partial IP addresses, or the keyword all.
Example
x.foo.com, foo.com, 10.60.1.133, 10.60

or
all

See also
Allow, Order

Diagnostic
Container element.
The Enable element nested within the Diagnostic section enables the diagnostic log file.
Contained elements
Enable

DiffServ
Flash Media Server 3.5.2
Use this element with the DiffServMask element to specify the DiffServ field for all sockets that connect to the RTMP
listener (these include tunneling and HTTP proxy sockets). There is little use for this unless you have set up a DSCP
domain. Also, some values may lead to errors, depending on your platform and your router configuration. For
example, to set priority class 4, you might set DiffServ to 128 (top 3 bits set to 4) and set DiffServMask to 224 (top
3 bits on).
To verify that bits are set on a socket, call the Administration API getNetStreamStats() method. Each stream has a
diffserv_bits field whose value is updated when you successfully set bits on a socket.

Last updated 8/21/2014

201

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

DiffServMask
Flash Media Server 3.5.2
Use this element with the DiffServ element to specify the DiffServ field for all sockets that connect to the RTMP
listener (these include tunneling and HTTP proxy sockets). There is little use for this unless you have set up a DSCP
domain. Also, some values may lead to errors, depending on your platform and your router configuration. For
example, to set priority class 4, you might set DiffServ to 128 (top 3 bits set to 4) and set DiffServMask to 224 (top
3 bits on).

Directory
Located in the Httpd container.
The directory containing the web server. The default value is Apache2.2.

DirLevelSWFScan
Specifies the number of levels of subfolders within a parent folder to scan for SWF files. The parent folder is specified
in the SWFFolder element.
Specifying a positive value scans that number of subfolders. Specifying zero scans the parent folder and no subfolders.
Specifying a negative value scans all subfolders. The default value is 1, which means that the server scans only one
subfolder level.
See also
SWFFolder

ECCP
Container element.
The elements nested within the ECCP container configure ECCP (Edge Server-Core Server Communication Protocol).
Adobe Media Server edge processes and Adobe Media Server core processes use ECCP to migrate socket connections
and to proxy connections that have not been migrated.
Contained elements
MinIOThreads, MaxIOThreads, SocketTableSize, SocketOverflowBuckets, CoreTimeout

Edge
Container element.
The elements nested within the Edge container configure the RTMP protocol for the amsedge process.
Contained elements
MinIOThreads, MaxIOThreads, SocketTableSize, SocketOverflowBuckets

Edge (ResourceLimits)
Container element.
The elements nested within the Edge container configure resources for the amsedge process.

Last updated 8/21/2014

202

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Contained elements
MaxEventQueueThreads, MinEventQueueThreads, NumSchedQueues

EdgeCore
Container element.
The elements nested within the EdgeCore container control the IPC (interprocess communication) message queue
used by edge and core processes to communicate with each other.
Contained elements
HeapSize, MaxQueueSize

Enable
Server.xml uses Enable elements in the Logging container to enable or disable the Access, Diagnostic,
Application, AuthEvent, AuthMessage,and FileIO logs. A value of true enables the logging process; false
disables the logging process. The default value is true.
Example

true


See also
Access, Diagnostic, Application, AuthEvent, AuthMessage, FileIO

EnableAggMsgs (playback)
Located in the Playback container.
Aggregating messages increases server performance. The default value is true. Do not change this value if you want
to achieve the highest possible server performance.
Note: This setting applies to playback of MP4/F4V files only.

EnableAggMsgs (raw)
Specifies whether the RAW adaptor generates aggregate messages (true) or not (false). Aggregating messages improves
server performance.
The default value is true.
Example
true

See also
Raw

EnableSystemLogging
Enables logging of high severity entries to the system log (true) or not (false).

Last updated 8/21/2014

203

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

The default value is true.
Example
true

FileCheckInterval
Located in the FLVCache container.
Specifies, in seconds, how often the server reloads the video segment in the cache when there is a file change. The
default value is 120 seconds. The minimum value is 1 second. There is no maximum value. A very large number means
the server does not refresh the cache even when there is a file change.
Example
120

FileIO
Container element.
The Enable element nested within the FileIO container enables logging from the File plug-in.
Contained elements
Enable

FilePlugin
Container element.
This element contains elements to configure file operations that are handled by the File plug-in. Setting the enabled
attribute to false disables the File plug-in.
Contained elements
MaxNumberOfRequests, Content

FLVCache
Container element.
Contains elements that control the size and features of the recorded media cache.
Contained elements
FileCheckInterval, MaxSize (FLVCache), MaxKeyframeCacheSize

FLVCachePurge
Located in the ResourceLimits container.
Specifies how often, in minutes, to remove unused files from the cache. The default value is 60 minutes. The minimum
value is 1 minute. If you specify a value of less than 1minute, the default value of 60 is used.

Last updated 8/21/2014

204

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

FLVCacheSize
Located in the ResourceLimits container.
Specifies the maximum size of the recorded media cache. The recorded media cache size is specified as a percentage of
the total available RAM on the system. The default setting for the cache size is 10 (10%). The maximum setting is 100
(100%), in which case virtual memory will also be used.
Use this setting to configure the cache for optimal memory use. If you are receiving “cache full” events in the core log
file or want to increase the chance that streams will find the information needed in the cache, increase the size of the
cache. To minimize the amount of memory used in the server process, decrease the size of the cache.
Example
10

FreeMemRatio
Located in the MessageCache, SmallMemPool, LargeMemPool, and SegmentsPool containers.
Specifies the maximum percentage of total memory that the total pool size may occupy. The range of this setting is
from 0 (0%) to 1 (100%). The default setting is 0.5 (50%).
Example
0.5

FreeRatio
Located in the MessageCache, SmallMemPool, LargeMemPool, and SegmentsPool containers.
Specifies the percentage of the message cache to be consumed by the free list on a per-thread basis. The range of this
setting is from 0 (0%) to 1 (100%). The default setting is 0.125 (12.5%).
When more free memory is available to a thread than the specified ratio, the freed memory returns to the global pool.
Example
0.125

GCInterval
Located in the HandleCache container.
Specifies in minutes how often to remove idle handles. The default is 60 minutes.
Example
60

GID
Located in the Process containers.
Specifies the group ID of the process. If you do not specify a UID or GID, the server or Administration Server runs as
root. This element is applicable to Adobe Media Server running on Linux systems only.

Last updated 8/21/2014

205

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

See also
UID

GlobalQueue
Container element.
The elements nested within the GlobalQueue container control the IPC message queue used by all processes to
communicate with each other.
Contained elements
HeapSize, MaxQueueSize

GlobalRatio
Located in the MessageCache, SmallMemPool, LargeMemPool, and SegmentsPool containers.
Specifies the percentage of the message cache to be consumed by the free list on a global basis. When more free
memory is available to a thread than the specified ratio, the freed memory returns to the operating system.
The range of this setting is from 0 (0%) to 1 (100%). The default setting is 0.4 (40%).
Example
0.4

HandleCache
Container element.
Contains elements that configure how to cache handles used for HTTP requests. This section is used for connections
to Flash Remoting.
Contained elements
MaxSize (HandleCache), IdleTime, TrimSize, GCInterval

HeapSize
Specifies the maximum size, in kilobytes, of the shared memory heap used for an IPC (interprocess communication)
message queue. The default value for this element varies according to its container.
Container

Default Value

Description

EdgeCore

1024

If the maximum size of this element is not specified, the value is 100 KB.

GlobalQueue

2048

Services

2048

Example

1024


Last updated 8/21/2014

206

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

See also
MaxQueueSize

HostPort
Specifies the IP address and port number that Adobe Media Administration Server binds to. The default is to bind to
any available IP on port 1111. Only one port number may be specified in this element.
The Administration Service is separate from Adobe Media Server. When administrators connect to the server with the
Administration Console, they are connecting to Adobe Media Administration Server, which in turn connects to
Adobe Media Server.
Example
ip:port

See also
AdminServer

HTTP
Container element.
The elements nested within the HTTP container configure the HTTP connector used to connect to Flash Remoting.
The following reference table gives the default values for all thread configurations.
Default Value

Description

0

Allocates the default number of threads.

>0

Allocates the exact number of threads specified.

-1

Allocates 1xN threads, where N is the number of processors available in the computer.

-2

Allocates 2xN threads, where N is the number of processors available in the computer. For example,
suppose you have a quad-core computer, where applications see 4 local processors. If you specify a value
of -2, the HTTP connector can use up to 8 threads.

Contained elements
MinConnectionThreads, MaxConnectionThreads, MaxConnectionQueueSize, HandleCache

Httpd
Specifies how the built-in webserver is stopped and started. By default the enabled attribute is set to
"${SERVER.HTTPD_ENABLED}". By default, the SERVER.HTTPD_ENABLED variable is set to true in the ams.ini file.
When enabled is set to true, Adobe Media Server starts and stops the web server automatically. Adobe Media Server
uses the settings in the Directory, Program, Options, and Service elements to execute the following command
lines:
$Directory/$Program -d $Directory $Options -k start
$Directory/$Program -d $Directory $Options -k stop

Note: The value of $Directory can be absolute or relative to $AMSROOT.
On Windows only, Service specifies the name used to install the webserver as an NT service. If a value for Service
is present, -n $Service is appended to both commands. Linux ignores this section of the command.

Last updated 8/21/2014

207

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Contained elements
Directory, Program, Options, Service

IdleTime
Located in the HandleCache container.
Specifies the amount of time to wait before releasing cached handles. If no HTTP requests have been made to the host
for the length of time specified, some cached handles are cleared. The default wait time is 10 minutes.
Example
10${SERVER.LICENSEINFO}

Note: Serial numbers that are added manually (that is, added by editing those files directly) to either ams.ini or the
LicenseInfo tag of Server.xml file cannot be removed using the Administration Console. Only serial numbers that are
added using the Administration Console can be deleted using the Administration Console.
Example
${SERVER.LICENSEINFO}

Last updated 8/21/2014

208

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

LicenseInfoEx
Contains license keys added using the Administration Console.

Localhost
Specifies the IP loopback address.
The server must reference itself locally. The IP loopback address is usually the default localhost address. With more
than one network interface, localhost can map to an erroneous interface. The server uses the default loopback address
as the local loopback.

LockoutLimit
The maximum number of login failures before a user is prevented from logging into the admin server. If this value is
reached, the admin server must be restarted before that user can log in again.
The default value is 300.
Example
300

See also
LogInLimits, MaxFailures, RecoveryTime

LogInLimits
Container element.
Configures the number of failed admin login attempts that are allowed, and the amount of recovery time required
before the admin can attempt to log in again.
Contained Elements
LockoutLimit, MaxFailures, RecoveryTime
See also
Security

LogInterval
Specifies how often to log a checkpoint, in seconds. This value should be larger than the value for CheckInterval. If
the value is smaller, the server logs a checkpoint every check interval. The default value is 3600 seconds (60 minutes).
See also
Checkpoints

Logging
Container element.
The elements nested within the Logging container configure general logging properties for the server. Set the
configuration properties of the individual log files in the Logger.xml file.

Last updated 8/21/2014

209

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Log files are written in English. Field names in the log file are in English. Some content within the log file, however,
may be in another language, depending on the filename and the operating system. For example, in the access.log file,
the columns x-sname and x-suri-stem show the name of the stream. If the name of the recorded stream is in a
language other than English, the name is written in the log file in that language, even if the server is running on an
English-language operating system.
Contained elements
Time, RecordsNumber, RetryNumber, RetrySleep, Access, Diagnostic, Application, AuthEvent, AuthMessage,
FileIO

Mask
A three-digit octal value used by the Linux umask (user permissions mask) command to set a file creation mask. The
user must enter the mask in a three-digit octal format.
The default setting for this element is 017 in octal.
This element is applicable to Adobe Media Server running on Linux systems only. This element controls who has
read/write access to shared object and stream files on the server. All Adobe Media Server object files, such as stream
files or shared object files, are created on the server side with permission 0666. This key is used by umask to set the file
creation mask. By default, the creation mask is set to 017 in octal. Therefore, all Adobe Media Server object files are
created with permission 0666 & ~017 = 0660 = rw-rw----.
The owner and the users who belong to the same group as the owner get read/write permission to the files. If the mask
is set to 022, the file created is assigned permission 0666 & ~022 = 0644 = rw-r--r--.

Master
Container element.
The elements nested within the Master container configure the resource limits for the master server.
Contained elements
CoreGC, CoreExitDelay

MaxAge
Located in the MessageCache, SmallMemPool, LargeMemPool, and SegmentsPool containers.
This element defines the maximum reuse count before the cache unit is freed. The default count is 1,000,000.
Example
1000000

MaxAggMsgSize (playback)
The maximum size of an aggregate message, in kilobytes. The default value is 64.
Note: This setting applies to playback of MP4/F4V files only.
See also
Playback

Last updated 8/21/2014

210

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

MaxAggMsgSize (raw)
The maximum size of an aggregate message, in bytes. You can use any positive integer.
The default value is 65536.
Example
65536

See also
Raw

MaxAudioSampleDescriptions
Located in the Recording container.
Each change in codec for a content type has a sample description. For example, two different audio codecs each have
their own sample description. The server allocates space for sample descriptions when it creates a file. If the codec type
changes more than the number of available descriptions, the server stops recording. However, adding too many
descriptions takes up unnecessary space for every file that the server records.
The default value is 20.
Note: This setting applies to recording MP4/F4V files only.

MaxCacheSize
Located in the MessageCache, SmallMemPool, LargeMemPool, and SegmentsPool containers.
This element defines the maximum size of the cache in megabytes. The default is 100 MB.
Example
100

MaxCacheUnits
Located in the MessageCache, SmallMemPool, LargeMemPool, and SegmentsPool containers.
This element defines the maximum number of free units in the cache. Keep in mind that the number of free units may
be less than maximum if the value of the MaxCacheSize limit is reached.
The default is 4096 units.
Example
4096

MaxConnectionQueueSize
Located in the HTTP container.
Specifies the maximum number of connection requests that can be pending. Connection requests are rejected if this
limit is exceeded.
The default number of pending requests is 1000. To use the default, specify -1.

Last updated 8/21/2014

211

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Example
-1

MaxConnectionRate
Located in the RTMP (Protocol) and Edge containers.
Specifies the maximum number of incoming connections per second that the server’s socket listener accepts. You can
set a fractional maximum connection rate, such as 12.5. A value of 0 or -1 disables the feature.
This is a global setting for all socket listeners. If the element is set to 10 connections per second, each listener has a limit
of 10 connections per second. If there are three listeners and the MaxConnectionRate is set to 10, the server imposes
a maximum total combined rate of 30 connections per second. The socket listeners are configured in the Adaptor.xml
configuration file using the HostPort element under the HostPortList container element.
Connections requested at a rate above the value specified in this element remain in the TCP/IP socket queue and are
silently discarded by the operating system whenever the queue becomes too long.
Example
100

MaxConnectionThreads
Located in the HTTP and RTMP (Connector)containers.
Specifies the maximum number of threads used to process connection requests. For HTTP, the default number is 10.
To use the default, specify 0. For RTMP, the default number is 5. To use the default, specify 0. If the server is taking a
long time to process connections, raise the value of HTTP/MaxConnectionThreads to 20.

MaxDataSampleDescriptions
Located in the Recording container.
Each change in codec for a content type has a sample description. For example, two different data encoding formats
each have their own sample description. The server allocates space for sample descriptions when it creates a file. If the
encoding format type changes more than the number of available descriptions, the server stops recording. However,
adding too many descriptions takes up unnecessary space for every file that the server records. The default value is 10.
Note: This setting applies to recording MP4/F4V files only.

MaxELSTEntries
Located in the Recording container.
The maximum number of ELST entries in a recording. The server uses ELST entries when there are gaps in content.
Gaps occur during an append to the file or when video, audio, or data content ends while other such content continues.
If more gaps or appends occur than the value specified in the MaxELSTEntries tag, recording ends. However, setting
this value too high takes up unnecessary space in each recorded file. The default value is 100.
Note: This setting applies to recording MP4/F4V files only.

MaxEventQueueThreads
Located in the Edge (ResourceLimits) container.

Last updated 8/21/2014

212

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

The maximum number of threads per scheduler queue. The default value is -2.

MaxFailures
The maximum number of login attempts a user can have before having to wait to be allowed again. The wait time is
defined by the RecoveryTime element.
The default value is 3. If the number of failed login attempts equals the value of LockoutLimit, the admin server must
be restarted before that user can attempt to log in again.
Example
3

See also
LogInLimits, LockoutLimit, RecoveryTime

MaxFlushSize
Located in the RecBuffer container.
The maximum number of kilobytes to accumulate before flushing the recording buffer. The default value is 256. The
minimum value is 32.

MaxFlushTime
Located in the RecBuffer container.
The maximum number of seconds to wait before flushing the recording buffer. The default value is 5. The minimum
value is 1.

MaxIdleTime
Located in the AutoCloseIdleClients container.
Specifies the maximum idle time allowed, in seconds, before a client is disconnected. The default value is 3600 seconds
(60 minutes). If you set a value of 60 or less, the server uses 1200 seconds (20 minutes).
A low value may cause unneeded disconnections. When you configure this element, consider the type of applications
running on the server. For example, if you have an application with which users watch short video clips, a user might
leave the window to idle out.

MaxInitDelay
The maximum number of seconds that is used to process SWF files. The default value is 5 seconds. This element is
used in the verification of SWF files.
Example
5

See also
SWFVerification

Last updated 8/21/2014

213

214

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

MaxIOThreads
Located in the RTMP (Connector), Edge, Core, Admin, ECCP, and ACCP containers.
Specifies the maximum number of threads that can be created for I/O processing.
Use the following information to configure all I/O and connection threads processing:

• A value of 0 allocates the default number of threads (10).
• A value greater than 0 allocates the exact number of threads specified.
• A value less than 0 ties the number of connection threads to the number (N) of processors, as follows:
• -1 means 1 x N threads.
• -2 means 2 x N threads, and so on.
Adobe Media Server can receive connections through various protocols. The default value for this element varies
according to which container protocol it is nested within.
Container

Default Value

Description

ACCP

10

Use 0 for the default value.

Admin

10

Use 0 for the default value.

Core

10

Use 0 for the default value.

ECCP

10

Use 0 for the default value.

Edge

10

Use 0 for the default value.

RTMP

32

Use -1 for the default value.

Example

32


MaxKeyframeCacheSize
Located in the FLVCache container.
Specifies the maximum number of keyframes in the cache for each recorded media file. The default value is 2000
keyframes.
When enhanced seeking is enabled, the server generates keyframes that are saved in the cache. (For more information,
see EnhancedSeek in the Application.xml file.) If you lower MaxKeyframeCacheSize, the cache uses less memory. If
an application uses many large recorded media files, you may want to lower this number.
Example
0

MaxNumberOfRequests
Specifies the maximum number of pending requests to the File plug-in. The default value is 0, which allows unlimited
requests.

Last updated 8/21/2014

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

If the plug-in does not respond to a request from the server, the number of pending requests increases up to the value
of MaxNumberofRequests. Once MaxNumberofRequests is reached, subsequent requests are rejected.
By default, Adobe Media Server does not count the number of requests made to the File plug-in or responses returned
from the File plug-in. If necessary, you can use this value to identify problems with the File plug-in. Adobe generally
recommends keeping the default value of 0.

MaxQueueSize
Located in the GlobalQueue, EdgeCore, Services containers.
Specifies the maximum number of pending IPC messages in the queue. When messages are sent to a process that is
not running, the message can be put in a pending queue for the process. When the process starts again, it picks up the
messages. Use the MaxQueueSize element to limit the number of messages left in the pending queue. Limiting
messages saves shared memory if the process never starts. The value is specified in kilobytes. The default size is 100 KB.

MaxSampleSize
The maximum allowable size of a sample in an F4V/MP4 file, in kilobytes. You can increase this value up to 4GB if a
file has larger samples. The default value is 16777216 (16 MB).
See also
Playback

MaxSize (FLVCache)
Located in the FLVCache container.
Specifies the maximum size of the recorded media cache in megabytes. The default value is 500 MB. This value shares
memory with the running process and has a limit of 2 GB in Windows and 3 GB in Linux on 32-bit configurations. On
64-bit configurations, the file memory available to the process is only limited by the amount of RAM.
The size of the cache limits the number of unique streams the server can publish. To increase the probability that a
requested stream will be located in the recorded media cache, increase the value of MaxSize. To decrease the amount
of memory the server process uses, decrease the value of MaxSize. Note that increasing the file cache size to too large
of a size can cause substantially deteriorated system performance.

MaxSize (HandleCache)
Located in the HandleCache container.
Specifies the maximum number of handles to cache. The minimum value is 0, which means that no handles are cached.
There is no maximum value; it can be the maximum number of handles that the operating system can support. The
default value is 100 handles.
Example
100

MaxSize (RecBuffer)
Located in the RecBuffer container.

Last updated 8/21/2014

215

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Specifies the maximum size to which the buffer can grow before messages are committed to file. The default value is 200
and the minimum value is 0. The higher the value, the longer the data will be held in the buffer before written to disk.
When you add DVR functionality to an application, the size of the recording buffer affects the play-while-record
experience. A shorter buffer decreases latency between real-time and playback, but hurts performance.
Example
5120

MaxTimestampSkew
Located in the RecBuffer container.
Specifies the maximum gap in milliseconds between two adjacent messages when comparing the message timestamps
with the real time. The server logs a warning when the timestamps between two adjacent messages are bigger than the
difference in real time plus the value set here for MaxTimestampSkew. This element is disabled by default. To enable
the element, set the value to a positive number.
Example
2

MaxTracks
Located in the Playback container.
The maximum number of tracks allowed in a file. While only one video, audio, and data track may be played, files with
up to this many tracks can be parsed. More than this amount is a file error. The default value is 64.

MaxUnitSize
Located in the MessageCache, SmallMemPool, LargeMemPool, and SegmentsPool containers.
Specifies the maximum size, in kilobytes, of a memory chunk allowed in a memory pool. The default size is 16 KB.
Adobe Media Server has several memory pools (distinct from the recorded media cache) that hold memory in chunks.
This setting ensures that chunks larger than MaxUnitSize are released to system memory instead of being held in the
pool so that large memory chunks are available.
For example, if this tag is under the MessageCache tag, the server doesn’t cache any messages greater than
MaxUnitSize.
Example

16


MaxUrlLength
Defines the maximum allowed RTMP and SWF file URL lengths, in bytes. Most modern browsers support up to 64KB
URLs. The default value is 32KB. The maximum allowable value is 1000KB.
Use this element to restrict the URL lengths of incoming requests. To restrict the length of outbound NetConnection
URLs from SSAS, use the MaxUrlLength element in the Application.xml file.

Last updated 8/21/2014

216

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Example
65536

See also
Security

MaxVideoSampleDescriptions
Located in the Recording container.
Each change in codec for a content type has a sample description. For example, two different video codecs each have
their own sample description. The server allocates space for sample descriptions when it creates a file. If the codec type
changes more than the number of available descriptions, the server stops recording. However, adding too many
descriptions takes up unnecessary space for every file that the records. The default value is 10.
Note: This setting applies to recording MP4/F4V files only.

MessageCache
Container element.
The elements nested within the MessageCache container control how the message cache holds onto messages used by
the system running Adobe Media Server and keeps them in memory for reuse instead of returning them and
requesting them from the operating system.
Messages are the essential communication units of Adobe Media Server. Recycling them improves the server’s
performance.
Contained elements
MaxCacheUnits, MaxCacheSize, MaxUnitSize, FreeRatio, GlobalRatio, MaxAge, UpdateInterval,
FreeMemRatio

MinConnectionThreads
Located in the HTTP and RTMP (Connector) containers.
Specifies the minimum number of threads in the pool for I/O operations. The default is 1 multiplied by the number of
processors. To use the default, specify the value 0.
Example
0

MinEventQueueThreads
Located in the Edge (ResourceLimits) container.
The minimum number of threads per scheduler queue. The default value is 2.

MinGoodVersion
Located in the SWFVerification container.

Last updated 8/21/2014

217

218

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Specifies the minimum accepted version of SWF verification feature that the server allows. The default value of 0
accepts current and all future versions.
Example
0

MinIOThreads
Located in the RTMP (Connector), Edge, Core, Admin, ECCP, and ACCP containers.
The element specifies the minimum number of threads that can be created for I/O operations.
Adobe Media Server can receive connections through various protocols. The default value for this element varies
according to which container protocol it is nested within.
Container

Default Value

Description

ACCP

2X number of processors

Use 0 for the default value.

Admin

2X number of processors

Use 0 for the default value.

Core

2X number of processors

Use 0 for the default value.

ECCP

2X number of processors

Use 0 for the default value.

Edge

2X number of processors

Use 0 for the default value.

RTMP

2X number of processors

Use -1 for the default value.

Example

0


Mp4
Container element.
The Mp4 elements configure how the server plays and records MP4, F4V, MOV, and other MP4 file types.
Contained elements
Playback, Recording,

MsgPoolGC
Specifies how often the server checks for content in and removes content from the global message pool.
The default interval for checking and removing content is 60 seconds.

NetworkingIPv6
Enables or disables Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6). This is an empty tag.
The operating system network stack should be configured to support IPv6, if desired. Adobe Media Server
automatically detects the operating system configuration; this element can force Adobe Media Server to use IPv4 even
if IPv6 is available.

Last updated 8/21/2014

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Example


NumCRThreads
Located in the RTMP (Connector) container.
Specifies the number of completion routine threads in Windows 32-bit systems for edge server I/O processing.
Example
0

NumSchedQueues
Located in the Edge (ResourceLimits) container.
The number of scheduler queues. The default value is 1.

Options
Located in the Httpd container.
Specifies additional switches for the command-line argument that starts and stops the web server.

Order
Located in the AdminServer container.
Specifies the order in which to evaluate the Allow and Deny elements.
Example
To process the request if not in  or in , set:
Deny,Allow

To process the request if in  and not in , set:
Allow, Deny

OtherAutoBufferReadSize
Located in the Playback container.
The server caches F4V/MP4 video, audio, and other data in memory. Caching data allows the server to make fewer
disk reads and to perform better. Each data type (audio, video, and other) has its own cache. You can tune the size of
each cache, depending on the type of content you are delivering, to achieve better disk performance.
The minimum size is 1024 bytes. The default value is 1024 bytes.

Playback
Container element.
The Playback elements configure how the server plays back MP4, F4V, MOV, and other MP4 file types.

Last updated 8/21/2014

219

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Contained elements
VideoAutoBufferReadSize, AudioAutoBufferReadSize, OtherAutoBufferReadSize, EnableAggMsgs
(playback), MaxAggMsgSize (playback), MaxTracks, MaxSampleSize, AllowAnyAACProfile,
AllowAnyAVCProfile

Plugins
Container element.
The elements nested within the Plugins element configure plug-ins.
Contained elements
FilePlugin, UserDefined

Process
Container element.
There are 2 Process elements, one for Adobe Media Server and one for Adobe Media Administration Server. The
elements nested within the Process element contain the UID and GID elements for all server processes. The elements
are applicable to servers running on Linux systems only. For security reasons, on Linux, all the server processes switch
from root to the UID and GID. If you do not specify a value for UID and GID, the server runs as root.
Contained elements
UID, GID

ProcVMSizeMonitorInterval
The monitoring interval for process virtual memory use, in seconds. The default value is 60.

ProcVMSizeNominal
The log notification threshold for reverting to a nominal process virtual memory use, in megabytes, after the
ProcVMSizeWarn threshold has been triggered. The default value is 1600.

ProcVMSizeWarn
The log warning threshold for high process virtual memory use, in megabytes. The default value is 1800.

Program
Located in the Httpd container.
The location of the executable file for the web server. The default value is bin/httpd.

Protocol
Container element.
Adobe Media Server receives connections through various protocols. The elements in this container configure those
protocols and how the connection requests are received.

Last updated 8/21/2014

220

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

To set the values of all I/O and connection threads processing, follow these guidelines:

• A value of 0 allocates the default number of threads (10).
• A value greater than 0 allocates the exact number of threads specified.
• A value less than 0 ties the number of connection threads to the number (N) of processors:
• -1 means 1 x N threads
• -2 means 2 x N threads, etc.
Contained elements
ACCP, ECCP, RTMP (Protocol)

PublicIP
Specifies that if the system has more than two network ports, use this element to create a public IP address.

Raw
Contains elements that control the RAW adaptor.
Adobe Media Server supports a RAW (Record and Watch) file format that records media into configurable chunks
that can be streamed to any version of Flash Player. The RAW file format enables you to serve long-length, multibitrate DVR streams without running into performance issues. Use the RAW file format to record and play back all
streams that Adobe Media Server supports, including H.264 video, data-only, audio-only, and so on.The RAW file
format is a server feature; any version of Flash Player can publish or play a RAW stream. However, multi-bitrate stream
support (also called dynamic streaming) requires Flash Player 10 and higher.
Container element.
Note: The RAW file format is internal to Adobe Media Server. At this time, you cannot edit these files with third-party
tools or convert the files to FLV format or MP4 format.
Availability
Flash Media Server 4
Contained elements
MaxAggMsgSize (raw)

See also
Streams

ReadBufferSize
The size of the largest I/O read buffers that the server uses, in kilobytes. Larger buffers provide better performance for
some use cases. However, larger buffers use more memory. The default value is 4096.

RecBuffer
Container element.
Contains elements that configure the buffer for recording.

Last updated 8/21/2014

221

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

When you add DVR functionality to an application, the size of the recording buffer affects the play-while-record
experience. A shorter buffer decreases latency between real-time and playback, but hurts performance.
Contained elements
MaxSize (RecBuffer), MaxTimestampSkew, MaxFlushSize, MaxFlushTime, AllowedVideoLag

Recording
Container element.
The Recording elements configure how the server records F4V/MP4 file types.
Contained elements
MaxELSTEntries, MaxAudioSampleDescriptions, MaxDataSampleDescriptions,
MaxVideoSampleDescriptions

RecordsNumber
The number of records in the log queue. If an attempt to open the log fails and the number of records in the queue is
greater than or equal to this number, the core process is shut down.The default value of -1 allows an unlimited number
of records.

RecoveryTime
The time to wait, in seconds, before allowing another login attempt after a user has reached the value of MaxFailures.
The default value is 30 seconds.
If the number of failed login attempts equals the value of LockoutLimit, the admin server must be restarted before
that user can attempt to log in again.
Example
30

See also
LogInLimits, LockoutLimit, MaxFailures

Registry
Flash Media Server 4.5
Enable a registry core to activate a single AMSCore instance dedicated to handling services for Adobe Media Gateway.
This AMSCore process comes to life on start-up and allows Adobe Media Gateway to register its services to Adobe
Media Server. Enable this registry core only when using Adobe Media Gateway.


_defaultRoot_


See also
“AdaptorName” on page 195

Last updated 8/21/2014

222

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

ResourceLimits
Container element.
The elements nested within the ResourceLimits container specify the maximum resource limits for the server,
including the HTTP and RTMP protocols.
Contained elements
FLVCachePurge, FLVCache, RecBuffer, CPUMonitor, ThreadPoolGC, MsgPoolGC, ApplicationGC, FLVCacheSize,
SocketGC, ProcVMSizeMonitorInterval, ProcVMSizeWarn,ProcVMSizeNominal, SSLSessionCacheGC,
Connector, Protocol, IPCQueues, MessageCache, SmallMemPool, LargeMemPool, SegmentsPool, Master

RetryNumber
Number of times to retry opening a log file. Relevant when opening a log file fails. The default value is 0.

RetrySleep
Number of milliseconds the server waits before retrying to open a log file. Relevant when opening a log file fails. The
default value is 100 ms.

Root
Container element.
The Root element is a container for all the other elements in the Server.xml file.

RTMP (AdminServer)
Container element.
This container holds elements that configure which versions of RTMP can be used to connect to the Administration
Server. RTMP is the protocol used for communication between Flash Player and Adobe Media Server.
Contained elements
RTMPE

RTMP (Connector)
Container element.
This container holds the elements that configure RTMP (Real-Time Messaging Protocol) for communication between
Flash Remoting and Adobe Media Server.
The following reference table lists the default values for all thread configurations.
Default Value

Description

0

Allocates the default number of threads (10).

>0

Allocates the exact number of threads specified.

Last updated 8/21/2014

223

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Default Value

Description

<0

Associates the default value with the number (N) of processors.

-1

Allocates 1xN threads.

-2

Allocates 2xN threads.

Contained elements
MinIOThreads, MaxIOThreads, NumCRThreads, MinConnectionThreads, MaxConnectionThreads,
MaxConnectionQueueSize

RTMP (Protocol)
Container element.
This container holds the elements that configure RTMP (Real-Time Messaging Protocol). RTMP is the protocol used
for communication between Flash Player and Adobe Media Server.
Contained elements
Edge, Core, Admin, SocketSndBuf, SocketRcvBuff

RTMPE
Located in the RTMP container.
Specifies whether Encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol (RTMPE) can be used to connect to the Administration
Server. (RTMPE also covers RTMPTE.) The default value is true. Setting this element to false prohibits RTMPE
and RTMPTE from being used.

Scope
Located in the Logging container.
This element determines whether to write a separate log file for each virtual host or to write one log file for the server.
The value for this element is server or vhost. The default is server, which enables logging for all processes on the
server.

Security
Description
Container element.
The elements in this section configure server security.
Contained elements
LogInLimits, MaxUrlLength, VirtualDirectoryForFile
Availability
Flash Media Server 4

Last updated 8/21/2014

224

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

SegmentsPool
Container element.
The elements in this section configure how the segments pool caches segments of video files within Adobe Media
Server to increase performance of video streaming and keep frequently used video files in memory.
Contained elements
MaxCacheUnits, MaxCacheSize, MaxUnitSize, FreeRatio, GlobalRatio, MaxAge, UpdateInterval,
FreeMemRatio

Server
Container element.
The elements nested within the Server element contains the elements that configure the server.
Contained elements
NetworkingIPv6, CrossDomainPath, Plugins, SSL, Process, Mask, LicenseInfo, LicenseInfoEx,
ReadBufferSize, AdminServer, AutoCloseIdleClients, ResourceLimits, Logging, Localhost, PublicIP,
SWFVerification, Streams, Httpd

ServerDomain
Specifies the host name (with the domain) of the server computer. The server uses this value to set the hostname in the
referrer header tag when making a net connection to a remote server. If this element is empty the hostname field is
empty in referrer header. For security purposes, some application servers require this information as a part of
incoming connection requests. If this element is not set, the host name field is not supplied in the referrer header.
Example
mydomain.global.mycompany.com

Service
Located in the Httpd container.
On Windows only, specifies the name used to install the webserver as an NT service.

Services
Container element.
The elements in this section control the IPC message queue used by the edge and core processes to communicate with
each other.
Contained elements
HeapSize, MaxQueueSize

SmallMemPool
Container element.

Last updated 8/21/2014

225

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

The elements in this section configure the small memory pool, which saves small chunks of memory in the server to
increase performance of small allocations.
Contained elements
MaxCacheUnits, MaxCacheSize, MaxUnitSize, FreeRatio, GlobalRatio, MaxAge, UpdateInterval,
FreeMemRatio

SocketGC
Located in the AdminServer and ResourceLimits containers.
Specifies how often, in seconds, the server checks for and removes inactive sockets. The default value is 60 seconds.
Example
60

SocketOverflowBuckets
Located in the Edge, Core, Admin, ECCP, ACCP containers.
Specifies the number of overflow buckets if all slots in the socket table are in use.
The default number of buckets is 16; specify -1 to use the default number of buckets.
Example

-1


SocketRcvBuff
The size of the client socket receive buffer, in bytes. The default value is 0, which tells the server to use the operating
system default values.
You should explicitly set this value only if you have a very high bandwidth connection that requires a large socket
buffer. Setting a high value significantly increases the amount of memory used by each client. It is recommended that
you do not explicitly set this value.

SocketSndBuf
The size of the client socket send buffer, in bytes. The default value is 0, which tells the server to use the operating
system default values.
You should explicitly set this value only if you have a very high bandwidth connection that requires a large socket
buffer. Setting a high value significantly increases the amount of memory used by each client. It is recommended that
you do not explicitly set this value.

SocketTableSize
Located in the Edge, Core, Admin, ECCP, ACCP containers.
Specifies the size of the direct-access socket table for quick look-up. The default size is 200. Use -1 for the default value.

Last updated 8/21/2014

226

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Example

-1


SSL
Container element.
The SSL elements in Server.xml configure the server to act as an SSL-enabled client by securing the outgoing
connections.
Contained elements
SSLRandomSeed, SSLSessionCacheGC, SSLClientCtx

SSLCACertificateFile
Located in the SSLClientCtx container.
Specifies the name of a file that contains one or more CA (Certificate Authority) digital certificates in PEM (Privacy
Enhanced Mail) encryption format.

SSLCACertificatePath
Located in the SSLClientCtx container.
Specifies the name of a directory containing CA certificates. Each file in the directory must contain only a single CA
certificate. File names must be the hash with “0” as the file extension.
For Win32 only: If this element is empty, attempts are made to find CA certificates in the certs directory located at the
same level as the conf directory. The Windows certificate store can be imported into this directory by running
AMSMaster - console - initialize from the command line.

SSLCipherSuite
Located in the SSLClientCtx container.
Specifies the suite of encryption ciphers that the server uses to secure communications.
This element is a colon-delimited list of encryption resources, such as a key-exchange algorithm, authentication
method, encryption method, digest type, or one of a selected number of aliases for common groupings. Each item in
the cipher list specifies the inclusion or exclusion of an algorithm or cipher. In addition, there are special keywords and
prefixes. For example, the keyword ALL specifies all ciphers, and the prefix ! removes the cipher from the list.
The default cipher list instructs the server to accept all ciphers, but block those using anonymous Diffie-Hellman
authentication, block low-strength ciphers, block export ciphers, block MD5 hashing, and sort ciphers by strength
from highest to lowest level of encryption.
Important: Contact Adobe Support before changing the default settings.
The cipher list consists of one or more cipher strings separated by colons. Commas or spaces are also acceptable
separators, but colons are normally used.
The string of ciphers can take several different forms.

• It can consist of a single cipher suite, such as RC4-SHA.

Last updated 8/21/2014

227

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

• It can represent a list of cipher suites containing a certain algorithm, or cipher suites of a certain type.
For example, SHA1 represents all cipher suites using the digest algorithm SHA1, and SSLv3 represents all SSL v3
algorithms.

• Lists of cipher suites can be combined in a single cipher string using the + character as a logical and operation.
For example, SHA1+DES represents all cipher suites containing the SHA1 and DES algorithms.

• Each cipher string can be optionally preceded by the characters !, -, or +.
• If ! is used, then the ciphers are permanently deleted from the list. The ciphers deleted can never reappear in the
list even if they are explicitly stated.

• If - is used, then the ciphers are deleted from the list, but some or all of the ciphers can be added again later.
• If + is used, then the ciphers are moved to the end of the list. This option doesn't add any new ciphers—it just moves
matching existing ones.

• If none of these characters is present, then the string is just interpreted as a list of ciphers to be appended to the
current preference list.

• If the list includes any ciphers already present, the server does not evaluate them.
• The cipher string @STRENGTH sorts the current cipher list in order of the length of the encryption algorithm key.
The components can be combined with the appropriate prefixes to create a list of ciphers, including only those ciphers
the server is prepared to accept, in the order of preference.
Example
This cipher string instructs the server to accept all ciphers except those using anonymous or ephemeral Diffie-Hellman
key exchange.
ALL:!ADH:!EDH

These cipher strings instruct the server to accept only RSA key exchange and refuse export or null encryption. The
server evaluates both strings as equivalent.
RSA:!NULL!EXP
RSA:LOW:MEDIUM:HIGH

This cipher list instructs the server to accept all ciphers but place them in order of decreasing strength. This sequencing
allows clients to negotiate for the strongest cipher that both they and the server can accept.
ALL:+HIGH:+MEDIUM:+LOW:+EXP:+NULL

This string instructs the server to accept only high- and medium-strength encryption, with the high being preferred,
and reject export-strength versions.
ALL:+HIGH:!LOW:!EXP:!NULL

This string instructs the server to accept all ciphers but to order them so that SSLv2 ciphers come after SSLv3 ciphers.
ALL:+SSLv2

The following is the complete list of components that the server can evaluate.
Key exchange algorithm

Description

kRSA

Key exchange

kDHr

Diffie-Hellman key exchange with RSA key

kDHd

Diffie-Hellman key exchange with DSA key

Last updated 8/21/2014

228

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Key exchange algorithm

Description

RSA

Ephemeral Diffie-Hellman key exchange

DH

RSA key exchange

EDH

Ephemeral Diffie-Hellman key exchange

ADH

Anonymous Diffie-Hellman key exchange

Authentication methods

Description

aNULL

No authentication

aRSA

RSA authentication

aDSS

DSS authentication

aDH

Diffie-Hellman authentication

Encryption methods

Description

eNULL

No encoding

DES

DES encoding

3DES

Triple-DES encoding

RC4

RC4 encoding

RC2

RC2 encoding

IDEA

IDEA encoding

NULL

No encryption

EXP

All export ciphers (40-bit encryption)

LOW

Low-strength ciphers (no export, DES)

MEDIUM

128-bit encryption

HIGH

Triple-DES encoding

Digest types

Description

MD5

MD5 hash function

SHA1

SHA1 hash function

SHA

SHA hash function

Additional aliases

Description

All

All ciphers

SSLv2

All SSL version 2.0 ciphers

SSLv3

All SSL version 3.0 ciphers

DSS

All ciphers using DSS authentication

Last updated 8/21/2014

229

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

SSLClientCtx
Container element.
Configures the server to act as an SSL-enabled client by securing the outgoing connections.
Contained elements
SSLVerifyCertificate, SSLCACertificatePath, SSLCACertificateFile, SSLVerifyDepth, SSLCipherSuite

SSLRandomSeed
Located in the SSL container.
Specifies the number of bytes of entropy to use for seeding the PRNG. You cannot specify anything less than 8 bytes,
and the default is 16. Entropy is a measure of randomness. The more entropy, the more random numbers from the
PRNG will be.
Example
16

SSLSessionCacheGC
Located in the SSL container.
Specifies how often to check for and remove expired sessions from the server-side session cache.
Example
5

SSLVerifyCertificate
Located in the SSLClientCtx container.
Specifies whether the certificate returned by the server should be verified. Certificate verification is enabled by default.
To disable certificate verification, specify false.
Note: Disabling certificate verification can result in security problems.
Example
true

SSLVerifyDepth
Located in the SSLClientCtx container.
Specifies the maximum depth of the certificate chain to accept. If a self-signed root certificate cannot be found within
this depth, certificate verification fails. The default value is 9.
Example
9

Last updated 8/21/2014

230

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

StreamAdaptors
Specifies which library to load for a particular stream, based on the stream’s prefix. This effectively defines a whitelist
of libraries that can be loaded by the server for each stream type.
When you play a stream, you specify a prefix. The prefix indicates what kind of stream it is. The following example
shows a prefix that indicates that the stream is of type MP3:
play("mp3:mystream.mp3");

Note that the the prefix does not necessarily match the file type. For example, for MP4, you can specify the following:
play("mp4:mystream.f4v");

In this case, MP4 is the encoding, not the file type. So you can use mp4:mystream.mov, mp4:mystream.mp4, and so on.
To specify a library for a particular stream, add a sub-element with the following syntax:


Supported streams are:

• FLV (processed by the library specified by the flv sub-element)
• F4F (processed by the library specified by the f4f sub-element)
• ID3 (processed by the library specified by the id3 sub-element)
• MP3 (processed by the library specified by the mp3 sub-element)
• MP4 (processed by the library specified by the mp4 sub-element)
• RAW (processed by the library specified by the raw sub-element)
For FLV streams, you do not specify the prefix or the extension; for example:
play("mystream");

In this case, the adaptor that you define for the FLV file does not match the prefix (because there is none). The library
defined by the flv sub-element is matched by Adobe Media Server internally to determine which library to use to
process the stream.
Example

lib="libf4f"/>
lib="libmp3"/>
lib="libmp4"/>
lib="libraw"/>
lib="libid3"/>

See also
Streams

StreamLogLevel
Controls log levels for all stream adaptors (FLV, MP4, and RAW). Possible values are verbose, warning, and error.
The default value is warning.
Example
warning

Last updated 8/21/2014

231

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

See Also
Streams

Streams
Container element.
The Streams elements configure how the server plays and records MP4, F4V, MOV, and other MP4 file types.
Contained elements
Mp4, StreamLogLevel, StreamAdaptors

SWFFolder
Located in the SWFVerification container.
Specifies a folder containing SWF files that are verified to connect to any application on this server. Use a semicolon
to separate multiple directories.
Example
The following example allows SWF files from either the C or the D directory to be authenticated:
C:\SWFs;D:\SWFs

SWFVerification
Container element.
Contains elements that configure how SWF files connecting to an application are verified.
Contained elements
SWFFolder, DirLevelSWFScan, MaxInitDelay, MinGoodVersion,Cache

TerminatingCharacters
Located in the Logging container.
Specifies the final characters of each log entry in log files. The default is CRLF (carriage return and line feed).
Example
CRLF

ThreadPoolGC
Located in the ResourceLimits container.
Specifies in minutes how often Adobe Media Server checks for and removes unused I/O threads.
The default time is 20 minutes. You cannot specify less than 20 minutes.
Example
25

Last updated 8/21/2014

232

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Time
Located in the Logging container.
Specifies the time field in a log file.
The time field in a log file can be specified either as UMT (GMT) or local time. The default setting is local.
Example


TrimSize
Located in the HandleCache container.
Specifies a percentage of cached handles to remove. Can be specified as a number between 0 and 1, representing 0% to
100%. The default value is 0.2 (20%).
Example
0.2

TTL
Located in the Cache container.
Specifies in minutes how long each SWF file remains in the SWF verification data cache. The default value is 1440
minutes (24 hours).

UID
Located in the Process containers.
This element contains the server process user ID.
If you do not specify a UID or GID, the server or Administration Server runs as root. This element is applicable to Adobe
Media Server running on Linux systems only.
See also
GID

UpdateInterval
Specifies how often thread statistics are collected. The default value is every 1024 messages.
Example
1024

UpdateInterval (Cache)
Located in the Cache container.
Specifies the maximum time in minutes to wait for the server to scan the SWF folders for updates when there is a miss
in the cache. The default value is 5 minutes.

Last updated 8/21/2014

233

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

UserDefined
Container element.
Define elements within the UserDefined element to store data that File plug-ins and Authorization plug-ins can
retrieve.

VirtualDirectoryForFile
Enables virtual directory mappings for File objects. The default is disabled.
If you map File objects in the Application.xml file but don’t have the feature enabled in the Server.xml file, you'll see
the following message in the log:
"Virtual directories for file objects is not supported due to the Server level security
setting."

To avoid this log message, enable VirtualDirectoryForFile. For more information, see “Enable virtual directory
mappings for server-side File objects” on page 44.
Example


See also
Security

Availability
Flash Media Server 4

VideoAutoBufferReadSize
Located in the Playback container.
The server caches F4V/MP4 video, audio, and other data in memory. Caching data allows the server to make fewer
disk reads and to perform better. Each data type (audio, video, and other) has its own cache. You can tune the size of
each cache, depending on the type of content you are delivering, to achieve better disk performance. For example, if
you are delivering audio-only content, increase the AudioAutoBufferReadSize buffer, and decrease the
VideoAutoBufferReadSize buffer.
The minimum size is 1024 bytes. The default value is 153600 bytes.

Users.xml file
The Users.xm file is located at the root level of the RootInstall/conf directory. Edit this file to identify Adobe Media
Server administrators and set their access permissions. Edit this file to set permissions for Administration API calls to
Adobe Media Administration Server.
To see the element structure and default values, see the Users.xml file installed with Adobe Media Server in the
RootInstall/conf/ directory.

Last updated 8/21/2014

234

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

AdminServer
Container element.
The HttpCommands container nested within the AdminServer container configures the access level to Adobe Media
Administration Server.
The Administration Service is separate from Adobe Media Server. When administrators use the Administration
Console to connect to Adobe Media Server, they are connecting to Adobe Media Administration Server, which in turn
connects to the server.
Contained elements
HTTPCommands

Allow (HTTPCommands)
Lists the Adobe Media Administration Server commands that the administrator can access using HTTP. You can
authorize an administrator to use multiple HTTP commands for access by creating a comma-separated list of the
commands. The value All authorizes the administrator to use all HTTP commands. However, Adobe does not
recommend this usage as it creates a security risk.
Example
foo.yourcompany.com,adobe.com,10.60.1.133,10.60

See also
Enable, Deny (HTTPCommands), Order (HTTPCommands)

Allow (User)
Lists the specific hosts from which an administrator can connect to Adobe Media Administration Server. The
administrator can only connect to the server from those hosts specified in this Allow element. You authorize the
administrator’s access by creating a comma-delimited list of the accessible host names or domain names and/or full or
partial IP addresses. Whenever possible, use the IP addresses in the Allow element to improve the server’s
performance when processing connection requests.
Example
foo.yourcompany.com, adobe.com, 10.60.1.133, 10.60

See also
Password, Deny (User), Order (User)

Deny (HTTPCommands)
Adobe Media Server uses two elements named Deny: the Deny element in the User container and the Deny element in
the HTTPCommands container.
This Deny element lists the Adobe Media Administration Server commands that an administrator cannot use through
HTTP.
You can deny an administrator the use of multiple HTTP commands to access the Administration Service by creating
a comma-separated list of those HTTP commands.

Last updated 8/21/2014

235

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Example
Deny,Allow

See also
Enable, Allow (HTTPCommands), Order (HTTPCommands)

Deny (User)
Adobe Media Server uses two elements named Deny: the Deny element in the User container and the Deny element in
the HTTPCommands container.
This element lists those hosts from which the administrator is not authorized to connect to Adobe Media
Administration Server. You restrict the administrator’s access by creating a comma-delimited list of those host names
or domain names and/or (full or partial) IP addresses.
Example
This example lists the computers sending connection requests that Adobe Media Administration Server will not
accept.
foo.yourcompany.com,adobe.com,10.60.1.133,10.60

See also
Password, Allow (User), Order (User)

Enable
This element enables or disables the use of HTTP requests to execute administrative commands.
Setting this element enables HTTP requests to execute administrative commands. To disable administrative access
through the use of HTTP requests, do not set this element.
Example
true

See also
Allow (HTTPCommands), Deny (HTTPCommands), Order (HTTPCommands)

HTTPCommands
Container element.
This section contains the settings for those Adobe Media Administration Server commands that can be accessed
through HTTP. The default value is ping. Specify each Administration API that may be called over HTTP in a commadelimited list. When finished, restart the server.
Contained elements
Enable, Allow (HTTPCommands), Deny (HTTPCommands), Order (HTTPCommands)

Order (HTTPCommands)
Adobe Media Server uses two Order elements: one in the HTTPCommands container and another in the User container.

Last updated 8/21/2014

236

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Specifies the order in which to evaluate the Deny and Allow commands.
Example
The sequence Deny, Allow means the HTTP command is allowed if the command is in the Allow list of commands or
not in the Deny list.
Deny,Allow

The sequence Allow, Deny means the HTTP command is allowed if it is in the Allow list of commands and not in the
Deny list.
Allow,Deny

See also
Enable, Allow (HTTPCommands), Deny (HTTPCommands)

Order (User)
Adobe Media Server uses two Order elements: one in the HTTPCommands container, and the other in the User
container.
Specifies the sequence in which Adobe Media Server evaluates the Allow and Deny elements for an administrator.
Example
The default sequence Allow, Deny means that administrative access is allowed unless the user is specified in the Allow
list of commands and not in the Deny list:
Allow,Deny

The alternative sequence Deny, Allow means that administrative access is allowed unless the user is specified in the
Deny list of commands and not specified in the Allow list.
Deny,Allow

See also
Password, Allow (User), Deny (User)

Password
A salted hash of the password for vhost administrators.
Passwords cannot be empty strings (""). Passwords are usually encrypted.
Example
e206a5e1b52dcb4eaf024ca6adbe321b86cf0079bb747b78134ddaf8375e10aff905da0b28e84c5a

See also
Allow (User), Deny (User), Order (User)

PasswordPolicy
You can use PasswordPolicy element to enable or disable minimum password length policy.

Last updated 8/21/2014

237

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Example


Root
Container element.
The Root element is a container for all the other elements. If the Users.xml file resides under a virtual host (to define
administrators for that virtual host), then this tag must have its name attribute set to the name of the virtual host under
which it resides.
Example


User
This element identifies an administrator of the server.
You can identify multiple administrators of a virtual host by creating a profile for each administrator.
Example
Use the name attribute to identify the login name of a Adobe Media Server administrator:


See also
UserList

UserList
Container element.
The UserList element defines and holds information about server administrators.
Contained elements
User, Password, Allow (User), Deny (User), Order (User)

Vhost.xml file
The Vhost.xml configuration file defines an individual virtual host. Each virtual host directory on the server contains
its own Vhost.xml file.
The Vhost.xml file contains elements that define the settings for the virtual host. These settings include aliases for the
virtual host, the location of the virtual host’s application directory, limits on the resources the virtual host can use, and
other parameters.
Each virtual host must have its own directory inside the adaptor directory. The name of the directory must be the
actual name of the virtual host, such as streaming.adobe.com. Each defined virtual host must be mapped to a DNS
(domain name server) entry or another name resolution, such as a WINS address or a hosts file, that specifies an IP
address on the server computer.

Last updated 8/21/2014

238

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Each adaptor must contain a _defaultVHost_ directory in addition to the custom virtual hosts that you define. If a
client application tries to connect to a virtual host that does not exist, the server attempts to connect it to
_defaultVHost_. If you are using a secure port for the adaptor that contains the virtual host, you can only define one
virtual host for the adaptor, in addition to _defaultVHost_.
To see the element structure and default values in Vhost.xml, see the Vhost.xml file installed with Adobe Media Server
in the RootInstall/conf/_defaultRoot_/_defaultVhost_ directory.

Access
Container element.
The elements nested within the Access container configure the Access log settings. The Access logs are located in the
RootInstall\logs directory.
Contained elements
Checkpoints

AggregateMessages
Determines whether aggregate messages are delivered from the edge cache when the virtual host is configured as an
edge server. The default value is false.
If the edge server receives aggregate messages from the origin when this setting is disabled, the messages will be broken
up before being cached.
Example
65536>


See also
EdgeAutoDiscovery, RouteEntry

Alias
The Alias element specifies the assumed name(s) of the virtual host.
An alias is an alternative short name to use when connecting to the virtual host. The Alias element lets you specify
additional names to connect to this virtual host. Use the Alias element to shorten long host names, or if you want to
be able to connect to this virtual host with different names.
Example
abc.adobe.com

If the name of this virtual host is “abc.adobe.com”, but you wish to connect by simply specifying “abc”, then specify
the alias abc. Keep in mind that abc must still map to the same IP address as “abc.adobe.com”.
If more than one virtual host on the same adaptor has been defined with the same alias, then the first match that is
found is taken. You can avoid unexpected behavior by specifying a unique alias for each virtual host.
See also
AliasList

Last updated 8/21/2014

239

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

AliasList
Container element.
The elements nested in this section list the alias(es) for this virtual host. You can specify an unlimited number of aliases
by adding additional Alias elements. Each Alias must map to the IP address of the virtual host.
Contained elements
AggregateMessages

Allow
This element is a comma-delimited list of domains that are allowed to connect to this virtual host. The default value is
all. If the Allow element is left empty, the only connections allowed are those coming from the same domain.
Examples
adobe.com,yourcompany.com

This example allows only connections from the adobe.com and yourcompany.com domains.
localhost

This example allows localhost connections only.
all

This example allows connections from all domains. Adobe does not recommend the use of all; it may create a security risk.
See also
Anonymous

AllowOverride
Specifies whether overriding edge autodiscovery is allowed by specifying the rtmpd protocol. If enabled, edge
autodiscovery is performed by default.
Example
true

See also
Enabled, WaitTime

Anonymous
Configures the virtual host as an anonymous proxy (also called an implicit or transparent proxy) or as an explicit proxy.
The default value is false. Setting this element to true creates an implicit proxy to intercept the incoming URIs.
Both anonymous and explicit proxies intercept and aggregate the clients’ requests to connect to the origin server. Here
are some key differences between anonymous and explicit proxies:

• The identity (IP address and port number) of an anonymous server is hidden from the client.
• The anonymous proxy does not change or modify the routing information in the incoming URI before connecting
the client(s) to the origin server.

• The URI for an explicit proxy specifies the edge server(s) that will intercept connection requests to the origin server.
Last updated 8/21/2014

240

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

You can create a chain of proxies by specifying them in the URI.

• Any anonymous proxy in the chain passes on, without modification, the routing information in the URI to the next
edge server in the chain.

• The routing information in the URI for a chain of explicit proxies specifies the edge servers that are chained
together to intercept connection requests to the origin server.

• The routing information in the URI for a chain of explicit proxies specifically identifies the sequence of edge servers
in the chain.

• The URI for a chain of explicit proxies directs all clients’ connection requests through a specific sequence of edge
servers before making the connection to the origin server.

• The explicit proxy modifies the routing information in the URI by stripping off its token or identifier in the URI
before passing the URI on to the next server in the chain.
Example
false

See also
Mode, CacheDir, LocalAddress, RouteTable, EdgeAutoDiscovery, AggregateMessages

AppInstanceGC
Specifies how often to check for and remove unused resources for application instances, such as Shared Objects,
Streams, and Script engines.
The default interval is 1 minute.
Example
1

See also
MaxConnections, MaxEdgeConnections, MaxAppInstances, MaxStreams, MaxSharedObjects

AppsDir
Specifies the Applications directory for this virtual host.
The Applications directory is the base directory where all applications for this virtual host are defined. You define an
application by creating a subdirectory with the application name.

• In Windows, the default AppsDir location is C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Media Server 4\applications.
• In Linux, the default location is /opt/adobe/ams/applications.
Note: If you use this tag to map to a network drive, see “Mapping directories to network drives” on page 50 for additional
information.
Example 1
C:\MyApps;D:\NewApps

Last updated 8/21/2014

241

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

You can specify multiple applications directories by separating locations with a semicolon (;). You can specify two
locations, each of which contains application subdirectories. If you change the default location of the AppsDir
element, be sure to include a directory named admin in each directory. This ensures that the Administration Console
(ams_adminConsole.swf) will be able to connect to the virtual host.
If no location is specified for this element, the applications directory is assumed to be located in the vhost directory.
Example 2
The following example shows a mapping to a network drive:
\\myNetworkDrive\share\amsapps

See also
AliasList, ResourceLimits, VirtualKeys

AutoCloseIdleClients
Container element.
Determines whether or not to close idle clients automatically.
Set the enable attribute to true to close idle clients. If the enable attribute is omitted or set to false, the feature is
disabled. The default value is false.
A client is active when it is sending or receiving data. Use AutoCloseIdleClients to specify how often the server
should check for idle clients. When a client has been idle longer than the maximum idle time (60 seconds by default),
the server sends a status message to the NetConnectionobject (the client). The server closes the client connection to
the server and writes a message to the access log. The server also writes a message such as “Client x has been idle for y
seconds” in the core and event logs.
To configure the closing of idle connections, you must enable the feature in the Server.xml file. Once you enable the
feature in the Server.xml file, you can disable the feature for individual virtual hosts in the Vhost.xml files or for
individual applications in Application.xml. The values defined in the Vhost.xml configuration file apply to all clients
connected to the Vhost, unless values are defined in the Application.xml file. The Application.xml values override the
Vhost.xml values. Subsequently, the values defined in the Server.xml configuration file apply to all clients connected
to the server, unless the values are defined in the Vhost.xml file. The Vhost.xml values override the Server.xml values.
Example

600


See also
AppsDir, MaxIdleTime

CacheDir
Container element.
This element enables or disables writing recorded streams to disk. Set this element on an edge server or an intermediate
origin server to control the caching behavior. The contents of the cache change. This element controls whether the
cached streams are written to disk, in addition to being cached in memory.

Last updated 8/21/2014

242

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

The edge server caches content locally to aid performance, especially for vod (video on demand) applications. Caching
static content can reduce the overall load placed on the origin server.
The default value of the enabled attribute is false. The useAppDir attribute determines whether to separate cache
subdirectories by application. The default value is true.
If a server has multiple virtual hosts, each virtual host should point to its own cache directory.
Contained elements
Mode, Anonymous, LocalAddress, RouteTable, Path, MaxSize
See also
RequestTimeout

Checkpoints
Enables logging checkpoint events. Checkpoint events log bytes periodically from the start to the end of an event. The
following are available as checkpoint events: connect-continue, play-continue, and publish-continue.
This element contains the enable attribute which you can set to true or false. Set the enable attribute to true to
turn on checkpoint events in logs. The default value is false.
You must enable checkpoint events at the server level in the Server.xml file. You can disable checkpoints at the vhost
and application level in the Vhost.xml and Application.xml files. You can also override the logging interval at the vhost
and application levels.
Contained elements
CheckInterval, LogInterval

DNSSuffix
Specifies the primary DNS suffix for this virtual host.
If a reverse DNS look up fails to return the domain as part of the host name, then this element is used as the domain
suffix.
See also
AliasList, AppsDir, ResourceLimits, VirtualKeys, VirtualDirectory

EdgeAutoDiscovery
Container element.
Contains elements that configure edge autodiscovery. An edge server may connect to another server that is part of a
cluster. In this case, the edge server tries to determine which server in the cluster it should connect to (may or may not
be the server specified in the URL).
Example

false
true
1000


Last updated 8/21/2014

243

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

See also
Enabled, AllowOverride, WaitTime

Enabled
Specifies whether edge autodiscovery is enabled. If Enabled is set to true, the edge server tries to determine to which
server in a cluster it should connect. The default value is false.
Example
false

See also
AllowOverride, WaitTime

Key
When Flash Player connects to Adobe Media Server, it sends the server a string containing its platform and version
information. You can add Key elements that map Flash Player information to keys. The keys can be any alphanumeric
value. In the following example, the keys are A and B:



8,0,0,0"
6,0,0,0"
8,0,0,0"
6,0,0,0"

to="WIN
to="WIN
to="MAC
to="MAC

9,0,45,0">A
7,9,9,9">B
9,0,45,0">A
7,9,9,9">B

In the VirtualDirectory element, you map virtual directories used in URLs to physical directories containing
streams. In the following example, if a client with key A requests a stream with the URL
NetStream.play("vod/someMovie"), it is served the stream c:\on2\someMovie.flv. If a client with key B requests a
stream with the URL NetStream.play("vod/someMovie"), it is served the stream c:\sorenson\someMovie.flv.

vod;c:\on2
vod;c:\sorenson


Note: You can also set these values in a server-side script. For more information, see the Client.virtualKey and
Stream.setVirtualPath() entries in the Server-Side ActionScript Language Reference.
For more information, see the “Configuring content storage” section of the Configuration and Administration Guide
at www.adobe.com/go/learn_ams_content_en.
See also
VirtualKeys

LocalAddress
This element binds an outgoing edge connection to a specific local IP address.
The LocalAddress element lets you allocate incoming and outgoing connections to different network interfaces. This
strategy is useful when configuring an edge to either transparently pass on or intercept requests and responses.

Last updated 8/21/2014

244

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

If the LocalAddress element is not specified, then outgoing connections bind to the value of the INADDR_ANY
Windows system variable.
See also
Proxy

Logging
Container element.
Contains elements that control logging.
Contained elements

LogInterval
Specifies how often to log a checkpoint, in seconds. This value should be larger than the value for CheckInterval. If
the value is smaller, the server logs a checkpoint every check interval. The default value is 3600 seconds (60 minutes).

MaxAggMsgSize
Specifies the size in bytes of aggregate messages returned from the edge cache. (Aggregate messages must be enabled.)
The default size is 65,536.
This setting only applies to messages retrieved from the disk cache. Aggregate messages received directly from the
origin server are returned as is and their size is determined by the origin server settings for aggregate message size.
Example
66536

See also
AggregateMessages

MaxAppInstances
Specifies the maximum number of application instances that can be loaded into this virtual host.
A chat application, for example, might require more than one instance, because each chat room represents a separate
instance of the application on the server. The default number is 15,000 application instances.
A Flash SWF file defines which application instance it is connecting to by the parameters it includes with its
ActionScript connect call.
Example
15000

See also
MaxConnections, MaxEdgeConnections, MaxStreams, MaxSharedObjects, AppInstanceGC

MaxConnections
Specifies the maximum number of clients that can connect to this virtual host.

Last updated 8/21/2014

245

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

The maximum number of allowed connections is encoded in the license file. Connections are denied if the specified
limit is exceeded. The default number is -1, which represents an unlimited number of connections.
Example
-1

See also
MaxAppInstances, MaxEdgeConnections, MaxStreams, MaxSharedObjects, AppInstanceGC

MaxEdgeConnections
Specifies the maximum number of connections that can remotely connect to this virtual host. This number is enforced
by the license key.
Example
1

See also
MaxConnections, MaxAppInstances, MaxStreams, MaxSharedObjects, AppInstanceGC

MaxIdleTime
Specifies the maximum idle time allowed, in seconds, before a client is disconnected.
The default idle time is 3600 seconds (60 minutes). If you set a value lower than 60 seconds, the server uses the value
1200 seconds (20 minutes).
A different value can be set for each virtual host. If no value is set for this element in the Vhost.xml file, the server uses
the value in the Server.xml file. The value for the MaxIdleTime element in the Vhost.xml file overrides the value of the
MaxIdleTime element in the Server.xml file.
Example
3600

See also
AutoCloseIdleClients

MaxSharedObjects
Specifies the maximum number of shared objects that can be created. The default number of shared objects is 50,000.
Example
50000

See also
MaxConnections, MaxEdgeConnections, MaxAppInstances, MaxStreams, AppInstanceGC

Last updated 8/21/2014

246

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

MaxSize
Specifies the maximum allowed size of the disk cache, in gigabytes. The server does LRU (least recently used) cleanup
of the cache to keep it under the maximum size. The default value is 32 gigabytes. A value of 0 disables the disk cache.
A value of -1 specifies no maximum.
See also
NumBuckets, NumBucketsAtRisk

MaxStreams
Specifies the maximum number of streams that can be created for live streams. The default number of streams is
250,000.
Note: This property is ignored for recorded streams.
Example
250000

See also
MaxConnections, MaxAppInstances, MaxSharedObjects, AppInstanceGC

Mode
The Mode element configures whether the server runs as an origin server or as an edge server.
The Mode element can be set to local or remote. The default setting is local.

• When the Mode element is set to local, Adobe Media Server runs its applications locally and is called an origin
server.

• When the Mode element is set to remote, the server behaves as an edge server that connects to the applications
running on an origin server.

• If the Mode element is undefined, the virtual host is evaluated as an alias for the default virtual host and assumes its
configuration.
Example
local

See also
Anonymous, CacheDir, LocalAddress, RouteTable, EdgeAutoDiscovery

NumBuckets
Specifies the number of buckets to divide the cache into. The aggregate cache size is defined by MaxSize. Can be any
value from 2 to 128; the default value is 8. More buckets mean that a smaller portion of the disk content will be deleted
at any one time, but also that files will need to be moved to new buckets more often, which results in more disk activity
and lower performance.
You can define the number of buckets that contain contents that can be moved with NumBucketsAtRisk.

Last updated 8/21/2014

247

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Example
10

See also
MaxSize, NumBucketsAtRisk

NumBucketsAtRisk
Specifies the number of buckets considered to be “at risk” of deletion. Can be any value from 0 to NumBuckets - 1; the
default is NumBuckets/2. To avoid moving files too frequently at the expense of disk performance, only segments that
are in the oldest NumBucketsAtRisk buckets will be moved to the newest bucket when accessed. A value of 0 means
that segments, once pulled from the origin, are never moved to a newer bucket, effectively turning the cache into an
LRU (least recently used) cache.
The default value of NumBuckets/2 means that only segments in the “older half” of content will be moved. The idea is
that segments in the “newer half” of content are more likely to be accessed again before they are deleted, thus making
it less important to move them.
Example
1

See also
MaxSize, NumBuckets

Path
Specifies the physical location of the proxy cache. By default, the location is RootInstall/cache/. The value must be an
absolute path. Relative paths are ignored and the server uses the default folder.
See also

Proxy
Container element.
The elements nested in this section configure this virtual host as an edge server that can forward connection requests
from applications running on one remote server to another server.
Note: Whenever a virtual host is configured as an edge server, it behaves locally as a remote server.
If this virtual host is configured to run in remote mode and you want to configure the properties of an outgoing SSL
connection to an upstream server, the SSL connection to upstream servers will use the default configuration specified
in the SSL section of the Server.xml file.
Contained elements
Mode, Anonymous, CacheDir, LocalAddress, RouteTable, EdgeAutoDiscovery, SSL, AggregateMessages,
RequestTimeout

Last updated 8/21/2014

248

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

RequestTimeout
The maximum amount of time, in seconds, the server waits for a response to a request from an upstream server. A
request can be for metadata, content, and so on. This value -1 specifies an unlimited amount of time (no timeout). The
default value is 2 seconds.
See also
CacheDir

ResourceLimits
Container element.
The elements in this section specify the maximum resource limits for this virtual host.
Contained elements
MaxConnections, MaxEdgeConnections, MaxAppInstances, MaxStreams, MaxSharedObjects, AppInstanceGC,

RouteEntry
Instructs the edge server to forward the connection request to one server’s IP address and port number [host:port] to
a different IP address and port number.
Edge servers are configured with the RouteEntry element to direct connections to another destination. The
RouteTable element contains the RouteEntry elements that control where the edge server reroutes requests.
You can also add the protocol attribute to an individual RouteEntry element to specify how the edge server reroutes
requests. If no protocol is specified, however, Adobe Media Server applies the protocol specified in the RouteTable
element. Implicit proxies hide the routing information from the clients.
The connection syntax for this element is flexible, as demonstrated in the following examples.
Examples
This example shows how you can configure the edge to route all connections to the host foo to the host bar.


foo:1935;bar:80



Use of the wildcard character * to replace host and port.The example shows how to route connections destined for any
host on any port to port 1935 on the host foo.
*:*;foo:1935

The example instructs the server to route connections to any host on any port to the specified host on port 1936. For
example, if you were to connect to foo:1935, the connection would be routed to foo:1936.
*:*;*:1936

The example instructs the server to use the values for host and port on the left side as the values for host and port on
the right side, and to route connections destined for any host on any port to the same host on port 80.
*:*;*:80

Last updated 8/21/2014

249

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

The example instructs the server to route a host:port combination to null. Its effect is to reject all connections destined
for foo:80.
foo:80;null

See also
RouteTable

RouteTable
Container element.


or


The RouteEntry elements nested under the RouteTable element specify the routing information for the edge server.
Administrators use these elements to route connections to the desired destination. The RouteTable element can be
left empty or it can contain one or more RouteEntry elements.
The protocol attribute specifies the protocol to use for the outgoing connection. The attribute is set to "" (an empty
string), rtmp for a connection that isn’t secure, or rtmps for a secure connection.

• Specifying "" (an empty string) means preserving the security status of the incoming connection.
• If the incoming connection was secure, then the outgoing connection will also be secure.
• If the incoming connection was not secure, the outgoing connection will not be secure.
• Specifying rtmp instructs the edge not to use a secure outgoing connection, even if the incoming connection was
secure.

• Specifying rtmps instructs the edge to use a secure outgoing connection, even if the incoming connection was not
secure.
You can override the security status for a connection mapping by specifying a protocol attribute in a RouteEntry
element. By default, Adobe Media Server applies the protocol configured in the RouteTable list unless the mapping
for a particular RouteEntry element overrides it.
Contained elements
RouteEntry

SSL
Container element.
If a virtual host is running in remote mode as an edge server and you want to configure the properties of an outgoing
SSL connection to an upstream server, then you must enable this section and configure its SSL elements appropriately.
When Adobe Media Server acts as a client to make an outgoing SSL connection, the following sequence of events takes
place:

• The SSL elements in the Vhost.xml file are evaluated first.
• If the SSL elements in the Vhost.xml file override the SSL elements in the Server.xml file, Adobe Media Server uses
the SSL elements in the Vhost.xml file to configure the connection.

Last updated 8/21/2014

250

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

• If the SSL elements in the Vhost.xml file match the SSL elements in the Server.xml file, Adobe Media Server uses
the default values for SSL in the Server.xml file to configure the connection.

• If the SSL elements in an edge’s Vhost.xml file are not present, Adobe Media Server uses the default values specified
in the SSL section of Server.xml to configure the SSL connection to upstream servers.
Note: When Adobe Media Server is running in local mode as an origin server, the SSL information in the vhost.xml file
is not evaluated.
You can also override the configuration for outgoing SSL connections for an individual virtual host in Vhost.xml by
copying the SSL elements in Server.xml to the corresponding SSL section in the Vhost.xml file.
For more information on the SSL elements in Server.xml, see SSL.
Contained elements
SSLCACertificateFile, SSLCACertificatePath, SSLCipherSuite, SSLVerifyCertificate, SSLVerifyDepth

SSLCACertificateFile
Specifies the name of a file that contains one or more CA (Certificate Authority) digital certificates in PEM (Privacy
Enhanced Mail) encryption format.

SSLCACertificatePath
Specifies the name of a directory containing CA certificates. Each file in the directory must contain only a single CA
certificate. File names must be the hash with “0” as the file extension.
For Win32 only: If this element is empty, attempts are made to find CA certificates in the certs directory located at the
same level as the conf directory. The Windows certificate store can be imported into this directory by running
AMSMaster - console - initialize from the command line.

SSLCipherSuite
Specifies the suite of encryption ciphers that the server uses to secure communications.
This element is a colon-delimited list of encryption resources, such as a key-exchange algorithm, authentication
method, encryption method, digest type, or one of a selected number of aliases for common groupings. Each item in
the cipher list specifies the inclusion or exclusion of an algorithm or cipher. In addition, there are special keywords and
prefixes. For example, the keyword ALL specifies all ciphers, and the prefix ! removes the cipher from the list.
The default cipher list instructs the server to accept all ciphers, but block those using anonymous Diffie-Hellman
authentication, block low-strength ciphers, block export ciphers, block MD5 hashing, and sort ciphers by strength
from highest to lowest level of encryption.
Important: Contact Adobe Support before changing the default settings.
The cipher list consists of one or more cipher strings separated by colons. Commas or spaces are also acceptable
separators, but colons are normally used.
The string of ciphers can take several different forms.

• It can consist of a single cipher suite, such as RC4-SHA.
• It can represent a list of cipher suites containing a certain algorithm, or cipher suites of a certain type.
For example, SHA1 represents all cipher suites using the digest algorithm SHA1, and SSLv3 represents all SSL v3
algorithms.

Last updated 8/21/2014

251

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

• Lists of cipher suites can be combined in a single cipher string using the + character as a logical and operation.
For example, SHA1+DES represents all cipher suites containing the SHA1 and DES algorithms.

• Each cipher string can be optionally preceded by the characters !, -, or +.
• If ! is used, then the ciphers are permanently deleted from the list. The ciphers deleted can never reappear in the
list even if they are explicitly stated.

• If - is used, then the ciphers are deleted from the list, but some or all of the ciphers can be added again later.
• If + is used, then the ciphers are moved to the end of the list. This option doesn't add any new ciphers—it just moves
matching existing ones.

• If none of these characters is present, then the string is just interpreted as a list of ciphers to be appended to the
current preference list.

• If the list includes any ciphers already present, the server does not evaluate them.
• The cipher string @STRENGTH sorts the current cipher list in order of the length of the encryption algorithm key.
The components can be combined with the appropriate prefixes to create a list of ciphers, including only those ciphers
the server is prepared to accept, in the order of preference.
Example
This cipher string instructs the server to accept all ciphers except those using anonymous or ephemeral Diffie-Hellman
key exchange.
ALL:!ADH:!EDH

These cipher strings instruct the server to accept only RSA key exchange and refuse export or null encryption. The
server evaluates both strings as equivalent.
RSA:!NULL!EXP
RSA:LOW:MEDIUM:HIGH

This cipher list instructs the server to accept all ciphers but place them in order of decreasing strength. This sequencing
allows clients to negotiate for the strongest cipher that both they and the server can accept.
ALL:+HIGH:+MEDIUM:+LOW:+EXP:+NULL

This string instructs the server to accept only high- and medium-strength encryption, with the high being preferred,
and reject export-strength versions.
ALL:+HIGH:!LOW:!EXP:!NULL

This string instructs the server to accept all ciphers but to order them so that SSLv2 ciphers come after SSLv3 ciphers.
ALL:+SSLv2

The following is the complete list of components that the server can evaluate.
Key exchange algorithm

Description

kRSA

Key exchange

kDHr

Diffie-Hellman key exchange with RSA key

kDHd

Diffie-Hellman key exchange with DSA key

RSA

Ephemeral Diffie-Hellman key exchange

Last updated 8/21/2014

252

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Key exchange algorithm

Description

DH

RSA key exchange

EDH

Ephemeral Diffie-Hellman key exchange

ADH

Anonymous Diffie-Hellman key exchange

Authentication methods

Description

aNULL

No authentication

aRSA

RSA authentication

aDSS

DSS authentication

aDH

Diffie-Hellman authentication

Encryption methods

Description

eNULL

No encoding

DES

DES encoding

3DES

Triple-DES encoding

RC4

RC4 encoding

RC2

RC2 encoding

IDEA

IDEA encoding

NULL

No encryption

EXP

All export ciphers (40-bit encryption)

LOW

Low-strength ciphers (no export, DES)

MEDIUM

128-bit encryption

HIGH

Triple-DES encoding

Digest types

Description

MD5

MD5 hash function

SHA1

SHA1 hash function

SHA

SHA hash function

Additional aliases

Description

All

All ciphers

SSLv2

All SSL version 2.0 ciphers

SSLv3

All SSL version 3.0 ciphers

DSS

All ciphers using DSS authentication

Last updated 8/21/2014

253

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

SSLVerifyCertificate
Specifies whether the certificate returned by the server should be verified. Certificate verification is enabled by default.
To disable certificate verification, specify false.
Note: Disabling certificate verification can result in security problems.

SSLVerifyDepth
Specifies the maximum depth of the certificate chain to accept. If a self-signed root certificate cannot be found within
this depth, certificate verification fails. The default value is 9.
Example
9

Streams
Specifies the virtual directory mapping for recorded streams. The Streams element enables you to specify a virtual
directory for stored stream resources used by more than one application. By using a virtual directory, you specify a
relative path that points to a shared directory that multiple applications can access.
You can specify multiple virtual directory mappings for streams by adding additional Streams elements—one for each
virtual directory mapping.
For more information, see the “Configuring content storage” section of the Configuration and Administration Guide.
Examples
The following configuration maps all streams whose names begin with foo/ to the physical directory c:\data. The
stream named foo/bar maps to the physical file c:\data\bar.flv.
foo;c:\data

If a stream is named foo/bar/x, the server tries to find a virtual directory mapping for foo/bar. If there is no virtual
directory for foo/bar, the server checks for a virtual directory mapping for foo. Since a virtual directory mapping
does exist for foo, the stream foo.bar maps to the file c:\data\bar\x.flv.
Note: If the virtual directory you specify does not end with a backslash, the server adds one.
The following configuration maps streams whose paths begin with common/ to the folder
C:\flashmediaserver\myapplications\shared\resources.
common;C:\flashmediaserver\myapplications\shared\resources\

If the application “videoConference” refers to an item common/video/recorded/june5 and the application
“collaboration” refers to common/video/recorded/june5, they both point to the same item
C:\flashmediaserver\myapplications\shared\resources\video\recorded\june5\.
See also
VirtualDirectory

VirtualDirectory
Specifies virtual directory mappings for resources such as recorded streams.

Last updated 8/21/2014

254

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
XML configuration files reference

Virtual directories let you share resources among applications. When the beginning portion of a resource’s URI
matches a virtual directory, Adobe Media Server serves the resource from the physical directory. For detailed
information on mapping virtual directories, see “Mapping virtual directories to physical directories” on page 51.
You can use the VirtualDirectory element in conjunction with the VirtualKeys element to serve content based on
Flash Player version information. For more information, see VirtualKeys.
Note: If you are mapping a virtual directory to a drive on another computer, make sure that the computer running Adobe
Media Server has the right permissions to access the other computer. For more information, see “Mapping directories to
network drives” on page 50.
Example
For example, using the following VirtualDirectory XML, if a client called NetStream.play("vod/myVideo"), the
server would play the file d:\sharedStreams\myVideo.flv:

vod;d:\sharedStreams


Contained elements
Streams

See also
VirtualKeys

VirtualHost
Root element of the Vhost.xml file.
This element contains all the configuration elements for the Vhost.xml file.

VirtualKeys
Lets you map Flash Player versions to keys. The keys are used in the VirtualDirectory element to map URLs to
physical locations on a server. Use these elements to deliver streams to clients based on Flash Player version.
Contained elements
Key

WaitTime
Specifies length to wait in milliseconds for edge autodiscovery. The number must be long enough to establish a TCP
connection, perform a UDP broadcast, collect the UDP responses, and return an XML response. Do not set this
number too low.
Example
1000

See also
Enabled, AllowOverride

Last updated 8/21/2014

255

256

Chapter 8: Diagnostics Log Messages
Message IDs in diagnostic logs
The IDs of messages that appear in the diagnostic log files (master.xx.log, edge.xx.log, core.xx.log, admin.xx.log, and
httpcache.xx.log) record information about server operations. Message IDs can be useful for administrators who want
to write error-handling scripts. For status codes related to applications, instances, or users that you can use for
debugging, see “Access logs” on page 98and “Application logs” on page 105.
Message ID

Description

1000

Received termination signal; server shutdown in progress.

1001

Received interrupt signal; server shutdown in progress.

1002

Server initialization failed; service will be stopped.

1003

Error during shutdown process; process will be terminated.

1004

Reinitializing server.

1005

Failed to start the following listeners for adaptor %1$S: %2$S.

1006

Failed to stop %1$S listeners for adaptor %2$S.

1007

Failed to create thread (%1$S).

1008

Asynchronous I/O operation failed (%1$S: %2$S).

1009

Service Control Manager failed (%1$S: %2$S).

1010

Service Control Manager reported (%1$S: %2$S).

1011

Server starting...

1012

Server stopped %1$S.

1013

Failed to create listener for adaptor %1$S, IP %2$S, port %3$S: %4$S.

1014

Command name not found in the message.

1015

Method not found (%1$S).

1016

Failed to execute method (%1$S).

1017

Failed to stop virtual host (%1$S).

1018

The call method failed, invalid parameters: call(methodName[, resultObj, p1, pn]).

1019

Dropping application (%1$S) message. Clients not allowed to broadcast message.

1020

Response object not found (%1$S).

1021

Missing unlock for shared object %1$S, lock count %2$S.

1022

Nested lock for shared object %1$S, lock count %2$S.

1023

Unlock called without matching lock for shared object %1$S.

1024

Invalid application; rejecting message (%1$S).

1025

Ignoring message from client during authentication.

Last updated 8/21/2014

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Diagnostics Log Messages

Message ID

Description

1026

Connection to %1$S lost.

1027

Unknown %1$S command issued for stream %2$S (application %3$S).

1028

Exception while processing message.

1029

Bad network data; terminating connection: %1$S.

1030

Illegal subscriber: %1$S cannot subscribe to %2$S.

1031

Failed to start virtual host (%1$S).

1032

Failed to open configuration file: %1$S.

1033

Parse error at line %1$S: %2$S.

1034

Connect failed ( %1$S, %2$S ): %3$S.

1035

Invalid proxy object; connection may be lost (%1$S).

1036

Connect from host (%1$S) not allowed.

1037

No adaptors defined.

1038

Adaptor already defined with the name %1$S.

1039

Rejecting connection from %1$S to %2$S.

1040

Failed to create administrator: %1$S.

1041

Failed to remove administrator: %1$S.

1042

Failed to change password: %1$S.

1043

Resource limit violation. Unable to create stream: %1$S.

1044

Resource limit violation. Unable to create shared object: %1$S.

1045

Script execution is taking too long.

1046

Reserved property (%1$S).

1047

Admin request received from an invalid Administration Server.

1048

Administrator login failed for user %1$S.

1049

Failed to start server.

1050

Write access denied for shared object %1$S.

1051

Read access denied for shared object %1$S.

1052

Write access denied for stream %1$S.

1053

Read access denied for stream %1$S.

1054

Virtual host %1$S is not available.

1055

Invalid parameters to %1$S method.

1056

Alive.

1057

NetConnection.Call.Failed

1058

Invalid application name (%1$S).

1059

Invalid user ID (%1$S).

Last updated 8/21/2014

257

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Diagnostics Log Messages

Message ID

Description

1060

NetConnection.Admin.CommandFailed

1061

Invalid parameters to %1$S method.

1062

Failed to unload application %1$S.

1063

Failed to load application %1$S.

1064

%1$S applications unloaded.

1065

Admin user requires valid user name and password.

1066

Invalid virtual host alias : %1$S.

1067

Error registering class: name mismatch (%1$S, %2$S).

1068

Connection rejected: maximum user limit reached for application instance %1$S.

1069

(%2$S, %3$S) : Failed to load application instance %1$S.

1070

(%2$S, %3$S) : Connection rejected to application instance %1$S. Client already connected to an application.

1071

Illegal access property (%1$S).

1072

%1$S is now published.

1073

%1$S is now unpublished.

1074

Stopped recording %1$S.

1075

Stream %1$S has been idling for %2$S second(s).

1076

Playing and resetting %1$S.

1077

Pausing %1$S.

1078

Unpausing %1$S.

1079

Started playing %1$S.

1080

Stopped playing %1$S.

1081

Recording %1$S.

1082

Failed to record %1$S.

1083

New NetStream created (stream ID: %1$S).

1084

NetStream deleted (stream ID: %1$S).

1085

Publishing %1$S.

1086

Failed to publish %1$S.

1087

Failed to restart virtual host (%1$S).

1088

Connection to Adobe Media Server has been disconnected.

1089

Failed to play (stream ID: %1$S).

1090

Failed to play %1$S (stream ID: %2$S).

1091

Play stop failed, stream ID: %1$S.

1092

Audio receiving enabled (stream ID: %1$S).

1093

Audio receiving disabled (stream ID: %1$S).

Last updated 8/21/2014

258

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Diagnostics Log Messages

Message ID

Description

1094

Failed to enable audio receiving (stream ID: %1$S).

1095

Failed to stop playing (stream ID: %1$S).

1096

Video receiving enabled (stream ID: %1$S).

1097

Video receiving disabled (stream ID: %1$S).

1098

Set video fps to %1$S (stream ID: %2$S).

1099

Failed to receive video (stream ID: %1$S).

1100

Seeking %1$S (stream ID: %2$S).

1101

Failed to seek (stream ID: %1$S).

1102

Failed to seek %1$S (stream ID: %2$S).

1103

Invalid schedule event format (%1$S).

1104

Invalid method name (%1$S).

1105

(%2$S, %3$S): Invalid application name (%1$S).

1106

Connection succeeded.

1107

Connection failed.

1108

Invalid shared object (%1$S).

1109

Unknown exception caught in %1$S.

1110

Invalid stream name (%1$S).

1111

Server started (%1$S).

1112

JavaScript runtime is out of memory; server shutting down instance (Adaptor: %1$S, VHost: %2$S, App: %3$S).
Check the JavaScript runtime size for this application in the configuration file.

1113

JavaScript engine runtime is low on free memory. Take action.

1114

Failed to start listeners for adaptor %1$S.

1115

Configuration error for adaptor %1$S: IP %2$S and port %3$S are already in use.

1116

Failed to create adaptor: %1$S.

1117

Failed to play %1$S; stream not found.

1118

Insufficient admin privileges to perform %1$S command.

1119

Failed to initialize listeners for adaptor %1$. Adobe Media Server is already running or other processes are using
the same ports.

1120

Configuration file not found: %1$S

1121

Invalid configuration file: %1$S

1122

Server aborted.

1123

Invalid NetStream ID (%1$S).

1124

Failed to open shared object file (%1$S) for write.

1125

Failed to open shared object file (%1$S) for read.

1126

Failed to flush shared object (%1$S).

Last updated 8/21/2014

259

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Diagnostics Log Messages

Message ID

Description

1127

Failed to initialize shared object from persistent store (%1$S).

1128

Invalid shared object file (%1$S).

1129

Failed to play %1$S; index file not found or mismatch.

1130

(%2$S, %3$S): Application (%1$S) is not defined.

1131

(%2$S, %3$S): Resource limit violation. Unable to load new application: %1$S.

1132

(%2$S, %3$S): Resource limit violation. Unable to create new application instance: %1$S.

1133

(%2$S, %3$S): Resource limit violation. Rejecting connection to: %1$S.

1134

Failed to load admin application.

1135

Preload application aborted.

1136

(%2$S, %3$S): Application (%1$S) is currently offline.

1137

Admin command setApplicationState failed for %1$S.

1138

Command successful.

1139

Script is taking too long to process the event. Shutting down instance: %1$S.

1140

NetConnection.Call.Success

1141

Unable to locate server configuration file during startup.

1142

Unable to locate script file: %1$S.

1143

NetConnection.Call.AccessDenied

1144

NetConnection.Call.BadValue

1145

Publish %1$S failed, invalid arguments.

1146

Pause %1$S failed, invalid arguments.

1147

Unable to create directory %1$S.

1148

Server shutdown failed.

1149

Invalid admin command: %1$S.

1150

Beta expired.

1151

Invalid object name (stream ID: %1$S).

1152

Breaking potential deadlock, shared object(%1$S) lock reset to unlocked.

1153

Potential deadlock, shared object (%1$S) has been locked for %2$S sec.

1154

Invalid license key: %1$S

1155

License key specified does not allow multiple adaptor support.

1156

License key specified does not allow multiple virtual host support.

1157

(%2$S, %3$S/%1$S): Current server bandwidth usage exceeds license limit set. Rejecting connection.

1158

(%2$S, %3$S/%1$S): Current virtual host bandwidth usage exceeds max limit set. Rejecting connection.

1159

Multiprocessor support available only in Enterprise Edition.

1160

Trial run expired. Server shutting down.

Last updated 8/21/2014

260

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Diagnostics Log Messages

Message ID

Description

1161

License key has expired.

1162

Invalid shared object name (%1$S).

1163

Failed to record %1$S, no space left on device.

1164

Unknown exception occurred. Instance will be unloaded: %1$S.

1165

Failed login attempt from %1$S at %2$S.

1166

Attempt to reconnect to Adobe Media Server.

1167

Failed to remove application: %1$S.

1168

Exception while processing message: %1$S.

1169

Failed to execute admin command: %1$S.

1170

Unloaded application instance %1$S.

1171

System memory load (%1$S) is high.

1172

System memory load (%1$S) is now below the maximum threshold.

1173

Generic message code.

1174

Listener started (%1$S): %2$S.

1175

Restarting listener (%1$S): %2$S.

1176

Out of memory: %1$S.

1177

Adaptor (%1$S) has an SSL configuration error on port %2$S.

1178

Error from %1$S:%2$S.

1179

Warning from %1$S:%2$S.

1180

Info from %1$S:%2$S.

1181

Exception caught in %1$S while processing streaming data inside %2$S.

1182

(%2$S, %3$S): Max connections allowed exceed license limit. Rejecting connection to: %1$S.

1183

An internal version control error has occurred.

1184

Invalid cryptographic accelerator: %1$S.

1185

Failed to initialize cryptographic accelerator: %1$S.

1186

Failed to seed the pseudorandom number generator.

1187

Application directory does not exist: %1$S

1188

Using default application directory: %1$S

1189

Application instance is not loaded: %1$S

1190

Error: command message sent before client connection has been accepted.

1191

Failed to play %1$S; adaptor not found: %2$S.

1192

Invalid value set for configuration key: %1$S = %2$S, using %3$S.

1193

Pending queue size limit %1$S reached. Rejecting connection request Host: %2$S:%3$S.

1194

Client to server bandwidth limit exceeded. [Virtual host (%1$S), Max Allowed %2$S, Current %3$S]

Last updated 8/21/2014

261

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Diagnostics Log Messages

Message ID

Description

1195

Server to client bandwidth limit exceeded. [Virtual host (%1$S), Max Allowed %2$S, Current %3$S]

1196

Adaptor (%1$S) does not exist.

1197

Virtual host (%1$S) does not exist.

1198

Message queue is too large. Server memory usage too high. Disconnecting client.

1199

Duplicate license key: %1$S

1200

Expired license key: %1$S

1201

No primary license key found. Switching to Developer Edition.

1202

Commercial and Educational licenses cannot be mixed. Switching to Developer Edition.

1203

Personal and Professional licenses cannot be mixed. Switching to Developer Edition.

1204

NFR licences cannot be mixed with any other kind. Switching to Developer Edition.

1205

OEM licences cannot be mixed with any other kind. Switching to Developer Edition.

1206

Too many trial licenses detected. Switching to Developer Edition.

1207

Shared object %1$S has changed and is not being saved, as auto commit is set to false. Current version %2$S,
Last saved version %3$S.

1208

%1$S failed. Invalid argument %2$S.

1209

File operation %1$S failed. %2$S

1210

File operation %1$S failed. File is in closed state (%2$S).

1211

File operation %1$S failed. Object is not a file (%2$S).

1212

File object creation failed (%1$S).

1213

Connection rejected by server. Reason: %1$S.

1214

Invalid substitution variable: %1$S

1215

Resetting service failure action from %1$S to %2$S.

1216

Administrator (%1$S) already exists.

1217

Failed to open log file. Log aborted.

1218

Failed to play stream %1$S: Recorded mode not supported.

1219

Missing arguments to %1$S method.

1220

Invalid admin stream: %1$S .

1221

Core (%1$S) started, arguments: %2$S.

1222

Failed to start core: %1$S %2$S.

1223

Core (%1$S) is no longer active.

1224

Edge (%1$S) started, arguments: %2$S.

1225

Failed to start edge: %1$S %2$S.

1226

Edge (%1$S) is no longer active.

1227

Shared memory heap (%1$S) has exceeded 90 usage. Consider increasing the heap size to prevent future
memory allocation failures.

Last updated 8/21/2014

262

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Diagnostics Log Messages

Message ID

Description

1228

Failed to create process mutex.

1229

Process (%1$S): shared memory (%2$S) init failed.

1230

Process (%1$S): failed to map view of shared memory (%2$S).

1231

Core (%1$S) connected to admin.

1132

Core (%1$S) failed to connect to admin.

1233

Core (%1$S) disconnecting from admin.

1234

Core (%1$S) connection to admin accepted.

1235

Core (%1$S) connection to admin failed.

1236

Core (%1$S) received close command from admin.

1237

Starting admin app on core (%1$S).

1238

Core (%1$S) connecting to admin.

1239

Core (%1$S): Failed to initiate connection to admin.

1240

Core (%1$S) shutdown failed.

1241

Connection to admin received.

1242

Core (%1$S) disconnected: %2$S.

1243

Connection from core %1$S received.

1244

Connection from core %1$S accepted.

1245

Failed to send connect response to core %1$S.

1246

Core (%1$S) sending register command to edge.

1247

Core (%1$S) disconnected from edge.

1248

Core (%1$S) failed to establish proxy to edge.

1249

Core (%1$S) socket migration failed.

1250

Edge disconnected from core (%1$S).

1251

Proxy to core (%1$S) failed.

1252

Registering core (%1$S).

1253

Socket migration to core (%1$S) failed.

1254

Recovering edge %1$S with %2$S failure[s] after %3$S seconds!

1255

Edge (%1$S) %2$S experienced %3$S failure[s]!

1256

Core (%1$S) %2$S experienced %3$S failure[s]!

1257

Core (%1$S) %2$S is not responding and is being restarted!

1258

Core (%1$S) is no longer active; create a new one.

1259

Recovering core %1$S with %2$S failure[s] after %3$S seconds!

1260

Core (%1$S) did not shut down as expected. Killing core now.

1261

Command (%1$S) timed out.

Last updated 8/21/2014

263

ADOBE MEDIA SERVER 5.0.6 CONFIGURATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Diagnostics Log Messages

Message ID

Description

1262

OpenProcess(PROCESS_TERMINATE) failed with %1$S.

1263

OpenProcess(PROCESS_QUERY_INFORMATION) failed for pid (%1$S) with %2$S.

1373

SWF verification failed, disconnecting client.

1374

SWF verification timeout, disconnecting client.

1375

SWF verification unsupported by client, disconnecting client.

Last updated 8/21/2014

264



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Tagged PDF                      : Yes
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c320 44.284297, Mon Apr 16 2007 09:10:35
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Adobe Media Server 5.0.6 Configuration and Administration
Description                     : Adobe Media Server 5.0.6
Creator                         : Adobe Systems Incorporated
Create Date                     : 2014:08:21 01:54:02Z
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 8.0
Modify Date                     : 2014:08:21 01:54:02Z
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller Server 8.1.0 (Sparc Solaris, Built: 2007-09-07)
Document ID                     : uuid:e0ba0066-1dd1-11b2-0a00-001838d80016
Instance ID                     : uuid:e0ba006c-1dd1-11b2-0a00-ffbff330fdb2
Page Count                      : 268
Subject                         : Adobe Media Server 5.0.6
Author                          : Adobe Systems Incorporated
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu